CATT-Acoustic v8

Room Acoustics Prediction and Desktop Auralization

Users Manual

Copyright CATT 2002

CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Users Manual

Copyright CATT 2002

CATT Mariagatan 16A SE-41471 Gothenburg Sweden Phone/Fax: +46 31 145154 E-mail: info@catt.se WWW: http://www.catt.se

Front page pictures and model from Javier Barros Sierra Auditorium at Facultad de Ingenieria, UNAM, Mexico Courtesy of Juan Carlos Andrews Gonzalez from his thesis on the acoustic analysis of this hall.

1 edition, printed in Gothenburg Sweden, April 2002

st

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Installation .......................................................................................1-1
Optional user-supplied info included in license ..................................................... 1-4

1.2 Typical session................................................................................1-4

Audience area mapping....................................................................................... 1-8 Early part detailed ISM ........................................................................................ 1-8 Full detailed calculation ....................................................................................... 1-8

1.3 Common user interface elements ..................................................1-9

Menus ................................................................................................................. 1-9 Dialogs .............................................................................................................. 1-16 Toolbar.............................................................................................................. 1-16 Hidden options .................................................................................................. 1-16 Miscellaneous.................................................................................................... 1-17

1.4 Input/output files overview ...........................................................1-19

Source directivity module................................................................................... 1-19 Surface properties module................................................................................. 1-20 Prediction module.............................................................................................. 1-20 Multiple source addition module......................................................................... 1-21 Binaural post-processing module ....................................................................... 1-21 Plot-file view module.......................................................................................... 1-22 Sequence processing module............................................................................ 1-22

1.5 Software overview .........................................................................1-23

Hardware requirements ..................................................................................... 1-23 Hall geometry and absorption ............................................................................ 1-23 Coordinate system............................................................................................. 1-24 Frequency range ............................................................................................... 1-25 Source directivity ............................................................................................... 1-25 Data output........................................................................................................ 1-26

1.6 How to get started .........................................................................1-27 1.7 About CATT ...................................................................................1-28

2. PREDICTION MODULE
2.1 Menus...............................................................................................2-1 2.2 Dialogs .............................................................................................2-8
General settings .................................................................................................. 2-8 Geometry view/check ........................................................................................ 2-12 Audience area mapping..................................................................................... 2-17 Early part detailed ISM ...................................................................................... 2-21 Full detailed calculation ..................................................................................... 2-23

CONTENTS

2.3 Input-files .......................................................................................2-27

Common features .............................................................................................. 2-28 Geometry-files ................................................................................................... 2-30 Source-file ......................................................................................................... 2-54 Receiver-file ...................................................................................................... 2-58

2.4 Output-files ....................................................................................2-61

General ............................................................................................................. 2-61 Geometry view/check results ............................................................................. 2-61 Audience area mapping results.......................................................................... 2-63 Early part detailed ISM results ........................................................................... 2-64 Full detailed calculation results .......................................................................... 2-66

2.5 Theory ............................................................................................2-69

Prediction methods............................................................................................ 2-69 Automatic edge diffusion.................................................................................... 2-73 Reverberant decay and reverberation time estimation........................................ 2-74 Room acoustic parameters ................................................................................ 2-75 Echogram calculation ........................................................................................ 2-78 Directivity handling ............................................................................................ 2-80 Calculation recommendations............................................................................ 2-81

2.6 Tips and Tricks ..............................................................................2-82 2.7 Trouble-shooting ...........................................................................2-85

Geometrical errors............................................................................................. 2-85 Audience area mapping problems...................................................................... 2-86 Early part calculation problems .......................................................................... 2-86 Full detailed calculation problems ...................................................................... 2-86

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

3.1 Menus...............................................................................................3-1 3.2 Dialogs .............................................................................................3-5

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE
4.1 Menus...............................................................................................4-1 4.2 Dialogs ...........................................................................................4-12
15-degree interpolated format (SD0).................................................................. 4-12 10-degree measured format (SD1) .................................................................... 4-13 DLL-format (SD2) .............................................................................................. 4-14 Elements common to both SD0, SD1 (and SD2) formats ................................... 4-15

4.3 Theory ............................................................................................4-18

The 15-degree interpolated format (SD0)........................................................... 4-18 The 10-degree measured format (SD1).............................................................. 4-18

ii

CONTENTS The any-degree measured, interpolated or simulated format (SD2).................... 4-18 Directivity Index ................................................................................................. 4-19 Directivity Contours ........................................................................................... 4-19

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

5.1 Menus...............................................................................................5-1 5.2 Dialogs .............................................................................................5-6
Plot-file control..................................................................................................... 5-6

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

6.1 Menus...............................................................................................6-2 6.2 Dialogs .............................................................................................6-3 6.3 Output-files ......................................................................................6-6
General ............................................................................................................... 6-6 Single receiver result-files.................................................................................... 6-6 Multiple receiver result-files.................................................................................. 6-8

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

7.1 Menus...............................................................................................7-2 7.2 Dialogs ...........................................................................................7-24
General settings ................................................................................................ 7-24 Output-files........................................................................................................ 7-28 Create files for HeadScape................................................................................ 7-30 Early part response ........................................................................................... 7-32 Late part response............................................................................................. 7-32 Convolution ....................................................................................................... 7-32 Walkthrough convolution.................................................................................... 7-35

7.3 Theory ............................................................................................7-38

Impulse response scale and calibration.............................................................. 7-38 Reflection path (RP) transfer function ................................................................ 7-39 Receiver model ................................................................................................. 7-40 Late part generation .......................................................................................... 7-43 Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient ............................................................ 7-43 Crosstalk cancelling filters ................................................................................. 7-44

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE

iii

CONTENTS

9. CATT EDITOR
9.1 Non-standard menus.......................................................................9-1

10. AUTOCAD INTERFACE

10.1 Introduction .................................................................................10-1
Direct creation of a model in AutoCAD............................................................... 10-1 Modification of an existing drawing in AutoCAD format....................................... 10-1 Import of an existing model in the CATT format.................................................. 10-2 Basic interface concepts .................................................................................... 10-4

10.2 Installation ...................................................................................10-4 10.3 AutoLISP commands...................................................................10-4 10.4 Modeling tips ...............................................................................10-6

11. TUTORIAL
11.1 Preparation ..................................................................................11-1 11.2 Modeling ......................................................................................11-1
Step 1, the audience and floor surfaces ............................................................. 11-3 Step 2, walls and ceiling .................................................................................... 11-5 Step 3, entrance wall and door .......................................................................... 11-6 Step 4, the stage ............................................................................................... 11-7 Step 5, source/receiver locations ....................................................................... 11-8 Step 6, side wall reflectors ............................................................................... 11-10

11.3 Prediction...................................................................................11-11
Audience area mapping................................................................................... 11-11 Early part detailed ISM .................................................................................... 11-12 Full detailed calculation ................................................................................... 11-13

11.4 Multiple source addition............................................................11-14 11.5 Binaural post-processing - Auralization ..................................11-15 11.6 Sequence processing................................................................11-17

12. REFERENCES APPENDIX A - TUTORIAL FILES INDEX

iv

1. INTRODUCTION

1. INTRODUCTION
The Introduction describes how CATT-Acoustic is installed, an example of how it is run, common user interface elements, an overview of input/output-files used, a general overview of what the software can do, and a CATT background. Manual conventions: File-names, folder-names, text to be entered and text-file contents are set in COURIER like in C:\CATT. Menu selections are set in bold as in File|Preferences. Dialog names are set in bold italics as in General settings. Dialog items are set in italics as in General settings/Input folder. Dialog groups are set in italics within brackets as in General settings/(Plane use) . Menus and dialogs belonging to specific programs or program modules are sometimes written prefixed with the module name and a colon as in Prediction:General settings. Product, organization and company names are set in italics as in CATT-Acoustic. Items in square brackets as in [Dalenbck-95] refer to References, Section 12. All products mentioned in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners.

1.1 Installation
CATT-Acoustic is installed from CD by inserting the CD (in say G:) and Run G:\install. The installation program will then perform all necessary steps (for licenses including hardware locks, and when running under Windows NT, some further short separately described steps are required after installation, see README.TXT). All CATT programs as well as libraries and other related files are kept under a single folder selected at installation, typically C:\CATT. This folder will hereafter be called the "CATTfolder" and e.g. "CATT-folder ANECHOIC" means the ANECHOIC sub-folder. No files are installed in the WINDOWS folder and no system files other than the Registry are altered. The Registry is used for User Preferences settings and file types/icons. A User name (not including \) is optionally selected as a command line option to the program. It is thus possible to make several shortcuts for CATT32.EXE each with a different user name as a command line option and also a unique current folder. This enables more than one user on the same computer while optionally keeping library files and other Preferences settings personal. For details see section 1.3. If no command-line option is specified, the "Default" user is selected initially. After installation, the files and folders below are present in the CATT-folder. Files marked "internal" may only be changed, removed or updated after instructions from CATT or by CATT software.

1-1

1. INTRODUCTION CATT programs (internal): CATT32.EXE CATTED32.EXE CATTOGL32.EXE CATTPLT32.EXE UNCTT.EXE CATT-Acoustic main program CATT-Edit (Notepad-like customized editor) CATT 3D-viewer based on OpenGL (documented only by its help-file) CATT PLT-viewer (standalone version) program used for extracting software updates and additions downloaded over the internet from the CATT users www page (only in purchased versions).

Supporting Dynamic Link Libraries (internal): METER32.DLL STRNGS32.DLL SWITCH32.DLL OGLSWITCH32.DLL DATA32.DLL ERRORS32.DLL XTRA32.DLL Windows Help-file (internal): CATT32.HLP help-file CATT-Acoustic CATTOGL32.HLP help-file CATT 3D-viewer CATTPLT32.HLP help-file CATT PLT-viewer HIDDENOPTIONS.TXT Hidden options settings (see Section 1-3, only purchased versions) Surface properties (absorption and diffusion) library files to be selected in Preferences: CATT-folder ABSLIBS (folder, internal) *.DAT Source directivity library-files: CATT-folder SD (folder, internal) *.SD0 (15 format ) *.SD1 (10 format) *.SD2 (DDI format) *.COL (directivity collection files) DLL Directivity Interface (DDI) folders used by the SD2 directivity format: CATT-folder SD2DATA (folder, internal) CATT-folder SD2DATA\CATT_Generic (folder, internal) CATT_Generic.DLL CATT_Generic.HLP CATT-folder SD2DATA\ further DDI folders/modules Headphone equalization filters to be selected in Preferences : CATT-folder HEADPHONES (folder, internal): *.DAT

1-2

1. INTRODUCTION Note: For limited versions only one headphone filter is provided: "Generic" (filename GENERIC_v8_plain_44.MAT. To use the correct headphone filter is very important. The generic filter may result in severe coloration with some headphones. Head-Related Transfer Functions (HRTFs) for binaural post-processing to be selected in Preferences: CATT-folder HRTFS (folder, internal): *.DAT Note: for limited versions only an HRTF library based on analytical sphere expressions is provided: SPHERE_plain_44.DAT. Mono WAV-files with anechoically recorded material to be used with the software convolver in the Post-processing module. Further samples can be taken from the accompanying CD (full version): CATT-folder ANECHOIC (folder) ????_44_AN.WAV a number of anechoic 44100 Hz WAV-files Note: these files are short samples from the accompanying CD from Bang & Olufsen (B&O). CATT has, as a service to users, been granted permission to include short samples from this CD provided that the full CD also is included with the software. Copyright remains with B&O and must be carefully considered if samples from the CD are to be used in any context covered by copyright laws such as e.g. broadcasting or internet presentation. For limited versions only a single - a bit noisy - 22050 Hz file is provided: DEMO_22_AN.WAV. *.AWI WAVLIST.TXT anechoic WAV-file info files that contain level and directivity information associated with an anechoic WAV-file. a list and a short description of the anechoically recorded samples provided (full version).

Simple shoebox used for typical session in Section 1.2: CATT-folder SHOEBOX (folder) MASTER.GEO SRC.LOC, REC.LOC GEO.PRD, PROJECT.TXT Manual example hall used in Section 2.3: CATT-folder EXAMPLE (folder) MASTER.GEO, SIDES.GEO, ACROSS.GEO, AUDIENCE.GEO, REFL.GEO, MARKERS.GEO SRC.LOC, REC.LOC GEO.PRD, PROJECT.TXT Tutorial hall files used in Section 11: CATT-folder TUTORIAL (folder) MASTSTEP.GEO, MASTFULL.GEO, REFLECT.GEO SRC.LOC, REC.LOC GEO.PRD, PROJECT.TXT Marker files (illustrating the use of markers for non-acoustical visual elements and loudspeaker visuals:

1-3

1. INTRODUCTION

CATT-folder MARKERS (folder) *.GEO (NOROOM GEO-files to be exported as markers) *.MRK (sample marker-file exported from corresponding GEO-files) AutoCAD interface files (internal): CATT-folder ACAD (folder) Various AutoLISP files (*.LSP) and predefined symbols (*.DWG). The CATT AutoLISP AutoCAD interface is documented in Section 10. For full auralization licenses, The FIReverb Suite can optionally be installed containing the FIR reverberation creator PureVerb and the 8x8 multi-channel convolver MultiVolver. The FIReverb Suite comes with its own help-files but no printed documentation. The FIReverb Suite consists of the following main files in the CATT-folder (for further details consult the FIReverb help-files): PUREVERB32.EXE MLTVLV32.EXE PureVerb (+ help-file PUREVERB32.HLP) MultiVolver (+ help-file MLTVLV32.HLP)

Optional user-supplied info included in license

The license-file mechanism can handle optional user-supplied information. A license can be tagged so that the information must be included and displayed (if it is tampered with, the program will not run). The information is displayed in a "splash" dialog when the program starts that has to be OK-ed by the user. Similarly, each time Help|About is selected the special dialog is displayed together with the normal About dialog. This addition was triggered by one case where an acoustical consultant sponsored a CATT-Acoustic license to a university and wished for the donation to be clearly visible. This information can also be requested by current users, it involves only a replacement of the license DLL.

1.2 Typical session

Below are shown typical steps predicting the acoustics of a simple shoebox-shaped hall with one source and one receiver to give you a feeling of what it is all about. This example is a "mini tutorial" and is kept as clean as possible avoiding many of the more advanced features that are used in the example hall in Section 2.3 and in the dedicated Tutorial in Section 11. This simple examples also only specifies values for 125 Hz to 4k Hz (8k and 16k Hz values are extrapolated). Start CATT-Acoustic. The Prediction module and the Plot-file viewer module opens up directly. Create a new project by selecting Utilities|Create Project. The appearing dialog expects you to enter a project name and select a folder for the hall you are going to work with (say C:\SHOEBOX). The Browse folder button in the dialog also allows you to create a new folder. When OK is clicked all basic files are created automatically, ready to be filled in: MASTER.GEO REC.LOC SRC.LOC GEO.PRD PROJECT.TXT master geometry-file template receiver positions (a generic position inserted) source positions and data (a generic source inserted) prediction settings-file prepared for geometry check a text-file for notes about the project (optional use)

1-4

1. INTRODUCTION Select (Edit) Geo-file and MASTER.GEO and CATT-Edit loads with the file. Enter the geometry data as shown below (the files can also be found in the CATT-folder SHOEBOX or be copied from the help-file). Data items in the geometry-file are constant and absorption declarations, corner ids and coordinates (x, y, z) and, finally, plane definitions. Comments are introduced by a semicolon ";" and blank lines are allowed.
;MASTER.GEO ;constant declarations LOCAL h = 8 ;hall height LOCAL w = 10 ;hall width GLOBAL d = 24 ;hall depth ;absorption and scattering coeff. 125Hz to 4kHz [%], RGB-color ABS audience = <40 50 60 70 80 80> L <30 40 50 60 70 80> {255 0 0} ABS wood = <15 13 10 9 8 7> L <30 30 30 30 30 30> {255 255 0} ;- if 8k and 16k values are known they can be given after ; a colon as in <15 13 10 9 8 7 : 7 8 > otherwise they ; are extrapolated from 2k and 4k values. ;- color is optional, one will be auto generated if not given. ;- scattering coefficients are optional (but strongly recommended) ; if not given the default values in General settings will be used CORNERS ;floor corners 1 -w/2 0 2 -w/2 d 3 w/2 d 4 w/2 0 ;ceiling corners 11 -w/2 0 12 -w/2 d 13 w/2 d 14 w/2 0

0 0 0 0 h h h h

PLANES [1 floor / 4 3 2 1 / audience ] [2 ceiling / 11 12 13 14 / wood ] [3 stage wall / 1 11 14 4 / wood ] [4 rear wall / 3 13 12 2 / wood ] [5 left wall / 2 12 11 1 / wood ] [6 right wall / 4 14 13 3 / wood ]

The absorption/diffusion data can either be entered directly in a geometry-file, as above, or already be defined in a library maintained by the Surface properties module, see Section 3. Save MASTER.GEO. Select (Edit) Receiver-file and REC.LOC and enter the receiver data. Data items in the receiver-file are the receiver ids (00..99) and the corresponding positions (x, y, z).

;REC.LOC RECEIVERS 1 -3

d-4

1.3

Note that global constants defined in GEO-files, in this case d, can also be used in sourceand receiver-files. Save REC.LOC.

1-5

1. INTRODUCTION Select (Edit) Source-file and SRC.LOC and enter the source data. Data items in the sourcefile are source ids (A0..A9, ... , to Z0..Z9), source positions (x, y, z), source directivities, source aim points (x, y, z) and finally sound pressure levels for the six octave bands at 1 meter distance from the source on the source axis. Optionally a source roll angle can be added, see Section 2.3.
;SRC.LOC LOCAL src_z = 1.7 SOURCEDEFS A0 1.0 1.7 src_z OMNI 1.0 3.7 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85>

src_z

Source directivities are managed by the Directivity module, see Section 4. This simple example uses the pre-defined omni-directional natural source OMNI, an electro-acoustical source has a more comprehensive format, see 2.3. Note how a local constant, src_z, is used to ensure that the source is aimed in the horizontal plane (has no practical consequence in this case since the source is omni-directional). Save SRC.LOC. The Create project utility also created a basic settings-file GEO.PRD loaded when the project was created. Select General settings and browse through the various settings and then do the same with Geometry view/check. View the created geometry by clicking Save and Run. This will create basic geometry plotfiles. The current settings-file is also saved so the next time you run it will contain the same settings. Settings-files can be used later on for sequence (batch) processing, see Section 8. If an input-file has been edited and changed without having been saved afterwards, the editor containing the file is moved to the front and a prompt is displayed asking if the file should be saved before continuing. The Prediction module reads the created geometry-file, source- and receiver-files in the project folder (i.e. the Input folder in the General settings dialog) and creates files in the Output folder.

5m Volume:1921m

01 Y A0

Fig. 1.1 Sample shoebox plot-file VIEW4.PLT

1-6

1. INTRODUCTION

One created file, named GEOPLT.TXT (PREDPLT.TXT when predictions are run), contains all created plot-file names and the View module automatically displays all files created (such plot-file lists can also be customized using the View module or a text editor to show an arbitrary assembly of results for presentations). The VIEW4.PLT file is shown in Fig. 1.1. Next/Previous file can either be selected on the optional Plot-file control floating dialog (Ctrl+R), by pressing the PgDn/PgUp keys, or via the toolbar double-arrow buttons. The View module is described in Section 5. Pay special attention to the PLINFO.PLT plot-file that contains plot sub-frames. Next/ Previous frame can be selected on the Plot-file control where all planes can be stepped through and should have their front (reflecting side) colored with the assigned or autogenerated color and the back (non-reflecting) side with black (you can also use right and left arrow keys if the dialog is closed or inactive, the toolbar single-arrow buttons, click-drag the mouse on the yellow title bar or Options|Select Frame). If the color is on the wrong side, the plane corner entering order in the GEO-file has to be reversed. This can either be done by reversing the sequence of corner ids or simply by changing / to \ in the plane definition. The COLORED.PLT file shows a colored version of the hall where only planes viewed from their reflecting side are colored. By rotating the hall (click and drag the left mouse button) it is easy to detect if any planes are forgotten or have been entered reversed (e.g. a reversed ceiling will be shaded on the outside). Similarly, the SHADED.PLT file shows a shaded version of the hall where only planes viewed from their reflecting side are shaded (in an angle dependent manner). A file SHADED.OGL for the standalone OpenGL-based CATT 3D-Viewer was also created and loaded into the viewer. This viewer has many options and can be e.g. used to create presentations. The viewer is documented separately in its help-file. Select the Prediction module again (by clicking on its title or on the toolbar Prediction icon). If the geometry needs to be adjusted edit the geometry-file MASTER.GEO again by (Edit) Geo-file (or simply Alt-TAB to the editor if it is still open) and repeat Save and Run. For a bit of experimenting change the line
LOCAL h = 8 = 8 ;hall height ;hall height

to
GETLOCAL h

and you will be able to enter the height at a screen prompt while the file is being read after Save and Run has been clicked. Let us assume that the geometry now looks OK. It is then time for some predictions of the acoustics in the hall. The software offers three different kinds of predictions: Audience area mapping: color mapping of parameters and/or the direct sound over selected audience planes based on ray-tracing; detailed early reflections for qualitative reflection path studies based on the Image Source Model (ISM);

Early part detailed ISM:

Full detailed calculation: full detailed echograms that can be used for auralization and parameter estimation - based on the unique Randomized Tailcorrected Cone-tracing (RTC).

1-7

1. INTRODUCTION

Audience area mapping

Select Audience area mapping and in the Audience area mapping dialog select No of rays/octave 10000, Ray truncation time 1000 ms. Click the Audience planes button and select plane 1 (the floor) as the audience plane (enter 1 in both edit boxes and press the Add button). Leave the remaining settings at their default values. Click Save and Run again. The settings-file now instructs the Prediction module to perform ray-tracing with 1 m diameter receivers placed at the Map height (0.5 m) over the audience surface and for each of these receivers to calculate various room acoustic parameters. The result-files created are with sound pressure level in four time-windows (SPL_1K.PLT), Later Energy Fractions in four time-windows (LF_1K.PLT) and D-50, C-80, SPL, G, Ts and LF parameters (PAR1_1K.PLT and PAR2_1K.PLT). Mapping is only performed for the octave-bands selected (in this case the 1 kHz band) and all defined sources that are selected in General settings are added together taking electrical delays into account if defined (in the source-file).

Early part detailed ISM

Switch off Audience area mapping and select Early part detailed ISM and in the Early part detailed ISM dialog select Specular refl. order 3 and I.S. truncation time 100 ms, a Refl. history, and an I.S. space plot-file (I.S. = Image Source). Click Save and Run again. The settings-file now instructs the Prediction module to calculate image sources for the early part of the echogram and create a plot-file for the early part reflection History (H_A0_01_1K.PLT) and an image source Space file (S_A0_01_1K.PLT) for source A0 and receiver 01 @1 kHz. Early part detailed ISM only gives plot-files for the octaves selected and no parameters other than SPL are estimated. This calculation type is to be used for qualitative early specular reflection path analysis or for creating files for the Binaural postprocessing and Source addition modules for special cases.

Full detailed calculation

Finally, for the full calculation switch off Early part detailed ISM and select Full detailed calculation and in the Full detailed calculation dialog select No of rays/octave 10000, Ray truncation time 1000 ms. Then click Save and Run again. The settings-file now instructs the Prediction module to perform a thorough prediction using randomized tail-corrected cone-tracing (RTC). To preserve high early part detail direct sound, first order diffuse and specular reflections, and second order specular reflections are handled deterministically by the ISM. A plot-file containing a lot of useful information is created (E_A0_01_1K.PLT) (Echogram source A0 receiver 01 @1 kHz). The plot shows full echogram with backward integrated decay, reverberation time regression lines and coefficients, early part discrete reflections, early part smoothed echogram, backward and forward integrated, cos-squared weighted X (front-back), Y (left-right) and Z (up-down) smoothed echograms. In addition are shown a small hall plan with source- and receiver locations, a dimension scale, source data plus estimated major parameters. Full detailed calculation gives plot-files only for the octaves selected but always calculates for all octaves so that even if a plot-file is forgotten numbers predicted can always be found in PARAM_ss.TXT (PARAM_A0.TXT in this case) and any selected post-processing files always contain full information for the octave-bands 125 Hz and 16 kHz. This calculation type is to be used for detailed quantitative analysis of an echogram and the results can be used by the Multiple source addition and Binaural post-processing modules. Although, in this example, the three different calculation types were run one by one they can

1-8

1. INTRODUCTION be run in any combination and it is good to always have Geometry view/check selected so that with any changes the latest geometry plot-files always correspond to the latest calculation results. If the hall geometry needs to be changed, the geometry-file must again be edited and the geometry has to be viewed/checked. These were the basic steps running CATT-Acoustic in its most generic form. The Example Hall in Section 2.3 and the Tutorial in Section 11 give more realistic examples. Note that the Tutorial can first be run through directly in the help-file since many created plots are shown.

1.3 Common user interface elements

This section describes user interface elements (menus, dialogs, toolbars etc.) that are common to all seven modules in CATT-Acoustic.

Menus
When a menu item is high-lighted a description is displayed in the left status-bar field of the main window. Common menu items are found in the File, the Window, and the Help menu. File|Open Recent file-type | file-names All modules, except Surface properties, have a menu item where the six most recent settings-files etc. are stored for direct selection. These lists are stored individually for each user. File|Preferences Displays the Preferences settings dialog. Each user can have private settings that are stored in Windows Registry. If no new user has been added or selected as a command-line parameter to CATT32.EXE, the Default user is loaded at first start-up.

1-9

1. INTRODUCTION

Surface properties

Preferences

Library used in the Surface properties module and when geometry is read. Each user can have his own library. Libraries are placed in the CATT-folder ABSLIBS. Default anechoic WAV-file Preferences

Used for convolution. If a favorite file is used it is convenient to enter it here since it will be pre-selected in the Convolution dialog. Anechoic WAV-files are placed in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC. HRTF library Preferences

HRTF library used for binaural post-processing at each samplerate. Demo auralization HRTFs for 44.1 kHz, based on a rigid sphere approximation, are named SPHERE_plain_44.DAT. For HRTFs other than those originally provided check the CATT users www page. HRTF library-files are placed in the CATT-folder HRTFS. Headphone filter Preferences

Headphone filter used for binaural post-processing at each samplerate. Demo auralization filters for 44.1 kHz are named GENERIC_V8_plain_44.DAT. For filters other than those originally provided check the CATT users www page. Headphone filters are placed in the CATT-folder HEADPHONES. CATT-Edit font Preferences

The font used by CATT-Edit when it is loaded from the main application. Don't pay any attention to the actual font-size number selected, just select a font size that works well. When CATT-Edit is loaded from e.g. the Windows Explorer, a default font is used. Warn if settings may be inappropriate If potentially inappropriate settings have been selected, warnings will be issued and an option to abort the action is presented. With sequence (batch) runs warnings are temporarily switched off. Experienced users may want to set some warnings off. No direct sound (Prediction) Warning if for some source-receiver combinations the direct sound is blocked. Note that most measures loose their meaning if the direct sound is not present and predictions will be less accurate. Too few rays used (Prediction) Warning if the selected number of rays is less than half the number of rays estimated by "auto number". Too short echogram (Prediction) Warning if the ray truncation time is selected too short. If so T-30 will not be correctly estimated. Warning options Warning options Warning options Preferences

1-10

1. INTRODUCTION Head direction source (> 1 source) (Prediction) Warning options

Warning if more than one source is used and the head direction in Prediction:General settings is set as "source". This is not a meaningful setting except when several sources are calculated as independent cases and the sum of the results at each receiver is never considered. Overwriting old output results (Prediction) Warning options

Warning if the output folder already contains such files that the current calculation will create. Diffuse reflections off (Prediction) Warning options

Warning if diffuse reflection is switched off in Prediction:General settings. Diffuse reflection should normally always be on and surface properties should include scattering coefficients. Default diffusion off (Prediction) Warning options

Warning if the diffusion is switched off in Prediction:General settings. Default diffusion is assigned to all surface that do not have specific diffusion. ISM diffuse reflection order = 0 (Prediction) Warning options

Warning if diffusion is on but in Early part detailed ISM the diffuse reflection order is set to 0. Too short impulse response (Post-proc. related) Warning options

Warning if the impulse response in Post-processing:General settings is too short in relation to the estimated RT. Some early reflections excluded (Post-proc. related) Warning options

Warning if the early part reflection min order is > 0 (full Huron version only). Post-processing based on ISM (Post-proc. related) Warning options

Warning if post-processing files are created using Early part detailed ISM, normally they should only be created by Full detailed calculation. Long calc. no post-processing files (Post-proc. related) Warning options

Warning if a long prediction is started and some of the post-processing options are not selected. Use a small Plot-file control Preferences

Uses a small plot-file control (instead of a bigger one) for navigating 3D views etc. in the View-module. Most controlling functions can be reached via the toolbar or via direct mouse operations. Show Plot-file control Preferences

Opens the plot-file control when the first plot-file after startup is viewed. Most controlling functions can be reached via the toolbar or by click-drag on the window so the control is rarely needed.

1-11

1. INTRODUCTION Auto minimize View-module Preferences

Causes the View-module to minimize as soon as another module is activated. Useful if run in low screen resolutions such as 640x480 VGA (at least 800x600 is recommended). Disable screensaver while calculating Preferences

Some screensavers take a lot of CPU time and can slow down the calculations by almost an order of magnitude and therefore often have to be disabled. This option disables any screensaver only during calculation and is best kept on at all times. 2DA ISM History plot (instead of 3DA) Preferences

The Early part detailed ISM reflection history plot (H_ss_rr_oct.PLT) is normally made as a 3DA plot but the older 2DA version can be switched on (e.g. so that big complex rooms can be zoomed). Thus, either 2DA or 3DA can be selected but not both. Calculate C-50/dB (instead of D-50/%) Preferences

Some users prefer C-50 in dB rather than D-50 in % (C-50 is calculated the same way as C80 but with a 50 ms limit instead of 80 ms). This is how the two measures (that express the same thing) map to each other for every 10% in D-50 (values < 0.1 and > 99.9 will in the table below be mapped to -30 and 30 dB respectively). D-50 C-50 0 -30 10 -9.5 20 -6.0 30 -3.7 40 -1.8 50 0 60 1.8 70 3.7 80 6.0 90 9.5 100 30 % dB

Thus, either C-50 or D-50 can be used but not both. Depending on the type of calculations there are some differences: Full detailed calculation: The type of values displayed cannot be changed afterards by changing the Preferences option. Note: the RASTI_ss.PLT file always shows D-50 since the main reason is to show that the much (much) simpler measure D-50 gives just about the same numbers as the more complex RASTI does. Audience area mapping: The type of values displayed can be changed afterwards by changing the Preferences option and adjusting the Options|Map Scale in the Plot-file viewer. However, the stand-alone PLT-viewer always shows D-50 in maps (this may change later by adding a special D-50/C-50 option to the viewer). Multiple source addition: The type of values displayed cannot be changed afterwards by changing the Preferences option. Preferences

Create 32-bit SIM-files (not for Lake h/w)

With this option off (default) created SIM-files are scaled optimally for use with Lake's 24-bit convolvers. However, with the CATT-Acoustic convolver and The FIReverb Suite MultiVolver full 32-bit coefficients may be used. This is mostly interesting if filters are created in CATTAcoustic (e.g. for a 5-channel to binaural down-mix) but will be used in the MultiVolver that also can use and create 24- and 32-bit WAV-files since for 16-bit WAVs the current SIM-file scaling is well sufficient. Use CATT syntax for HeadScape SIM-files Preferences

Only shown for full version with Lake Huron add-ons. With v7, the only application of HeadScape files was with Lake DSP hardware. With v8 they can also be used with the

1-12

1. INTRODUCTION Walkthrough Convolver. With this option selected, the files name syntax of HeadScape files will be E_ss_rr_hhhvvv_c.SIM rather than Hhhhvvvc.SIM where c is "L" or "R", hhh the horizontal angle and vvv the vertical angle. Graph color Preferences

Sets the background graph color. The selections are quite few (only light colors will work). One use if this could be to change color for a new hall version (as well as a new output folder) to make comparisons clearer. Note that the selection affects only graphs created after a change. If PostScript export is used from the View module, select (none). Default time-constants Preferences

Default time-constants for echogram smoothing. The values entered here will be set for any Prediction:File|New Settings and also for the initial setting when the Prediction module is opened. The default values apply both to Full detailed calculation echograms and Early part detailed ISM Sone-scale echograms. Note: for "sum" echograms the 1k Hz value is used. STIuser weights Preferences

Selection of bands and weights for STIuser (STI = Speech Transmission Index): Original STI modified Normal STI weights [Steeneken-67] Weights and bands according to Floyd & Steinberg and as measured by MLSSA [MLSSA] (in addition to original STI and RASTI), see Theory. These values are based on the Articulation Index (AI) weights from F&S (AI is a predecessor to STI but took into account only the S/N ratio in each band and no modulation, see e.g. [Steeneken-67]. It appears that MLSSA is the only measurement system where these weights are used as an option. user settings: sum of weights for all used bands most be 1.0.

User

Include in overview text-files (8 and 16 kHz options)

Preferences

If 8 and 16kHz results should be given in output text-files such as PARAM_ss.TXT.

1-13

1. INTRODUCTION Include in overview plot-files (8 and 16 kHz options) Preferences

If 8 and 16kHz results should be given in output plot-files such as E_ss_RR_INT.PLT and RT_A0.PLT. Include in map 'sum' (8 and 16 kHz options) Preferences

If audience area mapping 'sum' is selected, all bands 125 - 16k Hz will be calculated. With this option on, only 125 - 4k Hz will be calculated and the sum is not affected by results at 8k and 16k Hz. User Adds or Deletes users. When a new user is added, all settings take default values. User information is stored in Windows' Registry. Each user can have unique Preferences settings. Preferences

File|New

This menu has a toolbar equivalent where applicable

Creates a new settings file (e.g. a new Prediction settings-file in the Prediction module). File|Open... This menu has a toolbar equivalent where applicable

Opens an existing settings file (e.g. a Prediction settings-file in the Prediction module). File|Save... This menu has a toolbar equivalent where applicable

Save the current settings file (e.g. a Prediction settings-file in the Prediction module). File|Save As... Save the current settings file (e.g. a Prediction settings-file) under a new name. File|Edit Text-file... Loads a text-file into CATT-Edit for general purpose editing or print-out. The Prediction module has (Edit) buttons on its main dialog and in General settings for faster access to project files. File|View Text-file... Loads a text-file into CATT-Edit in read-only (view) mode.

1-14

1. INTRODUCTION File|Close Module Closes the active module. Prompts for saving data if required. File|Exit Terminates CATT-Acoustic. Prompts for saving data if required. Window|Available Modules list Lists all modules and check-marks those currently open. By selecting an unchecked item the module is opened and by selecting a checked item, the corresponding module is closed. Prompts for saving data if required. Window|Cascade Lines up the modules from the upper left corner of the main window. Window|Arrange Icons Arranges minimized module icons (may be required if the main window size has been changed). Window|Close All Closes all open modules but does not exit the program. Prompts for saving data if required. Window|Open Modules list Lists currently open modules. By selecting an item the corresponding module is activated. This menu has a toolbar equivalent since open modules are shown as toolbar buttons. Help|Help on Current Module Displays the first help-file page on the currently active module. F1 gives context sensitive help. Help|Contents Displays the help-file Contents topic. Help|Search for Help on... Displays the help-file keyword search engine. Help|About CATT-Acoustic... Presents an "about box" with copyright, license name, license expiry date, and current operating system notices.

1-15

1. INTRODUCTION

Dialogs
In many dialogs, small square push-buttons without labels appear when an item is selected. These are used for editing or specifying the item further. Dialog Help button or F1 give context sensitive help (also if a dialog has no Help button).

Toolbar
Many basic menu functions can be controlled via the toolbar:

At the left side of the toolbar the standard "New", "Open", "Save", and "Print" buttons (when applicable) are shown. In addition, currently open modules have a button each making it easy to switch between open modules. To open or close a module the Window menu is used. The same image is used for each module's window title icon as well as for file-types belonging to the module. The Plot-file viewer module has an extensive toolbar duplicating most controls on the optional floating Plot-file control (Ctrl+R) dialog:

The toolbar tooltips displays the current value for a 3D setting (the current camera position and target for camera mode, i.e. the aim line end-points as seen in the Camera Set mode)

Hidden options
To be able to meet special requests without generating many special software versions, (hard to keep track of, support and update) a feature called "hidden options" is introduced with v8. Many times a special request may be easy to meet and may take up little space in the EXE but may be of interest to only one or a few users. Rather than to clutter the interface with options very seldom used, these are added as hidden options that can be unlocked or switched on/off with a code key. It may also happen that a hidden option will be converted to an open option and be included in the normal interface and it can therefore also serve as a way to test new things in an orderly fashion. Similarly, a little used option may be moved to be hidden for those that still want to use it. Note that these are typically not "secret" options but just very unusual options like e.g. special export files needed for a particular project only. There is no practical limit to the number of options that can be handled this way. The procedure is simple: When CATT32.EXE is started it looks in the CATT-folder for a file called HIDDENOPTIONS.TXT, if it exists it reads codes from it and if these codes are valid

1-16

1. INTRODUCTION codes the corresponding hidden options are enabled. Codes can be disabled by commenting them but for the change to take effect the program has to be restarted. There are two open codes corresponding to removed v7 features: CODE: 45BCE-72843-0537E-98977 Causes a map of all planes used to be included in output text files (E_ss_rr.TXT, PARAM_ss.TXT). Planes with some diffusing properties are marked by an asterisk. CODE: F210A-C20D6-A4EBB-C0493 Causes a text history file (I_ss_rr.TXT) to be created with Early part detailed ISM. This file is documented in the Prediction output files section (2-4).

Miscellaneous
If the View module is open, plot-files created are shown automatically. If it is closed, the same results are created but the View module first has to be opened to be able to see created plot-files. After the module is opened select List|Open List-file and load either GEOPLT.TXT, PREDPLT.TXT, MULTPLT.TXT or POSTPLT.TXT depending on viewing result from the Prediction, Multiple sources or Post-processing module. When the Sequence module is used plot-files are not shown automatically, even if the View module is open but can be viewed afterwards, see Section 8. The progression bar shown in the Processing dialog, while performing e.g. a prediction, displays the estimated remaining processing time for each processing step. Note that the image source calculation in Early part detailed ISM is a non-linear process and the estimated remaining time estimate may fluctuate considerably. The main application window can be minimized, moved or resized during calculation to allow e.g. for background calculation as an icon. When result text-files are created their names show up in a small list-box and can be selected for viewing. The files are then loaded into CATT-Edit in view-only mode, with some menus disabled, so that results are not accidentally altered. Text can still be printed out and copied to the clipboard. In view-only mode the editor window title displays "CATT-Edit (view)". The current settings-file name for a module is shown with full path in the left statusbar when the module is active. CATT-Acoustic uses the Windows ANSI character set exclusively so if e.g. a GEO-file has been edited in a DOS editor care must be taken when using upper-ASCII characters. CATTEdit has an option to convert from the MS-DOS OEM to the Windows ANSI set if required. The interface uses the decimal character selected in the Control Panel:Regional settings so that if e.g. decimal comma is selected it must be used in all edit boxes in the interface and it is used for all displayed decimal values and for all created results (with the exception of CAD-files for the AutoCAD export and WRL-files for VRML export that always use decimal point). Input text-files may use either decimal point or decimal comma independent of the settings in Control Panel (except CATT-SD0 and CATT-SD1 directivity import-files and HTRfiles for head-tracking that may be comma-delimited and thus only can use decimal point). All files used by CATT-Acoustic can have long filenames except source directivity files (*.SD0, *.SD1, *.SD2) that can be max 15 characters plus extension and no spaces) and HRTF libraries and headphone eq filters (*.DAT) that can be max 40 characters long plus

1-17

1. INTRODUCTION extension. Dialog Help buttons and F1 give context sensitive help (also if a dialog has no Help button). CATT32.EXE is registered as the "Open" application in Explorer for CATT-registered files when double-clicked (Explorer:View|Options... menu). File extensions handled by CATT32.EXE are: PRD PST PLT SEQ SD0, SD1, SD2 GEO, LOC, CAD, HTR loads the PRD-file for the Prediction module loads the PST-file for the Post-processing module loads the PLT-file for viewing in the Viewer module loads the SEQ-file for the Sequence processing module loads the SDx file for the Directivity module loads CATT-Edit. Note: Do not assign CATT-Edit for this task.

UNCTT.EXE is registered to automatically load CTT-files. CATTOGL32.EXE is registered to automatically load OGL-files. Remaining CATT-registered file-types have to be loaded within a CATT program and are ignored if double-clicked. If a processing is currently under way a double-click is also ignored. Note that if CATT32.EXE is started via double-clicking on e.g. a PLT-file the Default user is selected initially. To switch to the preferred user select File|Preferences. Because of the way Win32 handles file types (relying only on the extension) it may happen that an extension used by CATT clashes with an extension used by another software. Because of the primitive mechanism used by Win32 it is the latest installed program that controls the file type. If you have any problems with any of the file-types being assigned to CATT-Acoustic, contact CATT for details on how to change the reference. Temporary files are created in the folder for temporary files as (if) given by Windows. Big temp-files are used mostly by the convolver and for WAV- and SIM-file additions, scaling and calibration. The CATT-folder ANECHOIC stores temporary PPW-files used by the convolver for speed reasons, these files can be deleted at any time after a completed convolution.

1-18

1. INTRODUCTION

1.4 Input/output files overview

*.DAT Surface properties (ABSLIBS)
Geometry, Sources, Receivers:

*.SD0,*.SD1,*.SD2 Source directivity (SD)

Prediction

E_ss_rr.ADD SRC.CMB *.PLT *.TXT *.OGL

Multiple source addition source combination, directivity, aim, eq/gain, delay E_ss_rr.ECH

MASTER.GEO REC.LOC SRC.LOC

*.PLT *.TXT

E_ss_rr.ECH
Post-processing m odule HRTFs (HRTFS) Headphone eq (HEADPHONES)

*.DAT *.DAT

Post-processing source eq/gain (on/off) E_ss_rr_f.SIM SIM-file addition source combination, gain, delay ????_rr_f.SIM

*.PLT *.MAT *.MLS Export files

Anechoic material (ANECHOIC)

*.WAV

Software convolution

*.WAV *.SCL

WAV-file addition source combination, gain, delay *.WAV

Fig. 1.2 General data flow. E_ss_rr_f.SIM is shorthand for the filename syntax used in e.g. E_A0_01_L.SIM and E_A0_01_R.SIM for binaural responses. CATT-folders are shown in round brackets. Description of input and output files created and required by the various modules in CATTAcoustic, for reference purposes. W and R are used to mark if the module writes (W), reads (R) or both writes and reads (W/R) the file-type. Small ss and rr denote source (A0..Z9) and receiver (00..99) ids and oct the octave-band (125, 250, 500, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, sum). All files except *.TXT, *.TX1, *.TX2, *.SD2, *.GEO, *.LOC, *.WCS, *.HTR, *.WRL and *.CAD are in internal CATT binary format. Fig. 1.2 illustrates the general data flow between modules.

Source directivity module

*.SD0,*.SD1,*.SD2 *.COL *.TXT, *.TX1, *.TX2 source directivity library-file(s) in the CATT-folder SD (W/R) directivity collection files (W/R) CATT-Acoustic text file-format for 15 and 10 directivity formats (CATT-SD0 and CATT-SD1 respectively) (W/R) various result plot-files (W)

*.PLT

1-19

1. INTRODUCTION *.MRK marker files for source 3D visuals (R)

Surface properties module

*.DAT surface (absorption/diffusion) properties library-file in CATT-folder ABSLIBS as selected in Preferences (W/R) Creation of new generic properties library in CATT-folder ABSLIBS (W) CATT-Acoustic extended text library exchange file-format (W/R)

*.DAT *.TXT

Prediction module
*.PRD settings-files (W/R)

Geometry-related files in a folder chosen to hold the hall data, the "input" folder: *.GEO *.LOC *.MRK geometry-file(s) describing the hall to model (R) receiver location file, source location/data file (R) marker files for non-acoustical visual elements (W/R)

Library data in the CATT-folder SD: *.SD0,*.SD1,*.SD2 source directivity files (R)

Library data in the CATT-folder ABSLIBS: *.DAT Various result-files: *.PLT SHADED.OGL GEOPLT.TXT various result plot-files (W) a shaded 3D model for the CATT 3D-viewer (W) list of the latest result plot-files if only Geometry view/check is selected (W) list of the latest calculated result plot-files (W) single receiver result text-file from Full detailed calculation (W) multiple receiver result text-file from Full detailed calculation (W) multiple receiver result text-file for MS Excel import (W) source combination data for multiple source addition (W) compact echogram results created for source addition (W) compact echogram results created for binaural post-processing (W) intermediate export file format for the AutoCAD interface (W) absorption/diffusion prop. library as selected in Preferences (R)

PREDPLT.TXT E_ss_rr.TXT PARAM_ss.TXT PARAM_ssX.TXT *.CMB E_ss_rr.ADD E_ss_rr.ECH *.CAD

1-20

1. INTRODUCTION *.WRL DEBUG.TXT VRML 2.0 file export of the hall geometry (W) Data for debug purposes (W); GEO-file tree for debug (name derived from current Master-file) (W);

Master_tree.TXT

Master_Sabine.TXT Interactive Sabine result-file (W); Master_stat.TXT

Interactive Sabine result-file (W);

Multiple source addition module

This module writes and reads all data in the folder where the CMB-file is read. *.CMB E_ss_rr.ADD E_ss_rr.ECH E_rr.TXT E_nn_rr_oct.PLT source combination data settings-file (W/R) echogram results created by the Prediction module (R) echogram results created for binaural post-processing (W) single receiver multiple source result text-file (W) single receiver multiple source echograms (nn = 01,02,...) (W)

TREND1.PLT, TREND2.PLT multiple receiver multiple source result plot-file (W) PARAM.TXT MULTPLT.TXT multiple receiver multiple source result text-file (W) list of the latest result plot-files (W)

Library data in the CATT-folder SD: *.SD0, *.SD1, *.SD2 source directivity files (R)

Binaural post-processing module

This module writes all results to the folder where the input ECH-file is read. The module can also perform file conversion between several formats such as SIM, TIM, MAT, WAV, and 16bit integer sound-files. *.PST *.ECH post-processing settings-file(s) compact echogram results created by the Prediction and the Multiple sources module (R) created impulse response data in Lake SIM-format [Lake] (W) created impulse response data in MLSSA ASCII format (W) created impulse response data in MATLAB v4 [MATLAB] format (W) head-tracking angle description file for the Lake DSP HeadScape application (only Huron/CP4 add-on version) or with the Walkthrough convolver [Lake] (R)

*.SIM *.MLS *.MAT *.HTR

1-21

1. INTRODUCTION *.PLT POSTPLT.TXT various result plot-files (W) list of the latest result plot-files (W)

Software convolution: *.SIM *.WAV *.WAV *.SCL *.WCS created impulse response data in Lake SIM-format (R) anechoic data (R and plays) processed (convolved) data (W/R and plays) scaling data for relative calibration (R/W) Walkthrough Convolver Scripts (R/W)

Library data in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC: *.WAV *.AWI anechoic files for convolution (R) anechoic WAV-file info (R/W)

Library data in the CATT-folder HEADPHONES: *.DAT headphone equalization filter as selected in Preferences

Library data in the CATT-folder HRTFS: *.DAT HRTF library as selected in Preferences

Plot-file view module

*.PLT *.EMF *.BMP *.EPS *.TXT *.WAV plot-files (W/R) Windows Extended 32-bit Meta-files export (W) Windows Bitmap-files export (W) PostScript-file export (W) text-file lists of plot-files (and associated WAV-files) (R/W) WAV-format sound-files (R and plays)

Sequence processing module

This module, in addition to its own settings-files, reads/writes a variety of files according to which module is being executed in the script. Even if SEQ-files mainly contain text information, they are in binary format and must not be edited. *.SEQ sequence script-files (R/W)

1-22

1. INTRODUCTION

1.5 Software overview

CATT-Acoustic is a room acoustic prediction program based on the Image Source Model (ISM) for early part echogram qualitative detail, Ray-tracing for audience area color mapping and Randomized Tail-corrected Cone-tracing (RTC) for full detailed calculation enabling auralization. The system consists of a 32-bit Windows MDI (Multiple Document Interface) main program, a customized Notepad-like text editor that communicates with the main program, a standalone 3D-viewer based on OpenGL, a stand-alone PLT-viewer and a set of AutoLISP files for the optionally used AutoCAD interface. The main program CATT32.EXE integrates prediction, binaural post-processing, software convolution, addition of multiple sources, source directivity management, surface properties library management, sequence (batch) processing, WAV-file playing, file conversions, plot-file viewing/printing and several other functions.

Hardware requirements
CATT-Acoustic requires an IBM PC compatible equipped with a Pentium processor and Windows 95, NT 4.0 or higher. For auralization a soundcard capable of 16-bit 44.1kHz stereo replay is required.

Hall geometry and absorption

The hall geometry can have any shape as long as it can be approximated by a maximum of 5000 planes (plane surfaces) although severely convoluted shapes will give less good prediction results. This limit is quite arbitrary and can be increased in the future, if required, but generally better results are not created by a very detailed model. All data is allocated dynamically in memory but by knowing an upper limit of the number of planes in the model, the memory can be used more efficiently. It is possible to write the calculation algorithms to allow the number of planes to be limited only by the memory available but the memory efficiency for typical halls with 100-500 planes would be much lower. As the geometry input is made by using a text editor, the input-file format has been made very forgiving allowing for blank lines and comments and no need to place the data in fixed columns. Powerful facilities such as symbolic constants, expressions, calls to math functions, IF-statements, tracing statements, interactive input, and hierarchic files for the geometry are incorporated. Rather then just read by the main program the geometry-files are interpreted. Overview of the geometry description: number of corners/nodes in the model (in practice) only limited by available memory hierarchic geometry-file organization enabling structuring of the geometry: main hall balconies reflectors extra reflectors audience geometry-files can be scaled e.g. to compensate for erroneous drawings or to convert from imperial to metric units a geometry-file can: be defined as an object and then be translated and/or rotated (typically for reflectors)

1-23

1. INTRODUCTION be defined as an object and be made to duplicate its contents with a new set of translation/rotation values

mirroring of symmetrical (or nearly symmetrical) parts of a hall symbolic constants and expressions with calls to math functions can be used to specify coordinates, translations, rotations and several other values symbolic string constants functions for creating model corners that are automatically locked to planes, and for creating corners as intersections between lines and planes tools for maintaining a structured model, such as declaring e.g. the x-value of a corner to be the same as the x-value of another corner, or the use of local corner and plane numbers in each file. planes can be sub-divided in any number of sub-planes each with different absorbing/ diffusing properties. By dividing a plane consisting of several different absorbing/diffusing parts into sub-divisions instead of making one plane definition for each part, the model will be more logical and the calculation time will decrease. planes and plane sub-divisions can be concave (i.e. have re-entrant angles) or convex with number of corners and number of sub-divisions (in practice) only limited by available memory plane corners can either be entered ordered clockwise as seen from the back side or from the front side of reflecting planes (user choice but must be consistent in each GEO-file). libraries of named absorbing/diffusing surface properties. Number of entries only limited by available memory. absorbing/diffusing properties can be specified in several ways: as a named library entry (very common materials as entered in the Surface properties module) as a named property in a geometry-file (common materials in a certain hall) by complementing a absorption-only library material with scattering coefficients when used in a GEO-file directly in % (not so common materials that perhaps need no names) a plane or a plane sub-division can be assigned an automatic frequency dependent edge diffusion to emulate the diffusing effects of diffraction a frequency dependent default diffusion can be specified.

marker elements or loaded marker-files for non-acoustical visual elements.

Coordinate system
In principle any right-handed coordinate system could have been used, but to use mirroring of symmetrical parts and for view angles for perspective plots, aiming angles for a source, reflection incidence angles and head-direction Stage to be understood, the system has to be as follows, see Fig. 1.3. Imagine standing on the stage of the hall looking towards the audience: The x-axis should run from left to right The y-axis should run towards the audience The z-axis should run upwards.

1-24

1. INTRODUCTION
z

stage side view y

top view

Fig. 1.3 Hall coordinate system The origin can be placed anywhere but it is recommended to place it along a hall symmetry line (to utilize the mirror function), at the stage wall, the stage front, or at the proscenium. If the hall has no typical stage, model the longest hall dimension as y since many plots are optimized for a longer y dimension. SI units are used but since the input data-files can use scale-factors for the coordinates of the hall model, it is possible to enter everything in any decimal unit. The output, however, always uses SI units. With the AutoCAD interface also imperial units can be used. Decimal numbers transferred to the CATT GEO-file format will be the same as inside AutoCAD since scale-factors are used to convert to meter when the files are read.

Frequency range
All calculations are, or can be, made for eight octave-bands: 125 to 16k Hz. In some cases calculation is also made for the power sum of these eight octave-bands and A-weighted. If no data is available for 8k and 16k Hz they are extrapolated based on the values at 2k and 4k Hz. Note: the underlying theory is geometrical acoustics and in most halls the lowest two octaves will not be well predicted. For small rooms such as control rooms and studios typically only the upper octaves 1, 2, and 4k Hz will be well predicted (in all halls 8k and 16k Hz may suffer from lack of proper input data). For a discussion on the limitations refer to [Dalenbck-95].

Source directivity
Source directivity is either modeled by entering or importing horizontal and vertical polar values for every 15, by importing measured data in a 10 full-space format, or via the DLL Directivity Interface (DDI) using the Directivity module. Directivity values can range from -50 dB to +15 dB relative the on-axis value. Number of directivity-files only limited by available disk space. Text import/export and conversion from DDI directivities to the other two formats.

1-25

1. INTRODUCTION

Data output
Data output can be requested for any combination of up to 260 sources (A0 to Z9) and up to 100 receivers (00 to 99) and any combination of octave-bands plus the power sum of the octaves where relevant. Calculation types are indicated (G = Geometry view/check, A = Audience area mapping, E = Early part detailed ISM, F = Full detailed calculation, D = Directivity module, M = Multiple sources module, P = Post-processing module, 3 = 3Dviewer): echograms (ech.) (125Hz to 4kHz + sum): log scale (dB); discrete reflections EF; forward integrated ech. EF; backward integrated ech. EF; octave-band dependent integration to simulate the ear F; directional X, Y, Z ech. F;

linear scale (Pa) E: discrete impulses;

linear scale (Sone) E: discrete impulses; exponential octave-band dependent integration to simulate the ear;

vectorgrams F; sound roses F; impulse responses P; image source space and number of impulses/second E; history of reflections showing reflection trace, source and receiver angles E; absorption coefficient histogram F; free path histogram F; plane hit histogram F; room acoustic parameter overview for all calculated receiver locations F; room acoustic parameter trend as a function of receiver number F; RASTI/STI overview and trend FA; direct sound level coverage (including directivity contours) A; early sound level coverage in four user selectable time intervals A; early lateral fractions in four user selectable time intervals A; source directivity polar plots D; source directivity 3D "balloons" D; source directivity contours D; 3D projections of the hall (parallel, natural, and camera) G: shaded 3D; colored 3D; shaded 3D for the standalone OpenGL-based CATT 3D-viewer 3

1-26

1. INTRODUCTION reflection edge contours G; source directivity -3 dB contours; wire-frame with corner information; wire-frame with interactive plane information (surface properties and areas, corners, plane normals);

plan, two sections, and a parallel 3D projection of the hall G; plan, two sections, and source information G; room acoustic parameters F: Direct sound, SPL, Strength (G), RASTI, STI, Deutlichkeit (D-50/C-50), Clarity (C-80), Center of Gravity Time (Ts), Lateral Energy Fraction (LF,LFC), EDT, Reverberation Time (Sabine, Eyring, T-15, T-30), IACC etc.;

color mapping of most parameters, also source delays and source group with shortest delay can be displayed A. spreadsheet export for e.g. MS Excel FM. room acoustic parameters can optionally be displayed normalized with expected values, according to a theory developed by [Barron-88] (see Prediction module Theory) F; geometry debug-file (geometry check, plane normals, which planes uses a certain corner/node, reversed planes etc.) G; geometry tree-file (the order in which GEO-files are included) (Prediction module); geometry/absorption statistics (surface used by each material etc.), classical RT G; geometry export-files for the AutoCAD interface that enables files made directly in the CATT format to be imported into AutoCAD (Prediction module); geometry export-files for VRML 2.0 browsers that enable interactive 3D web-sites including auralized sound (Prediction module). geometry export as CATT marker-files (for use as non-acoustical 3D elements or loudspeaker visuals) G

1.6 How to get started

For the first project it might not seem worth while to use the advanced possibilities of creating a structured geometry and use named constants and expressions to define corner/node coordinates etc. This is probably true if one gets everything right the first time and if the hall design never has to be changed or fine-tuned. Most projects, however, require a lot of finetuning of the design. Often some of these changes can be anticipated and be allowed for by using named constants (e.g. reflector heights or angles). The extra time spent planning in the first part of the project will almost certainly pay off in the later part. If only numbers are used it is very easy to paint oneself into a corner. For the first project it is recommended to create a very simple hall, such as described in Section 1.2: create a rectangular (shoebox-shaped) hall and use named constants for width, depth and height add a simple rectangular reflector in a separate file and include it. Define the reflector-file as an object-file and try translate, rotate and copy it.

By experimenting with these two simple parts (changing constant values and reflector rotation etc.) the basic knowledge on how to model a hall in CATT-Acoustic is acquired. A

1-27

1. INTRODUCTION more complex hall takes more time and more planning but the procedure is the same.

1.7 About CATT

A short presentation of me - Bengt-Inge Dalenbck, the program developer - and the company CATT. I acquired an M.Sc. in electrical engineering 1980 with a thesis in semiconductor technology, working on a gas sensitive Field Effect Transistor (FET). I have been involved in acoustics since 1981, the years up to 1989-90 mostly as a part-time teacher at Dept. of Applied Acoustics at Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden, see [Chalmers]. 1986 I started an independent company CATT (Computer Aided Theatre Technique) originally developing theater lighting and decor design CAD software and was until 1996 halftime occupied at the department and half-time at the company. Since 1988 CATT has concentrated on software for room acoustics. 1990, I joined the Chalmers Room Acoustics Group for half-time Ph.D. studies [Chalmers]. See the www page for a list of publications. 1995, December, I received a Ph.D. on room acoustic prediction and auralization at Chalmers [Dalenbck-95b]. A list of main programming projects within CATT: 1987, CATT-Lighting: 3D CAD-program for theater lighting design (built on ray-tracing). 1987, CATT-Decor: 3D CAD-program for decor design on theater stages aimed to support CATT-Lighting. With an object library and with hidden line removal. 1988, CATT-Acoustic: Room acoustic simulation using the image source model. The first three projects were implemented on a Commodore Amiga. 1989, CATT-Acoustic MS-DOS. The lighting and decor design programs are dropped and the work concentrates on room acoustics and PC-software. 1990, Binaural post-processing of the results from CATT-Acoustic creating binaural impulse responses to use for audible simulations (so-called auralization). For convolution a Lake FDP-1 convolution processor was required [Lake]. 1990-1994, Various enhancements and upgrades of CATT-Acoustic. 1994, Software convolution enabling auralization using only a PC sound-card. Specialized hardware is now optional. 1996, June, release of CATT-Acoustic v6 for Windows 3.1. 1996, July, goes from a 50% to a 10% position at Chalmers fully concentrating on CATT. 1996, August, release of CATT-VRoom designed for full frequency-range studio and virtual reality reverb mainly together with a Lake DSP Huron or CP4 convolution processor. 1997, March, CATT-Acoustic v6.1 with audience area color mapping. 1998, February, release of CATT-Acoustic v7.0 for 32-bit Windows introducing the RTC. 1998, May, addition of a loudspeaker replay option (cross-talk cancellation) 1998, October, v7.1 introducing DDI and array modeling. 1999, October, v7.2 introducing RTC-II and the OpenGL-based CATT 3D-viewer. 2000, The FIReverb Suite, for natural music FIR reverb and multi-channel convolution

1-28

1. INTRODUCTION (CATT-VRoom is enhanced, renamed to PureVerb and supplemented by the MultiVolver). 2001, The FIReverb Suite 2 Ed., 24- and 32-bit processing, Ambisonic decoder. 2002, February, CATT-Acoustic v8.0 with 8k and 16k Hz support, material colors, visual markers, walkthrough convolution, 5-channel post-processing.
nd

CATT can be reached at:

CATT Mariagatan 16A SE-41471 Gothenburg SWEDEN

Phone/fax: +46 31 145154 e-mail: info@catt.se www: http://www.catt.se

1-29

1. INTRODUCTION

1-30

2. PREDICTION MODULE

2. PREDICTION MODULE
The Prediction module is the core of CATT-Acoustic and offers three different prediction types: early reflections based on the Image Source Model with added first-order diffuse reflection, audience area color mapping, and full detailed calculation that exports data for post-processing in the Multiple source and Binaural post-processing modules. The Prediction module uses settings-files with the extension .PRD that stores all necessary information to perform a prediction. Several different settings-files can be created for different purposes. Settings-files can be used in the Sequence processing module for batch processing, which is an important feature since room acoustic prediction typically requires long calculation times. Output/result-files always have the same names independent of actual project. It is only the output folder that is project-specific. Output-files created by the various settings have the source id, the receiver id, and the octave-band coded in the file-names as: ss rr oct source id receiver id octave-band [A0...Z9] [00...99] [ 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K SUM ]

Echogram plot-file names, for example, have the syntax E_ss_rr_oct.PLT. The filename for source B2 and receiver no. 13 and octave-band 1kHz will thus be E_B2_13_1K.PLT. An overview of all output-files is presented in Section 1.4 and Section 2.4 explains each prediction output-file in detail.

2.1 Menus
File|New Settings... Create a new prediction settings-file. File|Open Settings... Load a new prediction settings-file (.PRD). File|Save Settings Save current prediction settings. File|Save Settings As... Save current prediction settings under a new name.

2-1

2. PREDICTION MODULE

File|Export Geometry To|AutoCAD Interface CAD... Exports to the CATT AutoLISP AutoCAD interface, see Section 10. Current General settings are used to create the file (input folder, output folder, master-file, plane use, sourcefile, receiver-file, used sources and receivers). The CAD-file always uses decimal point and can also be used for exporting the geometry to other similar software. Note: only coordinates actually used in the model are exported. File|Export Geometry To|VRML Browser WRL... Exports to the VRML 2.0 .WRL format that can be used by VRML 2.0 browsers/plug-ins. VRML stands for Virtual Reality Modeling Language and is a standard file-format for virtual 3D worlds (WRL is short for world). Once loaded into a VRML browser/viewer the geometry can be manipulated directly (changing view point, walking around etc.). Each plane is saved as a primitive to allow for individual coloring in 3D-modeling software e.g. 3D Studio (any spaces and other illegal VRML node name characters are replaced by "_").

Show source and receiver ids

VRML export

Includes 01, A0 etc. as 3D text above each receiver (sphere) or source (box). Show edges VRML export

Outlines all surfaces with visible edges. Experiment to see which setting works best for a particular model.
{

Add comments

VRML export

Adds comprehensive commenting to the VRML structure to better enable manual editing. Since the comments take unnecessary space only switch on when needed. Add sound templates VRML export

Includes a template for playing sound associated with each source and receiver. The template can then be edited in the WRL-file and a WAV-file name be added, see below.

2-2

2. PREDICTION MODULE Automatic lighting VRML export

Includes ceiling lights where the fixtures are invisible. The intensity is calculated to give a good lighting in models of all sizes and shapes. If the model still becomes too bright or too dark, the Pointlight node towards the top of the file can be edited (to decrease the light decrease the intensity, to increase the light decrease the non-zero attenuation field. If no lighting is included the exported model needs to be seen with the Headlight switched on in the viewer or lights have to be added in a VRML editor. Triangularize planes VRML export

Normally the VRML browser performs the triangularization but it has been discovered that some VRML editing software (e.g. VRCreator) cannot handle faces with more than four corners. Indent node structure VRML export

Indents each successive level in the VRML structure to better enable manual editing. Since the indentation take unnecessary space only switch on when needed. Background (Colors) The background "sky" color outside the model. Simple (Colors) Use one color for audience surfaces and one for remaining surfaces. Audience (Colors) VRML export VRML export VRML export

For the Simple case: the basic color of audience surfaces (as selected in Audience area mapping). Surface (Colors) For the Simple case: the basic color of a non-audience surfaces. As defined (Colors) Uses the color assigned to each surface property. Basic browser operation: to view locally using an HTML browser Open the WRL-file and, if installed, the browser will start a VRML browser plug-in that can view WRL-files. VRML browsers sometimes come included with HTML browsers or can otherwise be downloaded from various sources. A good place to look is the "Web3D Repository" at http://www.web3d.org/vrml/vrml.htm. A WRL-file can also be added to a home page and be viewed over the network by WRL-aware browsers (either use very short soundsamples at 22.05 kHz or compressed file-formats for this or down-load times will be very long). switch off "gravity" and "collision detection" since these are appropriate mostly for walkthrough etc. each receiver position has its own "Viewpoint" set with the head direction used. A list of Viewpoints is often placed on a browser menu (normal and/or right mouse button menu). The source gets its own Viewpoint with the direction of the source aim. If the mouse is VRML export VRML export

2-3

2. PREDICTION MODULE placed over a receiver or source the cursor turns into a hand or similar and if clicked and held down the view temporarily becomes that of the receiver or source. To have the view stick use the Viewpoints menu. auralized sound can be played (if Add sound templates is checked when exporting) by changing the "url" of each receiver (say 01) from "" to an actually created WAV-file e.g. "file://c:\wavs\MT_A0_01.wav" i.e. auralized sound for receiver 01 (WRL-files are plain text-files and can be loaded into an editor: search for "url"). When the Viewpoint is selected a small white sphere can be seen at the center of the screen (it is placed directly in the head direction) and if it is clicked the WAV-file is played. Also the source can have a WAV-file in a similar manner and if the anechoic WAV-file is used it can serve as a reference to the auralized sound. Remember to perform a relative calibration on all auralized WAV-files included.

File|Export Geometry To|CATT Marker MRK... Exports to a CATT marker-file that then can be loaded as an object in a GEO-file MARKERS section using LOAD or be used as source directivity visuals. For pure geometry export as a marker it is most convenient to add the directive NOROOM into the master-file directives section. With a NOROOM GEO-file the source and receiver files do not have to be created. An option will be presented to export a combination of planes, plane edges and markers. If planes are not exported they can be used as reference planes for exported marker objects (e.g. a floor) while building the geometry. Sub-divided planes are exported as a single plane with the color of the first sub-division (this export function is intended mainly for markers). Utilities|Latest Results List Each time text-based result-files are created the corresponding filenames appear in a small list in the main window. This item toggles the list on and off while preserving its contents. To load a file for viewing in CATT-Edit double-click the filename. Utilities|Create a New Project... Displays a dialog prompting for a project name and folder.

Template GEO- and LOC-files are then created ready to be filled in (a sub-folder OUT will be created to be used as output folder). Also a basic settings-file GEO.PRD and a text-file PROJECT.TXT (optionally to be used for a project log) is created, see Section 11, Tutorial. Utilities|Create a GEO-file... Creates a GEO-file template with selected name. CATT-Edit can also create a GEO-file template. Utilities|Copy a GEO-file... Copies a GEO-file, e.g. from another project where a special kind of reflector was created, to the project folder under selected name.

2-4

2. PREDICTION MODULE Utilities|Backup Project... Displays a dialog prompting for the backup folder to use and which file-types that are to be included in the backup.

The Folder selected may be on a floppy disk. It is also a good idea to regularly backup the source directivity files in the CATT-folder SD. Utilities|Create GEO-file Tree Creates a text-file displaying all included geometry-files (in the order they were included), the source- and the receiver-file together with other information useful when planning or debugging complex projects. Current General settings are used to create the file (input folder, master-file, source-file and receiver-file). The file created has the same name as the master-file but _tree.TXT is added. The file is immediately after creation loaded into CATTEdit in view-only mode. Utilities|Interactive Sabine RT Displays a dialog where the Sabine and Eyring RT values can interactively be evaluated based on surface property changes.

2-5

2. PREDICTION MODULE

By changing a property assigned to a plane or sub-plane and pressing Update the RTs are immediately recalculated along with the mean absorption coefficient. If the Surface properties module is open double-clicking in the property list automatically changes the selected plane's property in the Sabine RT dialog and updates the RT estimates. Planes that have been altered have their names colored differently and the change can be Undone. Note that absorptions defined in the project GEO-files are also available but have to be entered manually by typing their names or by copy/pasting the name from the editor. After OK is pressed a text-file is optionally created listing the changes and the resulting RTs. This file can be used when editing the GEO-files to implement the changes selected. Note: the Eyring RT estimated here is not exactly corresponding to the EyrT and EyrTg measures shown after Full detailed calculation. EyrT and EyrTg both use the mean free path estimated by the rays rather than 4V/S. EyrT uses the mean absorption coefficient estimated by the rays while EyrTg uses the classical area-weighted coefficient. Sort order (Plane list) Interactive Sabine RT

The list of planes in the model can be sorted in ascending order according to: Plane id Plane name Area Key name Abs. 125&250 Abs. 500&1k Abs. 2k&4k Abs. 125-4k Abs. area 125&250 Abs. area 500&1k Abs. area 2k&4k Abs. area 125-4k Save statistics plane ids (sub-sorted on sub-division names) plane name (sub-sorted on sub-division names) plane/sub-division area absorption property name absorption coefficients in the 125 and 250 Hz bands 500 and 1k bands 2k and 4k bands 125 to 4k bands (overall absorption) absorption area in the 125 and 250 Hz bands (mSabine) 500 and 1k bands 2k and 4k bands 125 to 4k bands (overall absorption area) Interactive Sabine RT

Creates a file listing all used absorption properties sorted after the most used material together with their total areas and relative absorption area (the Used column lists how many surfaces uses the property).
Settings = C:\CATTDOCS\v8\Example\Catt.PRD PROJECT = v8.0 Manual Example Hall MASTER = MASTER.GEO The following planes are changed: 20 stage wall from SOMEWOOD to BRICK50 The absorption is used as follows: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Relative absorption area [%] Key name Area [m] Area [%] < 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k> Used ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------SOMEWOOD 1859.0 61.6 < 54.7 39.3 28.1 22.6 16.6 12.5 7.1 2.3> 13 AUD 596.1 19.7 < 30.7 44.5 54.7 58.0 60.2 60.0 60.5 65.3> 5 ABSORBER 272.0 9.0 < 8.0 11.5 13.7 16.5 20.9 25.6 31.0 31.5> 5 DIFFUSOR 216.0 7.2 < 6.4 4.6 3.3 2.6 1.9 1.4 0.8 0.3> 1 BRICK50 75.9 2.5 < 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6> 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------3019.1

2-6

2. PREDICTION MODULE Update (RT estimate) Interactive Sabine RT

Updates the RT estimate after a change. When double-clicking in the Surface properties module the update is automatic. Sabine (RT estimate) Interactive Sabine RT

The estimated Sabine RT including air absorption as selected in General settings. See note below. Eyring (RT estimate) Interactive Sabine RT

The estimated Eyring RT including air absorption as selected in General settings. See note below. Undo Undo the changes on the current plane (sets the initial property). Revert Undo all changes and revert to initial properties. <Abs> Interactive Sabine RT Interactive Sabine RT Interactive Sabine RT

The estimated classical area-weighted mean absorption coefficient (AbsCg). For small values of <Abs> the Eyring RT approaches the Sabine RT. <Free path> Interactive Sabine RT

The estimated classical mean free path 4V/S (V is estimated volume and S is estimated surface area). Volume Interactive Sabine RT

The estimated hall volume (V). In some cases when the volume cannot be estimated, a manual entry can be made and this text box is changed to an edit-box. Note: Sabine or Eyring RT estimates are only valid in rooms that either have "mixing" shapes, very even absorption distribution or that have significant diffusion. With a Full detailed calculation the validity of the Sabine and Eyring estimate can be seen (if the T-30 values are close to the Sabine values, a considerable amount of time can be saved by first using the interactive Sabine RT calculation). Note also that the geometry must be correctly modeled to give accurate enough volume and surface area estimates and it must not be judged to be an open model, see Section 2.1

2-7

2. PREDICTION MODULE

2.2 Dialogs

The main Prediction dialog controls settings for the combination of actions to be performed and has an interface to CATT-Edit. When Save and Run is clicked the current settings-file is saved and the Prediction module performs the actions requested. If warnings are on (Preferences), the output folder is checked for result-files that may be overwritten.

General settings
The General settings dialog controls where to read and write data and which files to use as well as other global settings e.g. for diffuse reflection.

2-8

2. PREDICTION MODULE Project General settings

A project name for reference. Only the first 70 characters are used. The string will appear on all plots (the first 40 characters) and in all result-files. Input folder General settings

The project files are always read from this folder: geometry-, source-, and receiver-files. Output folder General settings

In this folder all output-files are created, if it does not exist it will be created. To compare two calculations change output to a new folder (typically a sub-folder to the Input folder): Input folder Output folder, hall version 1 Output folder, hall version 2 Master-file General settings

Which geometry-file (in the Input folder) to use as a master-file (i.e. root of the geometry-file tree). The master-file is the file that is read first and may then INCLUDE other files (in the Input folder) that, in turn, may include further files etc. By having more than one master-file e.g. including different geometry parts, a geometry version can be changed just by selecting a different master-file. The master-file is usually named MASTER.GEO (GEO is mandatory extension). When (Edit) Geo-file on the main dialog is clicked the specified master-file is initially selected in the Open file dialog. File (Sound sources) General settings

Contains source locations, aims, directivities, delays, source roll and octave-band levels. By having more than one source-file e.g. including different directivities or aims, a new setup can be tested by selecting a different source-file. The source-file is usually named SRC.LOC (LOC is mandatory extension). When (Edit) Source-file on the main dialog is selected the specified source-file is initially selected in the Open file dialog. Which to use (Sound sources) Which of the sources defined in the source-file to use. General settings

If source ids are chosen that do not exist in the source-file it is not trapped until the prediction is actually run.

Show all Displays all selected sources.

General settings/Sources

2-9

2. PREDICTION MODULE File (Receivers) General settings

Contains receiver locations. By having more than one receiver-file including different sets of receiver positions, a new setup can be tested by selecting a different receiver-file. The receiver-file is usually named REC.LOC (LOC is mandatory extension). When (Edit)Receiverfile on the main dialog is selected the specified receiver-file is initially selected in the Open file dialog Which to use (Receivers) Which subset of the positions defined in the receiver-file to use. General settings

If positions are chosen that do not exist in the receiver-file, it is not trapped until the prediction is actually run. Show all Displays all selected receivers. (Plane use) Options to use only a subset of planes defined in the geometryfiles. A dialog is displayed allowing for ranges of plane ids to be included or excluded (to select a single plane enter the same id in both edit boxes). General settings General settings/Receivers

This is very useful e.g. for making a clearer view while creating a complex and/or mirrored model (exclude the mirrored planes) or to test with/without a particular group of planes e.g. reflectors. Note: the full geometry is always read and planes not to be used are excluded after the GEO-files have been read.

(Head direction) The head direction is required for lateral energy fraction measures and for post-processing using the Binaural post-processing module. The settings below apply for all receivers that do not have an individual head-direction as selected in the receiver-file.

General settings

2-10

2. PREDICTION MODULE Source looking towards the source. Note that this setting leads to varying head-directions when multiple sources are used. In such a case - set headdirection Fixed pos to the main source, i.e. the source to be considered as the reference (e.g. the speaker). turned in the direction of the negative y-axis - all receivers (listeners) will have "stiff necks" looking towards the stage. Note the coordinate system to be used (Sect. 1.5). 22 A0 12
Stage

Stage

22 A0 12

Fixed pos heads turned to the coordinate defined. A0

22

12 Acoustic environment Displays a dialog for air absorption, air temperature, air density and background noise levels. Temperature Affects speed of sound and estimated air absorption, see Theory. Air humidity Affects estimated air absorption, see Theory Air density Affects wave impedance, c. (Air absorption) Off Estimate User defined General settings/Acoustic environment no air absorption applied. This option is for special purposes. air absorption is estimated from air humidity and temperature. See Theory. the edit button displays a dialog with octave-band scrollbars. These scrollbars all have different ranges (air absorption is very frequency dependent). The parameter that is selected is the dissipation coefficient, mb, see Theory. General settings/Acoustic environment General settings/Acoustic environment General settings/Acoustic environment General settings/Acoustic environment General settings

Background noise

Displays a dialog with octave-band scroll-bars. Note that background level is actually used only for STIuser (included bands, see Preferences) and RASTI (only 500 and 2k Hz values). (Diffuse reflection) If and what type of diffuse reflection to use. General settings

2-11

2. PREDICTION MODULE Off no diffuse reflection at all. This option is for special purposes e.g. to estimate a given geometry's sensitivity to diffuse reflection. surface absorption according to scattering coefficients assigned to each surface property or via Surface default scattering coefficients. also includes automatic size and frequency dependent "edge diffusion". Note that the automatic diffusion calculated from edge area/wavelength ratio only takes effect for surfaces that have an "*" appended to their material property (typically reflectors), see Section 2.3 and 2.5. default scattering coefficients that will be assigned to all planes that have not been given specific scattering coefficients. This should normally always be selected and set to 10% corresponding to flat surfaces that are not small. See Calculation recommendations, Section 2.5.

Surface

Surface + edge

Surface default

Geometry view/check
The Geometry view/check dialog controls settings for checking geometry errors, consistency, and generation of geometry plot- and debug-files. For each plot-file type non-visual markers can optionally be included.

Four views (2D) (Plot-files)

Geometry view/check

Four views of the geometry, VIEW4.PLT. Plan, two sections and an auto-scaled parallel wire-frame 3D projection of the hall. If audience planes are selected in Audience area mapping they are marked gray in the plot and the total audience area is displayed. The volume is calculated and displayed (this is only meaningful for closed rooms).

2-12

2. PREDICTION MODULE Source info (2D) (Plot-files) Geometry view/check

Similar to VIEW4.PLT but the lower right pane gives information of each source selected (SRCINFO.PLT). For each source one line is shown with Up a ring for the source aim (where "front" or "on-axis" is in the directivity definition) and another line is shown with an arrow defining the "up" direction according to the optional source "roll" angle (where "up" is in the directivity definition). From these "left"/"right", "back" and "down" can easily be worked out. Shaded (3D)(Plot-files)

Front

Geometry view/check

A 3D-projection with shaded surfaces (SHADED.PLT). The shading is viewing-angle dependent and is made on the reflecting side of each surface thus making it easy to see if a plane has been reversed or if the model has holes. Colored (3D)(Plot-files) Geometry view/check

A 3D-projection with colored surfaces (COLORED.PLT). The colors are those assigned to or auto-generated for each surface property. Source info (3D) (Plot-files) Geometry view/check

A wire-frame 3D-projection where the -3dB contours for selected bands are shown in addition to source-file data (SRCINFO3D.PLT). The contours of not selected sources are shown gray. For details on directivity contours, see Section 4.3. Plane info (3D) (Plot-files) Geometry view/check

A wire-frame 3D-projection with interactive plane, plane corner and other information, PLINFO.PLT. When stepping through the list of planes their front (reflecting) side should be colored with the assigned (or auto-generated) color and the back side be black. If the color appears on the wrong side the plane corner entering order must be reversed. This file is the major tool for checking the geometry built in the geometry-files. Corner info (3D) (Plot-files) A wire-frame 3D-projection with corner id information, COINFO.PLT. Refl. info (3D) (Plot-files) Geometry view/check Geometry view/check

A wire-frame 3D-projection with interactive reflector edge contours of selected planes, plus plane and plane corner information, REFLINFO.PLT. Planes are colored with the assigned (or auto-generated) color on the reflecting side and black on the back side. This is a purely geometrical construct and any effects of diffusion and/or diffraction has to be considered separately. Note that no shadows are cast, only reflected edge points are calculated. If more than one source is used, each plot frame shows reflections from both sources. The edge contours of not selected planes are shown gray. (Primary view)(3D) Geometry view/check

The primary view controls which of the 3D-projection methods to use as the primary view. The 3D-projection method can always be changed in the View module but it is practical if the default setting is appropriate for the particular model. Once a view is selected in the View module it can be copied to the prediction settings by Edit|Copy 3D-view to PRD.

2-13

2. PREDICTION MODULE (Initial view parameters) (3D) Geometry view/check

The 3D-view for 3D and 3DA files can always be changed in the View module but it is practical if the default settings are appropriate for the particular model. Once a view is selected in the View module it can be copied to the prediction settings by Edit|Copy 3D-view to PRD. View distance View distance from the center of the room. Lens angle Lens angle (field of view) for Natural Horizontal view angle -180 to 180 where 0 is a view along the y-axis. A positive value rotates the view position to the right and a negative value to the left. y view/check/View settings y view/check/View settings Geometry view/check/View settings

Vertical view angle

Geometry view/check/View settings

-90 to 90 where 0 is in the horizontal plane. A positive value gives a view from above and negative value from below. Horizontal (X) shift Geometry view/check/View settings

Horizontal translation of the screen image (does not move the view position but only the screen image). Unit is generic pixels where the full plot window width is 640. Positive values move the picture to the right while a value of 0 places the rotation center at the window's horizontal center. Vertical (Y) shift Geometry view/check/View settings

Vertical translation of the screen image (does not move the view position but only the screen image). Unit is generic pixels where the full plot window height is 385. Positive values move the picture down while a value of 0 places the rotation center at the window's vertical center. (Position) Coordinate of camera position. (Target) Coordinate of camera target. Lens angle Camera lens angle (field of view). Shaded.OGL (For 3D-Viewer) Geometry view/check view/check/Camera settings iew/check/Camera settings Geometry view/check/Camera settings

A file similar to COLORED.PLT is created, SHADED.OGL, for the stand-alone CATT 3D-viewer (CATTOGL32.EXE) with extended 3D

2-14

2. PREDICTION MODULE viewing possibilities. The OGL-file contains all source and receiver locations as viewpoints. The viewer is based on OpenGL and is documented separately by its help-file (CATTOGL32.HLP). Auto load file in viewer (For 3D-Viewer) Geometry view/check

Automatically loads the created file in the viewer (or updates it if it is already loaded). Include contours (For 3D-Viewer) Geometry view/check

Includes -3, -6 and -9 dB source directivity contours for aiming help in the viewer when using camera mode and a source viewpoint. For details on directivity contours, see Section 4.3. (Debug) Geometry view/check

What type of geometry debug to perform while processing the geometry. Immediate (Debug) Geometry view/check

Checks for major errors and terminates immediately with an error message. The same checks as for Create file are performed but the program terminates immediately if an error is found. The "inaccurate corner check" checks for large errors thus will only detect big mistakes. It is checked that sources and receivers are inside the room. Just like for volume and reversed normal calculations, this test relies on that the surfaces are modeled correctly. If an open room is already detected (because an actual open room or due to modeling errors) the test is not performed. It is not necessary to perform this check once the basic model is ok. Create file (Debug) Geometry view/check

Creates a text-file DEBUG.TXT that lists all errors found and documents the geometry.

The checks optionally performed are:

2-15

2. PREDICTION MODULE check of duplicate corner ids (must be corrected) check of duplicate corners (same or nearly same x, y, z but different ids) check of duplicate plane ids (must be corrected) check of duplicate planes (same corners and same normal, must be corrected). Doublesided surfaces like reflectors use the same plane corners but have opposite normals. check of inaccurate corners (within a certain accuracy). Note: it is not necessarily the displayed corner that is the cause of the error. If the plane equation is built from one inaccurate corner and two accurate corners, a fourth accurate corner will seem to be out of the plane. Must be corrected or rays will be lost and an open room may be declared. check if plane edges are penetrating/touching other planes (e.g. a reflector through a wall). Penetrating planes will confuse the pre-processing of the geometry to speed up raytracing and must be corrected. Touching planes are not critical and is often the result of an AutoCAD export. check if corners are used in only one plane ("single-connected corners"). This should never happen with closed rooms; check if some planes may be reversed. This check only works for closed rooms and is not 100% reliable since it depends on how the model has been built but serves as a check for potentially reversed planes. The major tools for checking are the PLINFO.PLT and SHADED.PLT/.OGL plot-files; a list of all corners used and in which planes they are used (sub-division corner ids are not listed); a map of all plane ids used a list of all planes used (sorted by plane id) with a detailed description of each plane: id, name, type, plane equation, absorption/diffusion properties, sub-divisions, corner ids.

Writing a massive amount of text information to disk takes time. Especially the option for listing all planes can be switched off to make the DEBUG.TXT file smaller. Apart from the list of planes option, all options should normally be on but if a lot of errors of one kind are found switching off some options temporarily will make the debug file faster to write to disk and simpler to read. Create .CMB without calculation Geometry view/check

If a source combination (.CMB) file should be created. This can be useful when working with the Multiple sources module since geometry plot-files can be created that display source aims and source combination and at the same time saves a corresponding combination-file that the Multiple sources module can read. Filename Name.CMB if Name.LOC is the selected source-file name under General settings. Note: if source addition is selected in Full detailed calculation or Early part detailed ISM dialogs a CMB-file is always generated for the current source-file. Assume closed model for Sabine RT Geometry view/check

If a model should be considered as closed even if the automatic detection finds it open. Even if a model looks closed it can be found to be open if the geometry contains too many errors or is built too inconsistently (overlapping surfaces, reflectors that are not double-sided, warped planes, see 2.3). By checking this option a volume estimate will still be given in

2-16

2. PREDICTION MODULE VIEW4.PLT but enclosed in parenthesis. With a Full detailed calculation, a model is declared open if too many rays are lost and is not affected by this setting.

Audience area mapping

The Audience area mapping dialog controls the estimation of early SPL and LF and most parameters (D-50, C-80, RASTI etc.) over a grid covering selected audience-planes. Raytracing with a fixed-sized spherical receiver is performed (size based on the Map step) where all sources are added taking into account delays (as set in the source-file). The direct sound is handled separately to be correct also for low ray-numbers, see Prediction theory. Separate ray-tracing is performed for each octave-band (due to frequency-dependent diffuse reflection).

Number of rays/oct (Settings)

Audience area mapping

Number of rays to use for coverage mapping. At least 10000 rays must be used for reasonable mapping. In general, the smaller the Map step the higher the number of rays has to be. With low ray-numbers the results will be too random to be useful. See also Auto number. Auto number (Settings) Audience area mapping

Automatic selection of a good/sufficient number of rays. This number is dependent on the room size, the map step and some other parameters. 1) One number is calculated to give 2 one direct ray / m at a time corresponding to 80 ms arrival relative the direct sound for all positions. This give a good sampling of parameters such as D-50, C-80 and LF. 2) One 2 number is calculated corresponding to one direct ray / 4 m at the longest hall dimension. 3)

2-17

2. PREDICTION MODULE One number is calculated corresponding to one ray / map point at 80 ms relative arrival time. The highest of 1), 2) and 3) is selected. 2) will only be higher for rooms that are very big so that there is some chance to get back some detailed reflections from far-away surfaces and 3) will only be higher for very dense maps. Ray truncation-time (Settings) Audience area mapping

Truncation time in ms for rays to be traced. The time should correspond to at least 50% of the reverberation time (measures such as D-50 etc. are not much affected by the energy 30 dB down from the direct sound). See also Auto time. Auto time (Settings) Audience area mapping

Automatic selection of sufficiently long truncation time based on the estimated classical RT (only possible if rooms are closed and if classical RT does not differ too much from the actual one e.g. because of double-sloped decays). Audience planes (Settings) Audience area mapping

Which audience planes to map. If audience planes that overlap in the z-direction are selected, only the highest located plane is used. In such a case it is better to run twice, once for the lower audience area and once for the higher. The selected audience planes will be marked gray in the VIEW4.PLT plot-file. Note: if planes that do not exist in the model are selected, it will not be trapped until the mapping actually is run. Map step (Settings) Audience area mapping

The map is divided into a rectangular grid where the square grid step can be selected. If some part of a grid point, and thereby a fraction of the receiver sphere, should come outside the room (very close to a wall e.g.) the received energy will be too low. Similarly, if boxes are placed inside the room it may, for a big Map step, look like there are hits inside the boxes. Recommended step is 0.5 - 1 m. Map height above audience planes (Settings) Audience area mapping

The map points (center of the receiver spheres) are placed at the selected height above the selected Audience planes. The height should be half a Map step above the audience planes for normal audience area mapping but for special cases they can be placed higher (e.g. factory noise mapping where the floor can be set as the "audience" plane and the height to e.g. 1.8 m). To prevent receiver spheres to go down through the audience planes the lowest allowed height is checked to be half a map step. Add direct sound with phase (Settings) Audience area mapping

With this option selected direct sounds from each of the sound sources are allowed to interfere (two equal in-phase source contributions give close to +6dB while out-of-phase signals can be -10 dB down or more over an octave-band). Without this option the direct sound is, just like higher order reflections, added on a power basis (two equal source contributions always give +3dB). The interference calculation is based on digital octave-band filters and not only on the octave-band center frequencies (i.e. the interference is calculated with full bandwidth but the result is filtered in octave-bands so interference patterns will be somewhat smoothed). Note: the addition with phase affects LFC values too since a figure-of8 microphone is simulated for the lateral sound taking into account the reversed phase of reflections registered at the left side of the microphone (this is of little importance since LFC is not defined for use with multiple sources).

2-18

2. PREDICTION MODULE Select direct-sound only options (no rays cast) (Settings) Audience area mapping

If only a combination of SPLdir, SPLcont, Closest and/or Delay and Direct only for mapping in time intervals are chosen, no ray-tracing needs to be performed so it is faster and high density maps can be used. This button sets these options in one step. (Octave-bands) (Settings) Audience area mapping

The mapping is performed only for the octave-bands selected unless sum is included. For RASTI mapping both 500 and 2k or sum have to be selected. For STIuser mapping all bands included have to be selected (see Preferences). To get a plot for the sum all bands will have to be calculated even if no plots are requested for them so that it takes longer to calculate e.g. 1k and sum (calculates for 125, 250, 500, 1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k unless a Preferences option excludes 8k and 16k from the sum) than e.g. 1k and 2k (calculates only 1k and 2k). Also note that the Lp1m values affect D-50, C-80, Ts, etc. for sum while for single-source single-octave maps it has no effect other than for SPL (this is not a limitation it is just how the measures work they are early/late sound ratios). If sum is selected all parameters can optionally be presented A-weighted instead of linear. This affects all measures for the sum so that e.g. D-50 will be the A-weighted D-50 and thus having the highest weight for 1k and 2k. (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Since mapping does not generate any text result-files except mapping statistics, at least one of these plot options has to be selected. Contours (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Which directivity contours to include in the SPLcont plot. For details on directivity contours, see Section 4.3. RASTI (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Mapping of RASTI with and without background noise (from General settings). The plot-file created, RASTI.PLT, shows 2D and 3D maps with and without background noise taken into account. Requires both 500 and 2k octave-bands or sum to be selected. STIuser (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Mapping of STIuser with and without background noise (from General settings). The plotfile created, STIUSER.PLT, shows 2D and 3D maps with and without background noise taken into account. STIuser bands and weights can be selected in Preferences. Include source id:s (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Option to include source id:s in map plots (useful to switch off if many sources are used not to clutter the view). PARn_oct.PLT (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

For each one of these three optional plot-files the information as well as its location on the plot can be selected (upper left/right or lower left/right): None ,2D ,3D no plot created for the position; a 2D map is created; a 3D map is created using a static parallel projection (same as for VIEW4.PLT);

2-19

2. PREDICTION MODULE SPLdir direct sound. Note that with more than one source the relative time delays are not seen in this plot. direct sound -3, -6 and or -9 dB contours are plotted on the audience planes (see Contours group). Note that with more than one source the relative time delays are not seen in this plot. For details on directivity contours, see Section 4.3. means that the letter of the source group with the shortest delay is displayed (electrical delays taken into account). To use this function with separate sources use source numbers A0, B0, C0 instead of A0, A1, A2 etc. Can be used together with Delay to optimize source delays. means that the shortest source delay is displayed (electrical delays taken into account) and is only meaningful if more than one source is used. Can be used together with Closest to optimize source delays. means a reverberation-time measure that relates well to EDT and is derived from Ts assuming an exponential decay (RT' = 13.8 Ts), see Theory.

SPLcont

Closest

Delay

RT

If None is selected for all four positions the plot-file is not created. If only a combination of SPLdir, SPLcont, Closest, Delay and SPL|LF in time-windows (with Direct only) is chosen, no ray-tracing needs to be performed so it is faster and high density maps can be used for direct sound coverage tests. Note the shortcut button for direct sound only calculations (Select direct.) Scales... (Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Auto spans the color palette as much as possible but fixed settings may sometimes be preferred so that comparisons between two calculation cases can be made. If the actual max/min values encountered are higher/lower than a selected fixed range, the max/min markers are drawn slightly above/below the color scale to indicate saturation. Note: the scale and the color palette can be changed in the View module. (Mapping time intervals for SPL and LF) (Settings)(Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Early sound coverage mapping can be selected in four different, possibly overlapping, timewindows. In the created plot-file view, the results for each time-window is placed corresponding to the time-limits in the dialog. Note: Times are relative arrival of the direct sound.

2-20

2. PREDICTION MODULE If, for example, map number one is set to 0 to 0.1 ms, the direct sound coverage and the effects of source directivity and aim can be studied. SPL (Mapping time intervals for SPL and LF) (Settings)(Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Mapping of sound pressure level (creates SPL_oct.PLT) in each selected time interval. The Scales settings for SPL affects the display scale. Tip: to map the direct sound set one of the time interval to 0 - 0.1 ms. LF (Mapping time intervals for SPL and LF) (Settings)(Plot-files) Audience area mapping

Mapping of LF (creates LF_oct.PLT) in each time interval (i.e. the fraction of lateral to total incidence). For the lateral fraction the head-direction used is according to head-direction chosen in General settings. Direct only (Mapping in time intervals (relative first arrival)) (Plot-files)Audience area mapping Maps only the direct sound from each source. The map titles will show SPLdir and LFdir instead of SPL and LF if this option is on.

Early part detailed ISM

The Early part detailed ISM dialog controls image source and early diffuse reflection settings and the type of output data to be generated for detailed qualitative reflection analysis of the early part of the echogram. Direct sound and specular reflections are colored blue, first order diffuse reflections are colored red.

Specular refl. order (Settings) Max specular reflection order (0..9). Diffuse refl. order (Settings)

Early part detailed ISM

Early part detailed ISM

Max diffuse reflection order (0..1) but not higher than the specular order.

2-21

2. PREDICTION MODULE I.S. truncation time (Settings) Early part detailed ISM

Max impulse arrival-time for the receiver located the shortest distance from the main source. Echogram (Plot-files) (I_ss_rr_oct.PLT). The type of echogram can also be selected. (Plot-type) Pa-scale Early part detailed ISM/Echogram displays the octave-band echogram in Pa simply as the square root of the rms pressure squared (which is the primary quantity calculated) times 1.414. This plot will always scale the values to set the first reflection at the Pa-axis maximum (otherwise the weaker reflections would be invisible). Early part detailed ISM

Sone-scale + ear-integrated the Sone scale plot attempts to emulate how the ear interprets the echogram, see Section 2.5. The unit will be Sone (roughly).

Time-const

Early part detailed ISM/Echogram

Time-constant for ear integration/smoothing. Default values can be selected in Preferences. Note: for "sum" echograms the 1k Hz value is used. dB-scale displays the echogram in dB where backward and forward integrated curves are optional. Note: since the late part is not calculated the echogram is incomplete and only the first part of the backward integrated decay is useful. Early part detailed ISM/Echogram

Show first-order surface ids

Displays the plane/surface ids at the top of the bars representing first-order reflections. Refl. history (Plot-files) Early part detailed ISM

Interactive display of reflection traces, echogram, source exit and receiver incidence angles (H_ss_rr_oct.PLT). View angles for the static parallel 3D-projection used in the reflection trace view can be selected (can be changed in the View module). Note: a Preferences option can be selected to instead create a 2DA file so that complex halls can be zoomed (but not rotated). I.S. space (Plot-files) Early part detailed ISM

Shows calculated image sources (S_ss_rr_oct.PLT). A reflection growth graph is shown comparing the growth in the early compared to the late part using classical theory. The reflection growth plot is only meaningful with closed rooms.

2-22

2. PREDICTION MODULE (Octave-bands)(Plot-files) Early part detailed ISM

Which octave-bands to generate plot-files for. This option should be used with caution since the number of plot-files will increase dramatically. Typically, it should be used if you need to examine one or a few receiver positions in detail. Post-processing (E_ss_rr.ECH) (Save (special-case) data for) Early part detailed ISM

Creates files for use with the Binaural post-processing module, see Section 7. Filenames E_ss_rr.ECH. This saves only early reflections and should be used only for study of echoes in e.g. a stadium that is open and contains no reverberation such as in a room. To use Full detailed calculation may require too many rays to be reasonable to catch echoes coming from a distance of 150 m. On the other hand, image source echoes are likely to be exaggerated for reflection orders > 1 since no scattering is applied and should be taken only as an indication of an echo risk and the reflection path and surface sizes must be carefully examined to see if a strong echo actually would be produced in reality. Source addition (E_ss_rr.ADD) (Save (special-case) data for) Early part detailed ISM

Creates files for use with the Source addition module as described in Section 6. Filenames E_ss_rr.ADD for echogram data and name.CMB for source-combination data (where name.LOC is the current source-file name). Only early reflections are saved, see note above on Post-processing.

Full detailed calculation

2-23

2. PREDICTION MODULE The Full detailed calculation dialog controls the settings for the randomized tail-corrected cone-tracing (RTC). For a method description, see 2.5 Theory. Direct sound, first order specular and diffuse reflections and second order specular reflections are handled separately to be correct also for low ray/cone-numbers. A separate ray/cone-tracing is performed for each octave-band (due to frequency-dependent diffuse reflection) and all bands are always calculated. Number of rays/octave (Settings) Full detailed calculation

At least 5000 rays must be used for good results. With low ray-numbers the results will be too random to be useful although 1000 rays most often gives reasonable results for quick tests. See also Auto number. The more rays that are used the longer the early part of the echogram becomes (the part post-processed as is for auralization), see Theory section. Auto number (Settings) Full detailed calculation

Automatic selection of a good/sufficient number of rays. This number is dependent on the room size and some other parameters: 1) One number is calculated to give one direct ray / 2 m at a time corresponding to 80 ms arrival relative the direct sound for all positions. This give a good sampling of parameters such as D-50, C-80 and LF. 2) One number is 2 calculated corresponding to one ray / 4 m at the longest hall dimension. The highest of 1) and 2) is selected. 2) will only be higher for rooms that are very big so that there is some chance to get back some detailed reflections from far-away surfaces. Ray truncation time (Settings) Full detailed calculation

Truncation time in ms for rays to be traced. It is recommended to let rays continue down to -60 dB (i.e. to set ray truncation time approximately equal to the reverberation time) so that the T-30 measure can be well estimated. See also Auto time. Auto time (Settings) Full detailed calculation

Automatic selection of sufficiently long truncation time based on the estimated classical RT (only possible if rooms are closed and if classical RT does not differ too much from the one estimated by the RTC e.g. because of non-exponential decays). Include parameters normalized to expected values (Settings) Full detailed calculation

Display some room acoustic parameters normalized with expected values according to a theory developed by M. Barron [Barron-88] in addition to absolute values, see Theory. Create one text-file/receiver (Settings) Generation of one text-file per receiver position (E_ss_rr.TXT). Echograms (For each receiver) (Plot-files) Full detailed calculation Full detailed calculation

Creates plot-files (E_ss_rr_oct.PLT) with calculated echograms, all estimated major parameters and a variety of other data, see section 2.4. For what is considered to be the "early part", see Theory. Note: Even if this option is off, the data can always be read in PARAM_ss.TXT as an overview for all used positions. Echogram smoothing filter (For each receiver)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

Filter type and octave-band dependent time-constant for the early part smoothed responses. 2 The filter acts on the p response and a small symbolic filter-function picture is shown on the E_ss_rr_oct.PLT file. Default time-constant values can be selected in Preferences. Note: for "sum" echograms the 1k Hz value is used.

2-24

2. PREDICTION MODULE The filter types are: None Exponent. No smoothing filter. The early echogram is smoothed by an exponential filter with the selected timeconstant. The early echogram is smoothed by a rectangular filter with width same as the selected time-constant. The early echogram is smoothed by a triangular filter with width same as the selected time-constant.

Rectang.

Triang.

(Echogram/Sound Rose/Vectorgram bands)(For each)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation Selection of which octave-bands to create echogram plot-files for (E_ss_rr_oct.PLT), sound roses (R_ss_rr_oct.PLT) and vectorgrams (V_ss_rr_oct.PLT). Note: even if e.g. only 1 kHz is selected all bands are always calculated. Decays (For each receiver)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

Creates plot-files (E_ss_rr_INT.PLT) with backward integrated decays for all eight octavebands. Sound Roses (For each receiver)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

A plot option similar to that offered by the Early part detailed ISM history plot (plots like these are sometimes called "hedgehogs"). With this option selected six different (possibly overlapping) time-ranges can be chosen.

For each of these ranges a display of incidence angles will be created in a plot-file with the name syntax R_ss_rr_oct.PLT (R for Rose). This type of plot can be seen as a complement to the directional early echogram graphs since it also can indicate the incidence at later times. Vectorgram (For each receiver)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

An alternative way to display an echogram including reflection incidence direction, name syntax V_ss_rr_oct.PLT. Just like a normal echogram there is a time axis and the direct sound is placed at time zero. Reflection strength in dB is the length of each colored line. Reflection incidence direction is coded as the angle of each line (the head direction is along the time axis, if looking towards the source the direct sound is flat forward along the axis). Color change at selected time intervals to give a depth cue. Direct sound and 1st order specular reflections are drawn with thick lines. By viewing the vectorgram from different directions different aspects can be studied. For a background to vectorgrams see [Pickover].

2-25

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Note: the selected Max plot-time can not be longer than the early part. (Global statistics)(Plot-files) Various statistics based on the results for all used receivers. Absorption (Global statistics)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation Full detailed calculation

Absorption coefficient histograms, ABS_ss.PLT (125Hz to 16k Hz on one plot). Free Paths (Global statistics)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

Free path histograms, PATH_ss.PLT (125Hz to 16kHz on one plot). Wall hits (Global statistics)(Plot-files ) Wall hit statistics, HITS_ss.PLT. RT overview (Global statistics)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation Full detailed calculation

Graphs of estimated reverberation times, mean absorption coefficients, rays lost/absorbed and other statistical data (RT_ss.PLT). An option to include a reference or target RT plot is given. (Overview)(Plot-files ) Full detailed calculation

Various plot-files showing results for all receivers either as graphs or numbers placed over a hall plan. Parameter map (Overview)(Plot-files ) Full detailed calculation

Acoustic parameter overview plot-file, PARAMn_ss.PLT (n = 1,2,3). Which parameters to plot for all receiver positions can be selected. The plot will be with four plans of the hall and four or less parameters on one page. The abbreviations are the same as are used in the text result-files, see Section 2.4.

2-26

2. PREDICTION MODULE Parameter trend (Overview)(Plot-files ) Full detailed calculation

Acoustic parameter overview plot-file, TRENDn_ss.PLT (n = 1,2,3). Parameters: see above.

Normalized trend (Overview)(Plot-files )

Full detailed calculation

Similar to trend but with normalized values (if Include parameters normalized to expected values is on). The following parameters are shown: D-50, C-80, G, SPL. Filename NTREND_ss.PLT. RASTI (Overview)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

Graphs of RASTI values, 500Hz/2kHz average D-50 (Deutlichkeit), and 500Hz/2kHz SPL (RASTI is built from these two octaves). Filename RASTI_ss.PLT. Note: RASTI is always calculated (even if this plot option is not selected or no echogram plots for 500 Hz and 2 kHz are requested) and can always be found in PARAM_ss.PLT. STIuser (Overview)(Plot-files) Full detailed calculation

Graphs of STIuser and octave band TI (Transmission Index) with and without background noise taken into account. The octave band weight values used can be selected in Preferences, see Section 1.3. Filename STIUSER_ss.PLT. Note: STIuser is always calculated (even if this plot option is not selected or no echogram plots for all bands used in STImod are requested) and can always be found in PARAM_ss.PLT. Post-processing (E_ss_rr.ECH) (Save data for) Full detailed calculation

Creates files for use with the Binaural post-processing module, see Section 7. Filenames E_ss_rr.ECH. Source addition (E_ss_rr.ADD) (Save data for) Full detailed calculation

Creates files for use with the Source addition module as described in Section 6. Filenames E_ss_rr.ADD for echogram data and name.CMB for source-combination data (where name.LOC is the current source-file).

2.3 Input-files
The prediction input-files describe the geometrical model, source positions/properties, and receiver positions.

2-27

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Common features
All geometry-related input-files are in text-format: (*.GEO, *.LOC) and the data entry is done using any suitable editor. CATT-Edit is recommended since the main program then knows if a file has been changed before a prediction is made and it also has several other useful features. In the data-file syntax descriptions below the following apply: UPPERCASE COURIER BOLD is used for directives lowercase courier is used for values to directives UPPERCASE COURIER is used for filenames and similar items | ... means "OR" means a sequence, range, or continuation of the specified item(s).

Text like this with a left border is a syntax description. The following applies to all text input data-files: character case is not significant except for plane and sub-division names in geometry-files and TEXT marker text which will stay as entered data is entered and parsed on a line-by-line basis. An exception to this is definition of planes in geometry-files that can be spread over many lines totally blank lines are ignored allowing for white space in the files data items must be separated by one or more blanks or TABs no blank or TAB is, however, needed between a data field delimiter and a data item anything written after a semicolon ; on a line is treated as a comment reserved characters (that cannot be used in constant and absorption names etc.): * ; [(< >)]/- +% entering of floating point values has a very free format. The floating point number 1.0 can, for example, be entered as any of the following: 1 1. 1.0 1E+00 1.E+00 1.0E+00 1E0 1.E0 1.0E0 both decimal point and decimal comma are allowed. negative numbers (or constants) must be entered without a space between the minus sign "-" and the first digit (i.e. -1.0 is OK but - 1.0 is not) unit for coordinates etc. is meter [m]. Note: see the SCALE directive for using other units names (constant, source directivity names and absorption/diffusion properties) must not have more than 15 characters, consist only of letters, numbers (0-9), and underscores ( _ ) and the name must start with a letter if a directive is left out the default is used

2-28

2. PREDICTION MODULE if a directive is without meaning in a particular context it is ignored should by mistake two directives of the same type (that are not defined to be multiple directives) be entered, it will be trapped. If a directive is defined as a multiple directive, every appearance counts IF-THEN statements: IF expr1 condition expr2 THEN statements ENDIF or IF expr THEN statements ENDIF where expr1, expr2, and expr are valid expressions. The condition can be any of: <, <=, = , >=, >, and # corresponding to less, less or equal, equal, greater or equal, greater, and not equal. If expr evaluates to > 0 then the statements are executed. To enable high-level statements two global constants have been pre-defined: FALSE=-1 and TRUE=1. Example: if a and b are declared as either TRUE or FALSE then: "IF a THEN" "IF NOT a THEN" "IF a AND b THEN" "IF a OR b THEN" "IF a XOR b THEN" can be written as can be written as can be written as can be written as can be written as IF a THEN IF -a THEN IF a+b THEN IF a+b+1 THEN IF -a*b THEN

Note: IF-THEN statements cannot be nested. SAY statements: SAY message will display message on the screen and wait for OK to be pressed. Can be used for tracing and debugging purposes. SAY constant where constant is the name of a previously declared constant, will display the evaluated value or string and wait for OK to be pressed. RETURN statements: RETURN will force end-of-file. Can be used for debugging purposes.

2-29

2. PREDICTION MODULE BREAK statements: BREAK message will force abort of the processing with the message shown on screen. Example: IF height >= 15 THEN BREAK Height must be less than 15! ENDIF

Geometry-files
Geometry-files (GEO-files for short) describe the hall geometry and often also defines wall absorption/diffusion properties. GEO-files can be organized hierarchically like a "tree" to make structuring of the geometry possible since each GEO-file can INCLUDE one or more GEO-files which in turn can INCLUDE others and so on to any depth. An included file can have any name but must have the extension .GEO and be located in the input folder. Planes should not refer to a corner id in a file at a lower level (an included file). One of the advantages of the tree-structure is that a complete section of the hall (e.g. all reflectors) can be switched off just by adding a semicolon (comment introducer) in front of the corresponding INCLUDE directive or by using an IF-THEN statement. The master-file name which the Prediction module looks for in the input folder typically has the name MASTER.GEO. By selecting another master-file (using the General settings/Master GEO-file) it is possible to have several different "setups" for a hall where e.g. one master-file includes reflectors and another just the plain hall thus making comparisons with/without reflectors easy. A GEO-file can be defined as an OBJECT and be rotated around any point and translated to any location in the hall. Multiple copies of an object can be created at different positions and rotations. A GEO-file can use named LOCAL and GLOBAL constants, expressions, and IF-THEN statements, which make changes easy and secure. For interactive constant declarations GETLOCAL and GETGLOBAL can be used. A GEO-file can be mirrored for automatic creation of symmetrical or nearly symmetrical parts. Several tools for accurate definition of plane corners are provided (x(), y(), z(), lock(), cut(), loop()).

Syntax
In addition to the common features of input text-files, for the GEO-file syntax explanations the following apply: directives are entered as: DIRECTIVE value(s) or

2-30

2. PREDICTION MODULE DIRECTIVE for toggle (on/off) directives

directives may be entered in any order but a constant has to be declared before it is used coordinates, scale, object origin, shift, rotation and absorption/scattering coefficients can be specified as a floating point number, as a declared local or global constant, or as an expression. A GEO-file must have three sections with the following order:

directives CORNERS corner definitions PLANES plane definitions MARKERS marker definitions

constant and absorption declarations etc. mandatory mandatory optional

Note: a mandatory section may be empty but the strings CORNERS and PLANES must always be present.

Directives section
CATT-Edit has a Help menu item with short syntax descriptions to serve as a quick reference for the detailed descriptions below. INCLUDE filename #I filename (multiple) (short form)

The files are included in the order they are encountered, but not until the current GEO-file is read. This means that each level of files are read before the next level. If a problem with file inclusion should occur insert SAY statements to trace GEO-files or use Utilities|Create GEO-file Tree where GEO-files are listed in order of inclusion. filename: name of GEO-file (with or without .GEO) to include (must be in the input folder and be given without path). Default: no file included. SCALE sc_x sc_y sc_z Scale to use in the GEO-file. If scaling is used all coordinates in the file will be in scaled units. If the same scale in all files is required, global constants can be defined in the masterfile (e.g. sx, sy, sz) and then SCALE sx sy sz can be put in all included files as well as source- and receiver-files. Note: if SCALE is used in all GEO-files as well as in the receiverand source-files using x(), y(), and z() functions may scale twice since scaling has already been applied. In such a case use e.g. 1+x(12)/s, where s is the scale factor, to prevent the extra scaling. sc_x, y, z: scale factors for each axis. E.g. all x-values will be multiplied with sc_x. Default: SCALE 1 1 1 (i.e. no scaling)

2-31

2. PREDICTION MODULE

OBJECT To make the GEO-file be an object-file. The coordinate system in the file is then local to the object. The sub directives ORIGIN, TRANSLATE, and ROTATE are used to place the object in the hall system. Default: not an object-file. TRANSLATE t_x t_y t_z SHIFT t_x t_y t_z

(alternative form)

How much to translate (shift) the object - i.e. where, in the hall coordinate system, to put its origin. See Fig. 2.1. t_x, t_y, t_z : translation along each axis. Default: TRANSLATE 0 0 0 ROTATE r_x r_y r_z How much to rotate the object around its origin. See Fig 2.1. r_x, r_y, r_z : rotation around each object axis in degrees. A positive value rotates clockwise and negative value rotates counter clockwise. Default: ROTATE 0 0 0

Y r_z # 0 with new ORIGIN y

x r_z # 0 t_y r_z = 0 Example in 2D. X-Y is hall system x-y is object system X x new ORIGIN o_y > 0

t_x

Fig. 2.1 Function of ROTATE and ORIGIN OBJECT directives ORIGIN o_x o_y o_z If OBJECT. Where the objects origin should be placed relative the coordinates specified in the file. Rotation and scaling are performed around this origin. By using this directive it is possible to enter a symmetric object in a suitable coordinate system and then rotate it around a point away from the center. See Fig. 2.1.

2-32

2. PREDICTION MODULE o_x, o_y, o_z: position of new origin in the object coordinate system. Default: ORIGIN 0 0 0 OFFSETPL number Offsets all plane ids in the file with number. Enables a local plane-numbering system; especially useful for objects. number: number to add to plane ids in the GEO-file. Can be negative. Default: OFFSETPL 0 OFFSETCO number Offsets all corner ids in the file with number. Enables a local corner-numbering system; especially useful for objects. number: number to add to corner ids in the GEO-file. It applies to corners in both the corners and the planes section. Can be negative. Default: OFFSETCO 0 FROMFRONT|FROMBACK If the plane corners in the PLANES section are entered in clockwise order as seen from the front (reflecting side) or from the back (non-reflecting side). This is further described below about the planes section. Default: FROMBACK MIRROR coadd pladd MIRROR coadd pladd EXCLUDE plid ... (form 1) (form 2)

The first form of this directive will automatically create a mirror copy of all corners defined in the file with non-zero x. It will also create mirror copies of all planes that have corner coordinates with the same x sign or that are zero. The mirror operation takes place after all corners are read which means that mirrored corners cannot be referred to in the corners section. Help corners for locking can be created with x = 0. coadd: pladd: An example:
OFFSETCO 200 OFFSETPL 20 MIRROR 1000 100 CORNERS 0 ... 1 ... 2 ... ... PLANES [0 ... [1 ... [2 ... ...

a number added to all corner ids for mirrored corners. a number added to all plane ids for mirrored planes.

2-33

2. PREDICTION MODULE The part explicitly modeled in the file will have corner ids 200, 201, 202 ... and plane ids 20, 21, 22 ... The mirrored part will, however, get corner ids 1200, 1201, 1202 ... and plane ids 120, 121, 122 ... The second form allows for some planes being excluded from mirroring. An example:
OFFSETCO 200 OFFSETPL 20 MIRROR 1000 100 EXCLUDE 0 3 CORNERS 0 ... 1 ... 2 ... ... PLANES [0 ... [1 ... [2 ... [3 ... ...

The part explicitly modeled in the file will have corner ids 200, 201, 202 ... and plane ids 20, 21, 22, 23 ... The mirrored part will, however, still get corner ids 1200, 1201, 1202 ... and plane ids 121, 122 ... but not planes 120 and 123 since planes 0 and 3 have been excluded from mirroring. The EXCLUDE option can be used if models are not perfectly symmetrical since all corners are mirrored and where some planes will be slightly altered (e.g. a door only on one side). COPY coadd pladd o_x o_y o_z t_x t_y t_z r_x r_y r_z #C coadd pladd o_x o_y o_z t_x t_y t_z r_x r_y r_z (multiple) (short form)

This directive will create a copy of the data in the file. The procedure will simply be to model one object, and then add a number of this directive for the GEO-file to copy itself. The directive also works together with MIRROR and creates a copy also of the mirrored part. The GEO-file does not have to be an OBJECT itself for COPY to work. coadd: pladd: o_x ...: t_x ...: r_x ...: An example:
OFFSETCO 200 OFFSETPL 20 MIRROR 1000 100 ; co pl orig. COPY 10 5 0 0 0 COPY 20 10 0 0 0 COPY 30 15 0 0 0 CORNERS 0 ... 1 ... 2 ... ... PLANES [0 ... [1 ... [2 ... ...

a number added to all corner ids for copied corners. a number added to all plane ids for copied planes. new object origin (same function as ORIGIN) location of new object (same function as TRANSLATE) rotation of new object (same function as ROTATE)

transl. 0 10 0 0 20 0 0 30 0

rotate 0 0 15 0 0 30 0 0 45

2-34

2. PREDICTION MODULE The part modeled in the file will have corner ids 200, 201, 202 ... and plane ids 20, 21, 22 .... The symmetric part will get corner ids 1200, 1201, 1202 ... and plane ids 120, 121, 122 .... The first object copy will have corner ids 210, 211, 212 ... and plane ids 25, 26, 27 ... The symmetric part will, however, get corner ids 1210, 1211, 1212 ... and plane ids 125, 126, 127 ... and so on for the second and third copy. GLOBAL name = expr|string #G name = expr|string (multiple) (short form)

Definition of a global named constant - the constant is then known in the current GEO-file and in every GEO-file included in and after the current file as well as in source- and receiverfiles. An attempt to redeclare a global constant will be trapped. The equals sign is optional. Two global constants are predefined: TRUE=1 and FALSE=-1. name: expr: constant name (only the first 15 characters are significant). an expression, arbitrarily complex, including declared constants, parenthesis, and calls to math functions: SIN(), COS(), TAN(), ARCTAN(), EXP(), LOG() (natural logarithm), SQRT(). Angle arguments must be in degrees. a string constant in double quotes that can be used e.g. in plane definitions and the name is then delimited with %, see below.

string:

Example 1:
GLOBAL a = 5 GLOBAL h_ceil = a + 1 GLOBAL wup = "Wall with unknown plaster" ... CORNERS 1 a 2.5 h_ceil ... PLANES [ 1 %wup% / 2 4 5 6 7 / wallabs ] ; will expand %wup% to Wall with unknown plaster

Example 2:
GLOBAL blue = "{0 0 255}" ABS plastic = <12 10 8 7 6 5> %blue% ...

Since an IF-statement in the form "IF expr THEN" will be true if expr evaluates to > 0, flags can be defined by using TRUE and FALSE :
GLOBAL balcony = TRUE ... IF balcony THEN ... ENDIF IF -balcony THEN ... ENDIF

2-35

2. PREDICTION MODULE

LOCAL name = expr|string #L name = expr|string

(multiple) (short form)

Definition of a local named constant - the constant is then known in the current GEO-file only. An attempt to re-declare a local constant in the same file will be trapped. If the local name should be the same as a global name the local overrules the global. The equals sign is optional. name, expr, string: see GLOBAL. (multiple) (multiple)

GETGLOBAL name = expr|string GETLOCAL name = expr|string

Same as GLOBAL and LOCAL above but the constant value or expression is entered at runtime. expr|string is the default value. ABS ABS ABS ABS absname = < values > [{R G B}] (all ABS variants are multiple) absname = < values > m < s-values > [m_data][{R G B}] absname1 = absname2 absname1 = absname2 m < s-values > [m_data]

Declaration of a global named surface (absorption/diffusion) property as an alternative to put the coefficients directly or to use the surface properties library (the fourth variant complements a previously defined property with scattering coefficients or redefines its current coefficients). The absorbing/diffusing property is then known from this point in the current GEO-file and in every GEO-file included in and after the current file. An attempt to re-declare a property will be trapped (it may, for example, already be declared in the surface properties library). There are two predefined absorption properties: TOTREF and TOTABS. TOTABS is an artificial total absorption used for the back side of "floating" audience planes and similar planes for quick tests. The equals sign is optional. absname: name of absorption/diffusion property.

<-values> : absorption coefficients in % ]0..100[ for the six octave bands 125 to 4k Hz (can be specified by constants): <125 250 500 1k 2k 4k> e.g. <5 7 8 10 15 20>. 8k and 16k values are extrapolated from 2k and 4k. Optionally 8k and 16k are given preceded by a colon: <125 250 500 1k 2k 4k : 8k 16k > e.g. <5 7 8 10 15 20 : 35 50 >. m: diffusion model letter. L = Lambert model (no other models implemented). <s-values>: scattering coefficients in % ]0..100[ for the six octave-bands 125 to 4k Hz (can be specified by constants). <s125 s250 s500 s2k s2k s4k> e.g. <5 10 20 25 30 35>. 8k and 16k values are extrapolated from 2k and 4k. Optionally 8k and 16k are given preceded by a colon: <s125 s250 s500 s2k s2k s4k : s8k s16k > e.g. <5 10 20 25 30 35 : 40 50>. m_data: a sequence of diffusion model dependent values. Not required for the Lambert model (previous versions have had additional Lambert data that no longer are used, future models may need more data).

2-36

2. PREDICTION MODULE {R G B}: optional Red Green Blue values in the range [0..255] for defining the color of the material (e.g. pure Red is {255 0 0}. For non-pure colors the values can be selected in a color dialog using CATT-Edit (Template|RGB Color menu). If not given a color is auto-generated. Tip: symbolic color names can be created using string constants: LOCAL red = {255 0 0} and used as %red%.

Note: diffusion properties are controlled globally in the General settings dialog by the (Diffuse reflection) settings. Materials that do not have any diffusing properties assigned can get default values by selecting Surface default in the dialog. NOROOM This directive is used only in the master-file and when the GEO-file is not a room but a set of planes and markers to be exported using File|Export. With this directive, no source and receiver-file is required and some Geometry view/check plot-files are disabled. Note that even if a file is created only for export it has to contain at least one plane (but this plane does not have to be exported). Often a ground plane at z = 0 is useful as a reference plane to place e.g. a chair object on. Default: GEO-file is a normal room file

Corners section
This section lists the corner/node ids and their x-, y-, and z-values. These corners can be used to create both planes and markers and be referred to in source- and receiver-files (using the x(), y(), z() functions).

CORNERS c_id c_x c_y c_z ... The string CORNERS marks start of corner coordinates. c_id: a unique corner id (0-65535). See also OFFSETCO.

c_x, c_y, c_z: the coordinates as floating point numbers, declared constants, special functions as described below, or expressions. The corners can be entered in any order and corners not used don't have to be removed. Several tools for defining an accurate and structured geometry are provided. Use of Expressions: Instead of first defining a symbolic constant (by using an expression) and then use the constant for a coordinate, the expression can be entered directly. The expression must, however, either be entered without intervening spaces or be completely enclosed in parenthesis. Without this convention it is not possible for the parser to know where, for example, the x-expression stops and the y-expression starts. Method no. 1 (slightly more efficient if x1, y1 and z1 are used many times):
LOCAL a = 5 LOCAL x1 = sqrt(a) LOCAL y1 = 3 + a LOCAL z1 = 1 - 2*a CORNERS

2-37

2. PREDICTION MODULE
22 x1 y1 z1

...
PLANES

... Method no. 2 (more clear):

LOCAL a = 5 CORNERS 22 sqrt(a) 3+a 1-2*a ;without spaces parenthesis not required

...
PLANES

... or
LOCAL a = 5 CORNERS 22 (sqrt( a )) (3 + a) (1 - 2*a) ;with spaces and parenthesis

...
PLANES

... Note: to avoid possible complications, an exception to the above is that an expression cannot start with a factor within parenthesis, i.e. an expression such as (a+b)*sin(r) must either be completely enclosed within parenthesis: ((a+b)*sin(r)) or rearranged: sin(r)*(a+b). The reason for this is that the parser looks for matched parenthesis if the first character is a "(" and will in the example stop after (a+b) and start the next coordinate with a "*" resulting in an error-message. Automatic locking to planes: Locking hard-to-measure coordinates into a plane can be accomplished by a function replacing either the x-, y-, or z-coordinate: lock(id1 id2 id3) Where id1, id2 and id3 are the ids of three previously defined corners, describing the plane to lock into. An example:
CORNERS 1 ... 3 ... 15 ... 23 2.3 ... PLANES ...

15.4

lock(1 3 15)

where the z-coordinate of corner 23 will be calculated to lock into the plane defined by corners 1, 3 and 15 at x = 2.3 and y = 15.4

2-38

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Plane-line intersection: A corner can be completely defined by describing it to be the intersection of a line, described by two previously defined corner ids, and a plane described by three previously defined corner ids: cut(l_id1 l_id2 p_id1 p_id2 p_id3)

where the first two ids describe the line and the last three describe the plane. An example:
CORNERS 1 ... 3 ... 15 ... 10 ... 11 ... 23 cut(10 11 ... PLANES ...

1 3 15)

where corner 23 will be calculated as the intersection of the line 10 to 11 with the plane described by corner 1, 3, and 15. Use of previously defined corners: In addition to mathematical functions, functions returning the x-, y-, or z-value of a previously defined corner id can be used: x(id) or y(id) or z(id) where id is a previously defined corner id (it must not be a symbolic constant or expression). An example:
CORNERS 12 2.2 23 2.3 24 -x(23) ... PLANES ... 13.4 15.4 y(23) 13.2 z(12) z(12)+1

These three functions can be treated as any other functions, for example be used in expressions defining a constant. Absolute corner ids mixed with relative ids: The convenient possibility to use relative corner ids in a file by specifying the OFFSETCO directive is sometimes complicated by the need to use a corner defined outside of the current GEO-file. To enable this, an id can be preceded by an underscore "_" and the id will not be incremented by the specified offset, and will thus be taken as an absolute id. An example:
OFFSETCO 100 CORNERS 12 1.2 2.5 23 2.3 y(_12) ...

3.3 z(12)

The y-value of corner 23 will be that of corner 12, while the z-value will be that of corner 112. Note: no space is allowed between the underscore and the id. A loop() function to generate coordinates:

2-39

2. PREDICTION MODULE The loop()function is used instead of an id x y z sequence, the syntax is: loop(id_start,i,i_start,i_stop,i_step,x_expr,y_expr,z_expr) id_start Start of corner ids to be generated by the function, for each new coordinate this number is incremented by 1 Loop variable Integer start value for i Integer stop value for i Integer step for i, can be < 0 for backwards stepping Expression for the x-coordinate (optionally including loop variable i ) Expression for the y-coordinate (optionally including loop variable i ) Expression for the z-coordinate (optionally including loop variable i )

i i_start i_stop i_step x_expr y_expr x_expr

Example creating coordinates in a crude circle (points every 45): this sequence: 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 2*cos(0*45) 2*cos(1*45) 2*cos(2*45) 2*cos(3*45) 2*cos(4*45) 2*cos(5*45) 2*cos(6*45) 2*cos(7*45) 2*sin(0*45) 2*sin(1*45) 2*sin(2*45) 2*sin(3*45) 2*sin(4*45) 2*sin(5*45) 2*sin(6*45) 2*sin(7*45) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

can be generated in one step by: loop(500,angle,0,315,45,2*cos(angle),2*sin(angle),3) or by : loop(500,q,0,7,1,2*cos(q*45),2*sin(q*45),3) Notes: decimal comma cannot be used in the x-, y- and z- expressions but only decimal point (comma is used to separate parameters) the selected loop variable must not clash with any other used letter in an expression (if sin() is used, s, i or n cannot be used as a variable) lock() cannot be used in the x-, y- and z- expressions the created coordinates can be mirrored, copied, translated etc. just like any other coordinates

2-40

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Planes section
PLANES [pl_id pl_name / c ... / abs ] or [pl_id pl_name / c ... / (sub_name / c ... / abs ) ...] ... The second variant is for a sub-divided plane. The string PLANES marks start of plane definitions. [ ] pl_id pl_name field delimiters: start and end of a plane definition. a unique plane id number (1-5000, 0 allowed if OFFSETPL is used). an (optional) name of the plane. The 20 first characters will be used (e.g. in PLINFO.PLT) the rest ignored. Note: slash "/" or backslash "\" can not be used in the name since they act as field delimiters. field delimiter. Plane definitions in GEO-files can use either slash "/" or backslash "\" as field delimiters where "\" means that the plane corner entering order is reversed but only for the plane concerned. This feature has two uses: 1) to quickly correct a plane that by accident has been entered reversed, 2) to create double-sided planes by simply copying the definition of one side to a new line and flip / to \ and change plane id and absorption (if different on the two sides). Sub-divisions are automatically oriented in the same way as the plane and can always use e.g. /. plane or sub-division corner ids entered in clockwise order as seen from the front or the back of the plane as specified by FROMFRONT|FROMBACK (from back is default). There is no practical limit of the number of corners in a plane or subdivision. Any corner will do as a start corner as long as the main direction is correct. It is not only allowed but strongly recommended to enter redundant corners on a plane (such as three points on a line) to use e.g. to connect to a neighbor plane. Planes cannot contain holes. See Fig 2.2 and 2.4. The mixing of absolute and relative corner ids, as described for the corners section, also applies in the planes section.
3 plane no. 1 2 12 13 If FROMBACK is used, plane no. 10 is defined as: [10 / 11 12 13 14 / wood] or [10 \ 14 13 12 11 \ wood] If FROMFRONT is used, plane no. 1 is defined as: [1 / 1 2 3 4 / wood] or [1 \ 4 3 2 1 \ wood]

c ...

14

plane no. 10 1 11

Fig. 2.2 Plane corner entering order

2-41

2. PREDICTION MODULE abs absorption/diffusion property name as described above for the ABS directive. If a material is used for one plane only, the values can be entered directly in the plane definition (e.g. [1 / 1 2 3 4 / <8 7 6 5 4 3> ]). If an asterisk "*" is appended to the name (or the values if no name is used) the plane or subdivision will have automatic edge diffusion (selected in General settings). field delimiters: start and end of a plane sub-division definition. During the calculation, the plane sub-divisions are searched for hits in the order they are defined. This can be used to define one sub-division on top of another. For example, a window and a door in a wall can be defined as the first and second divisions and the whole wall as the third division. If the window or the door is hit the search stops. If they are not hit then the hit must be in the wall outside the window and the door. This makes the plot of plane sub-divisions look more clear, saves time entering, and also uses less memory. See Fig 2.3. Note: subdivisions cannot be created in the AutoCAD interface

( )

sub_name a sub-division name (a name of any length can be used, but only the first 10 characters will be kept and shown in PLINFO.PLT). Planes can be entered in any order. There is a difference in how the plane definitions are entered as compared to all other data in the input-files which are entered on a line-by-line basis. To allow a definition to spread over many lines (e.g. if a plane has many corners or sub-divisions) characters are read until the first "[" is found and the definition is parsed until a matching "]" is found, see Fig 2.3. 1 10 11 b 16 17 c a 12 13 d 18 19 g 4 [1 / 1 (a / 1 (b /16 (c /17 (d /18 (e /19 (f /20 (g / 4 ] 3 2 15 21 3 4 16 10/ 2 15 14 13 12 11 10/ abs1) 10 11 17/ abs1) 11 12 18/ abs2) 12 13 19/ abs1) 13 14 20/ abs3) 14 15 21/ abs1) 16 17 18 19 20 21 3/ abs1) 4 e 20 14 f 21 17 2 15 1 11 a 18 19 c 3 12 13 b 20 14 2

The two windows (with abs2, abs3) and the remaining wall (with abs1) are best modeled as: [1 /1 2 3 4/ (a /17 11 12 18/ abs2) (b /19 13 14 20/ abs3) (c / 1 2 3 4/ abs1) ]

Fig. 2.3 Use of plane sub-divisions

2-42

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Markers section
Markers are non-acoustical elements not affecting the prediction but are for visual appearances only. Markers can also be used to create sound source Visuals. Marker-files can indirectly be made in AutoCAD via the AutoLISP interface and then modified in GEO-format and exported as a marker-file. A directive NOROOM can be used if a GEO-file is used only to create a Marker-file (no source and receiver files necessary, no calculations made). All markers except LOAD have some common initial parameters: NAME ids... {R G B} offset ids... a number of corner ids used to determine the location, direction and drawing plane of the marker object. Even for two-point lines a drawing plane needs to be defined so that the direction of the drawing offset can be determined. the Red Green Blue values for the marker color, each in the range [0..255] e.g. {255 0 0} for pure red. CATT-Edit has a Template| RGB Color menu item that inserts an RGB-triplet from visual selection in a color dialog. an offset from the plane defined by the ids. The idea is to always offset the marker against e.g. a wall so that with shading, the marker is shown in front of the wall. With loudspeaker visuals the offset is typically set to zero except for e.g. outer markings such as a brand label.

{R G B}

offset

POLY id1 id2 ... idN {R G B} offset A filled planar (i.e. all points are in the same plane) polygon marker with no outlined edge:

id1 id2 ... idN

the corner ids defining the polygon. The polygon is automatically closed (i.e. the first id does not have to be entered also as the last id). The polygon normal is calculated from the first three ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anti-clockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the fill color [0..255]. Only the front side of the polygon is filled (i.e. the side in direction of the normal). is the offset (in meter) from the plane (defined by id1, id2 and id3), and in direction of the normal, to where the polygon will be drawn.

{R G B}

offset

Example: POLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 {255 0 0} 0.1 i.e. a red polygon with 7 corners drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. Tip: To create an outline use the LINE marker with same ids but repeat id1 at the end:

2-43

2. PREDICTION MODULE LINE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 {0 0 0} 0.1 i.e. a black outline. LINE id1 id2 ... idN {R G B} offset pattern A multi-point planar (i.e. all points are in the same plane) line marker: id1 id2 ... idN the corner ids defining the line. To make a closed line idN has to be the same as id1. The line normal is calculated from the first three ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anti-clockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the line color [0..255]. is the offset (in meter) from the plane (defined by id1, id2 and id3) and in direction of the normal, to where the line will be drawn. optional pattern : 0 (solid), 1, 2, 3, 4. Default is a solid line.

{R G B} offset

pattern
Examples:

LINE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 {255 0 0} 0.1 i.e. a seven-point red line with drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. DASH id1 id2 id3 {R G B} offset pattern A two-point line marker: id1 id2 id3 the actual line is between id1 and id2. The line normal is calculated from the ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anticlockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the line color [0..255]. is the offset (in meter) from the plane defined by the ids, and in direction of the normal, to where the dash will be drawn optional pattern : 0 (solid), 1, 2, 3, 4. Default is a solid line.

{R G B} offset

pattern
Examples:

DASH 1 2 3 {255 0 0} 0.1 i.e. an red dash with drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. RULE id1 id2 id3 {R G B} offset tic pattern A two-point ruler marker with tics: id1 id1 id3 the actual ruler line is between id1 and id2. The line normal is calculated from the ids in the following way: v12 =

2-44

2. PREDICTION MODULE vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anticlockwise order as seen from the desired front side. {R G B} are the Red Green Blue values for the ruler color [0..255]. Tics will be drawn in a complementing color. is the offset (in meter) from the plane defined by the ids, and in direction of the normal, to where the ruler will be drawn the tic size (in meter). Every fifth tic will be drawn in a different color. optional pattern : 0 (solid), 1, 2, 3, 4. Default is a solid line.

offset

tic

pattern
Example:

RULE 1 2 3 {255 0 0} 0.1 1.0 i.e. an red ruler between 1 and 2 drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. DISC id1 id2 id3 {R G B} offset radius A filled disc marker: id1 id1 id3 id1 is the disc center. The disc normal is calculated from the ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anti-clockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the disc fill color [0..255]. is the offset (in meter) from the plane defined by the ids, and in direction of the normal, to where the circle will be drawn disc radius (in meter)

{R G B} offset

radius Example:

DISC 1 2 3 {255 0 0} 0.1 1.0 i.e. a 1.0 m radius red disc drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. CIRC id1 id2 id3 {R G B} offset radius pattern A circle marker: id1 id1 id3 id1 is the circle center. The circle normal is calculated from the ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anti-clockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the circe line color [0..255]. is the offset (in meter) from the plane defined by the ids, and in direction of the normal, to where the circle will be drawn

{R G B} offset

2-45

2. PREDICTION MODULE

radius

circle radius (in meter) optional pattern : 0 (solid), 1, 2 3, 4. Default is a solid circle.

pattern
Example:

CIRC 1 2 3 {255 0 0} 0.1 1.0 i.e. a 1.0 m radius red circle drawn 0.1 m in front of the plane defined by ids 1, 2 and 3. TEXT id1 id2 id3 {R G B} offset "text" height width style A 3D text marker: id1 id1 id3 the text is drawn from id1 along vector(id1id2) and with up defined by vector(id2id3) (this vector does not have to be perpendicular to the id1id2 vector). The text normal is calculated from the ids in the following way: v12 = vector(id1id2), v23 = vector(id2id3) and normal_vector = cross_product(v12,v23). This corresponds to entering the ids in anticlockwise order as seen from the desired front side. are the Red Green Blue values for the text color [0..255]. is the offset (in meter) from the plane defined by the ids, and in direction of the normal, to where the text will be drawn. the actual text (entered within " ") the text height in meter, measured from the baseline to the top of capitals. the average text width in meter (the text is not a constant width text) optional style : B is bold (no other styles implemented)

{R G B} offset

text height

width

style
Example:

TEXT 1 2 3 {255 0 0} 0.1 "Wall" 1.0 0.5 i.e. the red text Wall with 1.0 m high and 0.5 m wide characters drawn from id1 in the direction 12 with 23 defined as up. LOAD id1 id2 id3 "path\mrk-file" A marker that loads a marker-file object (.MRK). Marker-file objects can be created in GEOformat and exported to file using the File|Export menu: id1 id1 id3 the marker is loaded at id1 with its x-axis along vector(id1id2) with vector(id1id3) defined as up (this vector does not have to be perpendicular to the id1id2 vector). id3 is optional and if not given the marker is placed assuming up is the z-axis. Note that any offsets should be made already when creating the marker object.

2-46

2. PREDICTION MODULE

path\mrk-file

the marker-file to load, if path is not given the file is assumed to be located in the project input folder. The .MRK extension is optional.

Example: LOAD 1 2 3 "Chair" i.e. the Chair.MRK marker-file object will be loaded at corner 1 with its x-axis defined by 12 and z-axis by 13 (the y-axis is calculated).

Modeling notes
Planes must not be entered on top of each other (use plane sub-divisions instead as explained above). If a triangle-plane has all its corners in a line the plane is removed and an error message is given. The cause of this error may either be a mistake (that has to be corrected) or as a result of an export from AutoCAD that occasionally has been found to give these types of non-planes. Corners/nodes that touch edges of adjacent planes should be included in both planes, see Fig. 2.4:
2 12 11 1 14 4 13 [1 big / 1 14 13 2 3 4 / abs1 ] [2 small / 11 12 13 14 / abs2 ] 3

Fig. 2.4 Attaching plane corners properly If corners 13 and 14 are not included in plane 1, debug will generate an "Edges cutting or touching error" and also that 13 and 14 are "single-connected". These errors are not severe but should, if possible, be avoided. When modeling from scratch in the GEO-format it is not difficult but models imported from AutoCAD will typically have a lot of these errors. For volume calculations to be correct models must be made without single-sided overlapping planes. It can be described like this: "all planes that do not have its backside towards the outside of the room must be made double-sided". and all planes that can be reached by sound must be modeled - but only those planes must be modeled and only those parts that can be reached by sound The same rules holds for the "potentially reversed normal" debug check to work. The debug option "single-connected corners" flags some problem planes but not all (e.g. the underside of an audience must be included even if the audience is "boxed-in" if the floor under the audience is still modeled, see example below). Another way to describe the matter is just like the volume calculation algorithm works: "if a ray from any position inside a room, sent out in any direction, passes an odd number of planes on its way to infinity the position is inside, otherwise it is outside".

2-47

2. PREDICTION MODULE From this it can be seen that if one audience plane is placed on top of a full floor there can be two passings of a ray signaling a truly inside position to be outside. Any automatic calculation from an arbitrary geometry needs to rely on that the geometry is built according to certain rules. Figures below only show the floor/audience part but it is assumed that walls and ceiling are present too.
P audience surface 1 Q 1 2 floor P: outside room (false) Q: inside room (correct)

Fig. 2.5 Geometrically incorrect method where volume estimate, surface area and classical mean absorption will be wrong (Sabine RT). Rays will also pass under and through the audience (from below).
P 1 Q 1 3 2

P: inside room (correct) Q: inside room (correct)

Fig. 2.6 Geometrically correct method but volume estimate, surface area and classical mean absorption will be wrong (Sabine RT). Rays will also pass under the audience.
P 1 Q 1 3 2 P: inside room (correct) Q: inside room (false)

audience edges

Fig. 2.7 Geometrically correct method but volume estimate, surface area and classical mean absorption will be wrong (Sabine RT). This is the correct way and the audience block will be excluded from the volume:

2-48

2. PREDICTION MODULE
P 1 Q

P: inside room (correct) Q: outside room (correct)

Fig. 2.8 Geometrically correct method including correct volume and Sabine RT.

2-49

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Example model
Below are the geometry-files for a simple hall. These files are in the CATT-folder EXAMPLE. Constants and INCLUDEs are used a lot to demonstrate the principle (and power) of these two concepts. Main symbolic constants used can be seen in Fig 2.9 and main model corners in Fig. 2.10.

Fig. 2.9 Description of constants used in the example hall.

108 106 300 301 104 203 107 213 6 103 4 204 105 214 102 3 A0 2 1 201 211 5 01 303 302 202 2127 8

101

Fig. 2.10 COINFO.PLT for the example hall.

2-50

2. PREDICTION MODULE

The GEO-file inclusion "tree" looks like this:

MASTER.GEO SIDES.GEO ACROSS.GEO AUDIENCE.GEO REFL.GEO MARKERS.GEO

The GEO-files:
GEO-file MASTER.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall ; used in REFL.GEO to add more reflectors (if set to TRUE) GLOBAL showcopy = FALSE INCLUDE INCLUDE INCLUDE INCLUDE INCLUDE ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS sides.geo across.geo audience.geo refl.geo markers.geo ;some non-acoustic visual elements = = = = = = < 20 15 12 10 7 5 > L < 10 12 14 18 20 20> {159 152 96} birch < 20 30 40 50 60 70 : 90 95> {94 119 162} ; 8k and 16kHz added absofix < 20 15 12 10 7 5 > L < 20 30 40 50 60 70 > {228 179 27} custom

birch somewood absofix absorber custom diffusor

; general dimensions - change theses and the rest of the hall will follow ! ; If you like to experiment change these to GETGLOBAL. GLOBAL sh = 6 ; stage wall height GLOBAL sd = 9 ; stage depth GLOBAL sw = 11/2 ; stage back wall width/2 GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL ph pw pth pbh psw = 10 = 17/2 = 3 = 1.2 = 4.5 ; ; ; ; ; prosc prosc prosc prosc prosc height width/2 top wall height bottom wall height side wall width (1.5)

GLOBAL hd = 30

; hall depth (without stage)

GLOBAL bww = 14/2 ; back wall width/2 GLOBAL bwh = 10 ; back wall height GLOBAL fltilt = 2 ; floor tilt CORNERS ; section is empty PLANES ; section is empty

GEO-file SIDES.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall OFFSETPL 10 MIRROR 100 10 CORNERS 1 sw -sd 0 2 pw 0 0 3 sw -sd sh 4 pw 0 ph 5 pw+psw 0 -pbh

2-51

2. PREDICTION MODULE
6 x(5) 0 ph+pth

7 bww hd fltilt-pbh 8 bww hd z(7)+bwh ; MIRROR creates 101 - 108 PLANES [0 stage wall / 1 [1 prosc edge / 2 [2 side wall / 5 ;creates planes 10 3 4 6 4 2 / somewood ] 6 5 / absorber ] 8 7 / somewood ] 12 and MIRROR creates 20 - 22 (OBS OFFSETPL 10)

GEO-file ACROSS.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall LOCAL ay1 = 6 LOCAL ay2 = hd - 1 CORNERS 401 402 403 404 -ay1*x(5)/hd -ay2*bww/hd -x(402) -x(401) ay1 ay2 y(402) y(401) lock(106 lock(106 lock(106 lock(106 108 108 108 108 6) 6) 6) 6)

PLANES [30 stage wall / 101 103 3 1 / somewood [31 stage ceil / 103 104 4 3 / somewood [32 stage floor / 1 2 102 101 / somewood [33 bottom prosc / 105 102 2 5 / absorber [34 top prosc / 104 106 6 4 / absorber [35 hall ceiling / 106 108 8 6 / ( d / 401 402 403 404 / diffusor) ( w / 106 108 8 6 / somewood) ] [36 back wall / 7 8 108 107 / somewood ] GEO-file AUDIENCE.GEO ;AUDIENCE.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall OFFSETCO 200 OFFSETPL 50 ABS aud = < 35 53 73 80 79 75 : 80 90> L <30 40 50 60 70 70> {153 214 41} LOCAL delta = 1.2 LOCAL audh = 1.2 LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2 = pw + psw - delta = bww - delta = delta = hd - delta = -pbh + audh = z1 + fltilt ] ] ] ] ]

;string constants used in plane names below LOCAL a = "audience" LOCAL f = "floor" CORNERS ;audience upper corners 1 x1 y1 z1 ; corner 1 could as well be written with the equations like: ;1 pw+psw-delta delta -pbh+audh ;or ;1 (pw + psw - delta) delta (-pbh + audh) 2 x2 y2 z2

2-52

2. PREDICTION MODULE
3 -x2 y2 z2 4 -x1 y1 z1 ;audience ;note use 11 x1 y1 12 x2 y2 13 -x2 y2 14 -x1 y1 PLANES [0 [1 [2 [3 [4 [5 [6 [7 [8 %a% / 1 2 3 4 / aud ] %a% front / 1 4 14 11 %a% back / 12 13 3 2 %a% side / 11 12 2 1 %a% side / 13 14 4 3 front %f% / _5 11 14 back %f% / _7 107 13 side %f% / _5 _7 12 side %f% / 107 105 14 floor corners of _ to access absolute external id:s (OFFSETCO is not applied) lock(_5 _105 _7) lock(_5 _105 _7) lock(_5 _105 _7) lock(_5 _105 _7)

/ aud / aud / aud / aud 105 / 12 / 11 / 13 /

] ] ] ] somewood somewood somewood somewood

] ] ] ]

GEO-file REFL.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL w = bww - 1.8; 0.2 d = 7 ty = 24.3 tz = 10.5

OBJECT ROTATE -40 0 0 TRANSLATE 0 ty tz ;set showcopy = TRUE i MASTER.GEO to add these! IF showcopy THEN COPY 5 2 0 0 0 0 ty-1*(d+0.1) tz 0 0 0 COPY 10 4 0 0 0 0 ty-2*(d+0.1) tz 0 0 0 COPY 15 6 0 0 0 0 ty-3*(d+0.1) tz 0 0 0 ENDIF OFFSETCO 300 CORNERS 0 -w 0 0 1 -w d 0 2 w d 0 3 w 0 0 PLANES ;* = size ;(must be [60 refl ;the back [61 refl

dependent auto edge diffusion enabled in General settings) front / 0 1 2 3 / somewood* ] of a reflector MUST be defined too back \ 0 1 2 3 \ absorber* ]

GEO-file MARKERS.GEO ;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall ;Places a wall clock above the stage and adds a ruler to the stage wall LOCAL clockradius = 0.55 LOCAL minhand = 0.5 ; length of clock minute hand LOCAL hourhand = minhand*0.8 ; length of clock hour hand CORNERS ;coordinates to place the "stage wall" text a bit over the floor 1001 x(1) y(1) z(1)+1 1002 x(2) y(2) z(2)+1

2-53

2. PREDICTION MODULE

;coordinates for loading the chair 1010 0 y(2)-2 z(2) 1011 -2 y(2)-2 z(2) ;coordinates to place the clock 1020 0 y(4) z(4)+2 ;clock center 1021 x(1020)+hourhand*cos(45) y(4)+0.01 z(1020)+hourhand*sin(45) ;hour hand end 1022 x(1020)+minhand*cos(90) y(4)+0.01 z(1020)+minhand*sin(90) ; min hand end PLANES ;empty MARKERS TEXT 4 104 106 {255 0 0} 0.1 "v8 Example Hall" 1.5 0.7 TEXT 1002 1001 3 {0 0 255} 0.1 " stage wall" 0.8 0.5 LOAD 1010 1011 "bluechair" ;clock DISC 1020 6 4 {0 255 0} 0.05 clockradius CIRC 1020 6 4 {0 255 255} 0.05 clockradius LINE 1021 1020 1022 { 0 0 0 } 0.12 ; the hands ;Ruler to show the stage height RULE 2 4 6 {0 0 0} 0.2 1.0

Source-file
The source data has to be specified in a separate file with the extension .LOC in the input folder as specified in the General settings dialog. This file is read after the GEO-files and can therefore use global constants declared in these files. Normal name is SRC.LOC.

Syntax
The principles are the same as stated for the GEO-files in the previous sub-section. A source-file must have two sections with the following order: directives (constant declarations etc.) SOURCEDEFS source locations, aim, octave-band levels and delay. The directives section may be empty but the string SOURCEDEFS must be present and at least one source must be defined.

Directives section
SCALE sc_x sc_y sc_z LOCAL name = expr|string name = expr|string #L GETLOCAL name = expr|string (multiple) (short form) (multiple)

These have the same meaning as in GEO-files. There is no point in defining global constants in the source-file since it is the last file to be read.

2-54

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Sourcedefs section
With the prediction of measures that are not only relative early/late measures (SPL, STIuser and RASTI) the level at 1m in front of a source must be set to the actual level. However, for auralization the acoustical source spectrum (of a talker, singer or instrument) is present in the anechoic speech/music and is removed from calculated echograms before postprocessing leaving only the system gain/eq to affect the sound (for natural sources the gain is 0 dB). This eq/gain can optionally be switched off at post-processing (as if the system was ideally flat). By removing the acoustical source spectrum it is also reasonable to switch anechoic material as long as the implied source has a directivity pattern similar to the one given in the source-file. SOURCEDEFS If a source is of natural type (talker, singer, instrument, machine): s_id s_x s_y s_z dirname[.SD0|.SD1|.SD2] a_x a_y a_z [roll] or s_id s_x s_y s_z dirname[.SD0|.SD1|.SD2] aim(H,V) [roll] or s_id s_x s_y s_z anechoic.WAV a_x a_y a_z [roll] or s_id s_x s_y s_z anechoic.WAV aim(H,V) [roll] Lp1m_a = Lp1m_a_description s_id: source id (A0..A9 - Z0..Z9 allowing for 260 sources). The sources can be entered in any order and in any combination. source center location coordinate as floating point numbers, declared constants, or expressions. The lock(), cut(), x(), y(), z() functions can also be used (e.g. to lock a source to a fixed distance from a movable wall). Note: a source must not be placed exactly inside a wall since it will result in ray loss. source directivity name in the CATT-folder SD (filename dirname.SD0, dirname.SD1 or dirname.SD2) or OMNI for a predefined omnidirectional natural source. If no extension is specified SD0 is assumed. A source-name can be copied using the Directivity module Utilities menu and pasted into CATT-Edit while editing the source-file. coordinate of where to aim the source. The lock(), cut(), x(), y(), z() functions can also be used. source aiming angles as an alternative to an aim coordinate. For angle conventions according to fig. optional roll angle, in degrees, around the source axis (defined by s a) looking down the axis from s_ to a_. Positive angles assume clockwise rotation around the axis. The roll angle is indicated in the SRCINFO.PLT geo-check plot-file. z
-180 H 180 -90 V 90 H=0,V=0 is the y-axis H > 0 on the positive x side V > 0 on the negative z side

s_x, s_y, s_z:

dirname

a_x, a_y, a_z:

aim(H,V):

roll:

V H x aim line

2-55

2. PREDICTION MODULE anechoic.WAV means that the directivity is taken from the anechoic WAV-file info: CATTfolder ANECHOIC\anechoic.AWI (if present for the anechoic file). See Post-Processing:Utilities for how to create AWI-files.

Lp1m_a_description:
< Lpa125 .. Lpa4k [ : Lpa8k Lpa16k ] > the SPL values at 1m on axis of the natural source. Lpa8k and Lpa16k are sound pressure levels for the 8 and 16 kHz octavebands. These values are optional and are used only when required for full bandwidth auralization in the post-processing module. If not included they are set to the value for 4 kHz thus decreasing the 8 kHz power by 3 dB and the 16 kHz power by 6 dB as compared to white spectrum. Lp_nominal the Nominal SPL 1m values on axis (as set in the Directivity module for the directivity) the Max SPL 1m values on axis (as set in the Directivity module for the directivity) shorthand for <N125 .. N4k> (predefined normal voice level constants, see below) shorthand for <R125 .. R4k> (predefined raised voice level constants, see below) shorthand for <L125 .. L4k> (predefined loud voice level constants, see below) creates a white spectrum (+3dB/octave) with Lpa1k at 1kHz creates a pink spectrum (0dB/octave) with Lpa1k at 1kHz SPL values at 1 m on axis taken from an anechoic WAV-file info: CATT-folder ANECHOIC\anechoic.AWI (if present for the anechoic file given). See Post-Processing:Utilities for how to create AWI-files.

Lp_max

Lp_voice_normal

Lp_voice_raised

Lp_voice_loud

Lp_white Lpa1k Lp_pink Lpa1k anechoic.WAV

If a source is of electro-acoustic type (loudspeaker of some kind): s_id s_x s_y s_z directivity[.SD0|.SD1|.SD2] a_x a_y a_z [roll] Lp1m_a = Lp1m_a_description Lp1m_ea = Lp1m_ea_description Delay_e = delay or s_id s_x s_y s_z directivity[.SD0|.SD1|.SD2] a_x a_y a_z [roll] Lp1m_a = Lp1m_a_description Gain_a = < G125 .. G4k [ : G8k G16k ] > Delay_e = delay or as one of the above with a_x a_y a_z replaced with aim(H,V).

Lp1m_a_description:
< Lpa125 .. Lpa4k [ : Lpa8k Lpa16k ] > the SPL values at 1m on axis of the acoustical source (see Lp1m_a_description above about the 8k and 16k values)

2-56

2. PREDICTION MODULE Lp_voice_normal Lp_voice_raised Lp_voice_loud Lp_white Lpa1k Lp_pink Lpa1k anechoic.WAV see above see above see above see above see above see above.

Lp1m_ea_description:
< Lpea125 .. Lpea4k [ : Lpea8k Lpea16k ] > the SPL values at 1m on axis of the loudspeaker (see Lp1m_a_description above about the 8k and 16k values) Lp_max Lp_white Lpea1k Lp_pink Lpea1k see above see above see above

< G125 .. G4k [ : G8k G16k ] > is the system total gain (Lp1m_ea is the calculated to be = Lp1m_a + Gain_a) delay delay in ms (has to be given even if it is zero). The delay is taken into account for Audience area mapping, Multiple source addition and multiple source auralization using SIM-file and WAV-file addition.

For remaining parameters for an electro-acoustic source (s_id, s_x etc.) see natural source. Examples assuming Talker.SD0 is a natural source and Horn.SD1 is a loudspeaker:
LOCAL g = 10 ;system gain SOURCEDEFS ;A0 and A1 give the same Lp1m_a levels expressed in two ways A0 -1 2 1.7 Talker.SD0 0 3 1.7 Lp1m_a = <L125 L250 L500 L1k L2k L4k> A1 1 2 1.7 Talker.SD0 0 3 1.7 Lp1m_a = Lp_voice_loud ;B0 and B1 give the same Lp1m_ea levels expressed in two ways B0 -1 -1 1.7 Horn.SD1 0 3 1.7 Lp1m_a = <N125 N250 N500 N1k N2k N4k> ; the spectrum of the talker Lp1m_ea = <N125+g N250+g N500+g N1k+g N2k+g N4k+g> Delay_e = 0 ; delay has to be given even if it is 0 B1 1 -1 1.7 Horn.SD1 0 3 1.7 Lp1m_a = Lp_voice_normal Gain_a = <g g g g g g> Delay_e = 0 ;C2 uses the anechoic WAV-file info embedded in an AWI-file ; assumes that Mt_44_an.AWI has directivity and Lp 1m info.

2-57

2. PREDICTION MODULE
C2 1 -1 1.7 Mt_44_an.WAV 0 3 1.7 Lp1m_a = Mt_44_an.WAV

Note: if SCALE is used in all GEO-files as well as in the receiver- and source-files using x(), y(), and z() functions will scale twice since scaling has already been performed. In such a case use e.g. 1+x(12)/s, where s is the scale factor, to prevent the extra scaling. Note: the predefined OMNI source is treated as an natural source, if an electro-acoustic source will be used with omni-directional directivity a directivity file has to be created for it with a name different from OMNI.SD0. Various octave-band speech spectrums at 1 m distance have been defined by ANSI S3.79 (draft) as spectral densities at the center frequencies and as an average for males and females. The corresponding Lp1m values have been calculated and are included as predefined global constants: Normal vocal effort Raised vocal effort Loud voice
N125 N250 N500 N1k N2k N4k = 51.2 = 57.2 = 59.8 = 53.5 = 48.8 = 43.8 R125 R250 R500 R1k R2k R4k = 55.5 = 61.5 = 65.6 = 62.4 = 56.8 = 51.3 L125 L250 L500 L1k L2k L4k = 58.0 = 64.0 = 70.3 = 70.7 = 65.9 = 59.9

Note: the 125 Hz SPL is not defined in the standard and has been set to -6dB lower than the 250Hz band.

Example
The example below is the CATT-folder EXAMPLE\SRC.LOC. See fig 2.9.
;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall LOCAL sh = 1.7 SOURCEDEFS A0 3.0 -2.0 sh OMNI 0.0 10.0 2.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> B0 -2.0 -5.0 sh OMNI 0.0 10.0 2.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85>

Receiver-file
The receiver data has to be specified in a separate file with the extension .LOC in the input folder as specified in the General settings dialog. Normal filename is REC.LOC.

Syntax
The principles are the same as stated for the GEO-files. The receiver-file must have two sections with the following order : directives (constant declarations etc.) RECEIVERS receiver locations and optional individual head-directions

2-58

2. PREDICTION MODULE The directives section may be empty but the string RECEIVERS must be present and at least one receiver must be defined.

Directives section
SCALE sc_x sc_y sc_z GLOBAL name = expr|string #G name = expr|string LOCAL name = expr|string #L name = expr|string GETGLOBAL name = expr|string GETLOCAL name = expr|string (multiple) (short form) (multiple) (short form) (multiple) (multiple)

These have the same meaning as in GEO-files. Global constants declared in the receiver-file will be known also in the source-file.

Receivers section
RECEIVERS r_id r_x r_y r_z ...

[h_x h_y h_z]

The string RECEIVERS to mark start of receiver locations. r_id: receiver id (0-99). The receivers can be entered in any order and in any combination. receiver location coordinates as floating point numbers, declared constants, or expressions. The lock(), cut(), x(), y(), z() functions can also be used (e.g. to lock all receivers to a fixed distance above the audience planes). Note: a receiver must not be placed exactly inside a wall since it will result in ray loss. optional individual receiver head-direction. If not given, the selection in General settings is used (Stage, Source or Fixed). Useful e.g. with the walkthrough convolver since receiver positions and head-directions can be created along a path in a 3D graphics-software walkthrough.

r_x, y, z:

h_x, y, z:

Note: if SCALE is used in all GEO-files as well as in the receiver- and source-files using x(), y(), and z() functions will scale twice since scaling has already been performed. In such a case use e.g. 1+x(12)/s, where s is the scale factor, to prevent the extra scaling.

2-59

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Example
The example below is the CATT-folder EXAMPLE\REC.LOC. See fig 2.9.
;CATT-Acoustic v8.0 Manual Example Hall LOCAL dx = 1.9 ; column spacing LOCAL x0 = 0 LOCAL x1 = x0 + dx LOCAL x2 = x1 + dx LOCAL x3 = x2 + dx LOCAL x4 = x3 + dx LOCAL x5 = x4 + dx LOCAL dy = 7 ; row spacing LOCAL y0 = 5 LOCAL y1 = y0 + dy LOCAL y2 = y1 + dy LOCAL y3 = y2 + dy LOCAL dz = 0.5 ; height spacing LOCAL z0 = 0.6 LOCAL z1 = z0 + dz LOCAL z2 = z1 + dz LOCAL z3 = z2 + dz RECEIVERS 1 -x4 y0 2 -x3 y0 3 -x2 y0 4 -x1 y0 5 x0 y0 6 x1 y0 7 x2 y0 8 x3 y0 9 x4 y0 10 -x4 y1 11 -x3 y1 12 -x2 y1 13 -x1 y1 14 x0 y1 15 x1 y1 16 x2 y1 17 x3 y1 18 x4 y1 19 -x3 y2 20 -x2 y2 21 -x1 y2 22 x0 y2 23 x1 y2 24 x2 y2 25 x3 y2 26 -x3 y3 27 -x2 y3 28 -x1 y3 29 x0 y3 30 x1 y3 31 x2 y3 32 x3 y3

z0 z0 z0 z0 z0 z0 z0 z0 z0 z1 z1 z1 z1 z1 z1 z1 z1 z1 z2 z2 z2 z2 z2 z2 z2 z3 z3 z3 z3 z3 z3 z3

2-60

2. PREDICTION MODULE

2.4 Output-files
This section contains a list of all result plot- and text-files created by the Prediction module. It complements the general overview of file-types in Section 1.4. All files except *.TXT are in binary format. Most kinds of echogram graphs display a dual time axis, the upper axis is calculated from the direct sound arrival, the lower from the emission of sound. Note that the lower axis is rounded to ms so if the actual initial delay is e.g. 7.2 ms the lower axis will start at 7 ms.

General
PREDPLT.TXT list of the latest result plot-files (use List|Open List-file in the View module). list of the latest geometry plot-files (use List|Open List-file in the View module). Created if only Geometry view/check is selected.

GEOPLT.TXT

Geometry view/check results

Selected in the Geometry view/check dialog: VIEW4.PLT Plan, side, and top views plus a parallel 3D projection. Sources and receivers are marked. If audience planes are selected for Audience area mapping they are marked gray and the audience surface-area is displayed. For closed models the estimated volume is also displayed (if a model is said to be closed in Geometry view/check dialog but found to be open, the volume is displayed in round brackets). If only a geometry check is performed, the volume estimate is less accurate than for full calculations and interactive Sabine RT. Similar to VIEW4.PLT but instead of a 3D projection data for each source selected is shown in plot sub-frames. If a source is not omni-directional the source visual is shown. Source aim angles are defined as in fig: x COLORED.PLT z
-180 H 180 -90 V 90 H=0,V=0 is the y-axis H > 0 on the positive x side V > 0 on the negative z side

SRCINFO.PLT

V H aim line

A colored 3D projection of the hall. Sources and receivers are marked. Head directions (if not towards source) and source aim (if not Omni directivity) are marked as a line pointing out from the receiver or source. The reflecting side of surfaces are colored according to the assigned surface colors. If a source is not omni-directional the source visual is shown. A shaded 3D projection of the hall. Sources and receivers are marked. Head directions (if not towards source) and source aim (if not Omni directivity) are marked as a line pointing out from the receiver or source. The reflecting side of surfaces are given a viewing-angle

SHADED.PLT

2-61

2. PREDICTION MODULE dependent shading. If a source is not omni-directional the visual is shown. SHADED.OGL A shaded 3D projection of the hall for the OpenGL-based CATT 3Dviewer. Similar to COLORED.PLT but with more 3D functions, lighting, a walkthrough option, animated viewpoint transitions, optional -3, -6 and --9 dB directivity contours etc. The source visual is shown. A wire-frame model with all corner ids displayed (no shading). A wire-frame model with data on all planes included (no shading). All planes must have their front sides (the side that can be hit by sound) colored with the assigned surface color and the back be black (or the plane corner entering order must be reversed). A wire-frame model with data on all selected planes included. Each selected plane is a plot sub-frame showing edge reflection contours from each source. Note that the contour is purely geometrical and no consideration to diffraction or diffusion is taken. Contours for not selected planes are shown gray. Similar to SRCINFO.PLT but a 3D wire-frame model where the -3dB contours are shown for each source for the selected octave-bands. Contours for not selected sources are shown gray. Optionally created source combination file for the Multiple source addition module (automatically created if ADD-files are selected in Early part detailed ISM or Full detailed calculation. name is taken from the current source-file). Optional text-file describing the geometry in detail as well as any geometrical errors found, see Section 2.2. Planes listed have codes describing the type of plane: -c (concave plane i.e. with reentrant angles), -o (obscuring plane i.e. it can intercept a ray between two other planes), -d (double-sided plane - the other side's plane id follows). Plane sub-divisions have codes -c (concave sub-division), * (has diffusing properties). Example:

COINFO.PLT PLINFO.PLT

REFLINFO.PLT

SRCINFO3D.PLT

name.CMB

DEBUG.TXT

CATT-Acoustic v8.0a debug : Sample shoebox ---------------------------------------------------------------------DUPLICATE PLANE ID's : no ! DUPLICATE CORNER ID's : no ! DUPLICATE CORNERS : no ! SINGLE-CONNECTED CORNERS : no ! INACCURATE PLANE CORNERS : no ! EDGES CUTTING/TOUCHING : no ! POSSIBLY REVERSED PLANES : no ! ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ID x y z Used in planes ---------------------------------------------------------------------1 -5,000 0,000 0,000 1 3 5 2 -5,000 24,000 0,000 1 4 5 13 5,000 24,000 8,000 2 4 6 14 5,000 0,000 8,000 2 3 6 Planes used (* = diff) : Plane ID: 1 Name : floor (S= 240,0m) Corners : 4 3 2 1* 2* 3* 4* 5* 6*

2-62

2. PREDICTION MODULE
Equation: 0,0000 0,0000 1,0000 0,0000 Abs/Diff:AUDIENCE <40 50 60 70 80 80> L <30 40 50 60 70 80> Plane ID: 2 Name : ceiling (S= 240,0m) Corners : 11 12 13 14 Equation: 0,0000 0,0000 -1,0000 8,0000 Abs/Diff:WOOD <15 13 10 9 8 7 : 6 5> L <30 30 30 30 30 30 : 30 30>

Audience area mapping results

Selected in the Audience area mapping dialog: The calculation case for mapping calculations is documented in the plot-file title (the yellow bar below the plot) by a string: N/tr/height/P Where: N tr height /P Number of rays Ray truncation-time, ms Map height over the selected audience planes, m if direct sounds are added with phase

For example: 10000/1300/0.5/P means 10000 rays traced for 1300 ms and a map height of 0.5 m, direct sounds added with phase. SPL_oct.PLT LF_oct.PLT RASTI.PLT PARn_oct.PLT Sound pressure level coverage maps for the time-intervals indicated. LF coverage maps for the time-intervals indicated. RASTI coverage map both with and without background noise. Parameter maps (n = 1,2,3) as selected.

On each color scale min and max lines are drawn. Audience area mapping statistics When mapping is requested for any of the measures D-50/C-50, C-80, LF, SPL, RT', Ts, RASTI or STIuser, map statistics is automatically written to a text-file MAPSTAT.TXT in the output folder (and shows up in the Prediction:Latest results dialog as do all created textfiles). This file first lists information about all sources used and then the percentage of map points having predicted values in different intervals together with simple bar graph for a quick overview (one * = 1% rounded). An example for LF:
------------------------LF 2 kHz [%] ------------------------< 5.0 : 0.83 % * 5.0 - 10.0 : 2.50 % *** 10.0 - 15.0 : 8.75 % ********* 15.0 - 20.0 : 13.75 % ************** 20.0 - 25.0 : 12.92 % ************* 25.0 - 30.0 : 18.33 % ****************** 30.0 - 35.0 : 31.25 % ******************************* 35.0 - 40.0 : 11.25 % *********** 40.0 - 45.0 : 0.42 %

2-63

2. PREDICTION MODULE
45.0 - 50.0 : 0.00 % > 50.0 : 0.00 % -------------------------

The choice was made to make a simple text-file rather than a plot-file graph since some users anyway may want to cut/paste this information into a report table. The internal implementation allows for uneven sized intervals (e.g. for RASTI, see below) but so far this is not reflected and intervals are simply set to reasonably well correspond to the difference limen of each measure: Parameter Min Step Max Unit Comment D-50 10 10 90 % i.e. ranges: <10,10-20,..,80-90,>90 C-50 -10 1 10 dB C-80 -10 1 10 dB LF 5 5 50 % See example above SPL max-20 1 max dB top 20 dBs are divided in 1 dB steps G max-20 1 max dB see SPL RT' min 0.1 max s Ts min 10 max ms RASTI 30 15 75 % i.e.: <30,30-45,45-60,60-75,>75 *) STIuser 30 15 75 % see RASTI *) Corresponds to the BAD, POOR, FAIR, GOOD, and EXCELLENT ranges. Note: if a map is made in such a way that a large fraction of the map points are partly out of walls or are not hit at all because of blocking it has to be taken into account by comparing with the map plot-file (mostly happens with a large map step). The statistics evaluates how many of the map points that have been hit at all fall into the categories given. Note: audience area mapping results are always for the sum of all sources selected including any source delays.

Early part detailed ISM results

Selected in the Early part detailed ISM dialog: The calculation case for early part ISM calculations is documented in the plot-file title (the yellow bar below the plot) by a string: S/D/te Where: S D te

Specular reflection order Diffuse reflection order (or "-" if diffusion is off) Truncation-time, ms

For example: 4/1/150 means 4 orders of specular reflection, 1 order of diffuse reflection and early part truncated at 150 ms. I_ss_rr_oct.PLT Echogram plot-files for each octave. H_ss_rr_oct.PLT Echogram and interactive specular reflection trace (first order diffuse reflections are colored red). In the lower right graph plane ids that are encountered by each reflection is displayed (S = source and R = nd receiver so that S-12-10-R means a 2 order reflection in planes 12 and 10). The lower left shows source exit angles as the ray (line length affected by directivity) projected in two planes. The upper right shows

2-64

2. PREDICTION MODULE the incidence angles to the receiver displayed in a similar manner (line length affected by reflection strength). Note: the 3D view of the model can be rotated unless the 2D version of this plot is selected in Preferences. I_ss_rr.TXT Hidden option (see Section 1.3): A text-file with all reflections are created. The file is intended for those that may want to do a post-processing of their own for some special purpose, 8k and 16k values are included according to Preferences. The file has the following structure (decimal point or comma is used depending on Windows Control-panel Regional settings):

#HEADER (header data similar to PARAM_ss.TXT, skip to #DATAFIELDS if not required) #DATAFIELDS
TYPE DELAY ORDER AZIMUTH ELEVATION SPL125 SPL250 SPL500 SPL1K SPL2K SPL4K SPL8K SPL16K

(these fields indicate which fields are in the #DATA section below, and in what order: TYPE DELAY ORDER AZIMUTH is d = direct sound, s = specular, * = diffuse (not sorted in time); is delay relative direct sound arrival in ms; is reflection order (diffuse ones always have 1); is the standard azimuth relative the listener head (affected by headdirection);

ELEVATION is the standard elevation relative the listener head (affected by headdirection); x-axis is left to right, y-axis is in the nose direction, and z-axis is up, frontal incidence will thus be at 90,90 degrees. Look at the history plotfile in parallel if in doubt about the angle values; SPL... is the SPL for the corresponding octaves)

#DATA d 0.00 0 90.00 90.00 s 0.96 1 90.00 101.81 s 5.81 1 90.00 89.20 (rest of the data) #END

69.1 67.3 66.7

69.1 67.3 66.7

69.1 67.3 66.7

69.1 67.3 66.7

69.1 67.3 66.7

69.1 ... 67.3 ... 66.7 ...

S_ss_rr_oct.PLT Image source space plot-files where the circle area is proportional to the image source power. The lower right graph displays the estimated late part reflection growth together with actual early part growth (using classical theory for the late part requiring a closed shape). In each view are shown only those image sources that are contained in a slice of space described in the other views. For example, in the x-y view only the sources between the horizontal dotted lines in the y-z view are shown so that they represent what is heard in the horizontal plane. E_ss_rr.ECH Echogram files for the post-processing module (only for special cases). Echogram files for the multiple source addition module (only for special cases).

E_ss_rr.ADD

2-65

2. PREDICTION MODULE name.CMB Source combination file for the Multiple sources addition module automatically created if ADD-files are selected. name is taken from the current source-file.

Full detailed calculation results

Selected in the Full detailed calculation dialog The calculation case for full detailed calculation is documented in the plot-file title (the yellow bar below the plot) by a string: N/tr Where: N tr

Number of rays Ray truncation-time, ms

For example: 2000/1500 means 2000 rays traced for 1500 ms. E_ss_rr_oct.PLT Echogram plot-files for each octave with extensive information: upper left: full echogram (black curve) with backward integrated decay (red curve), reverberation time regression lines and coefficients;

upper right: early part discrete reflections: direct sound (blue bar with a ring), first and second order specular reflections (blue bars), first order diffuse reflections (red bars), all other reflections (black bars); early part smoothed echogram (lower red curve, filter can be selected); early part backward (upper red curve) and forward integrated (upper black curve), the crossing of the forward and backward integrated curve will be an estimate of the Rise time as defined by W.J. Jordan [Cremer, p. 433];

lower right: early part cos-square weighted X (front-back, blue curve), Y (left-right, black curve) and Z (up-down, red curve) smoothed echograms;

lower left: a small hall plan with source- and receiver locations, a scale and source data; all estimated major parameters.

E_ss_rr_oct.PLT and similar echogram plots show a dual time axis. The upper axis gives the time relative arrival of direct sound while the lower gives the time relative sound emission. E_ss_rr_INT.PLT Backwards integrated decays (Schrder plot) for all octaves marking T-15, T-30 and their regression lines.

2-66

2. PREDICTION MODULE R_ss_rr_oct.PLT Sound rose plots indicating sound incidence projected onto three planes and in six time-intervals. Within each time range the incident ray vectors are projected (the length of the vector is its intensity value) onto the horizontal plane, the vertical plane and the ear-to-ear vertical plane where they are accumulated in 5 wide sectors and a 10 dB/division radial scale is used. Each rose shows only the spatial incidence and not the absolute level since the length of the lines are normalized by the total incident sound energy in each the time-interval. At each rose a % value is given calculated as the ratio of the energy projected to each plane to the total energy in the time-range. V_ss_rr_oct.PLT Vectorgram plots, an echogram where each reflection is drawn according to the incidence. Imagine standing at the origin looking along the time axis. Direct sound and first order specular reflections are drawn with thick lines. RT_ss.PLT Reverberation time and mean absorption overview. Also indicates the number of rays lost and absorbed per octave-band and other statistical data. If the two mean absorption coefficient curves (AbsC and AbsCg) differ it is likely that overlapping planes have been used. Histograms over free reflection path lengths and the resulting mean free path. Histograms over absorption coefficients encountered by the rays and the resulting mean absorption coefficient. Interactive plane hit histogram. Each plot frame marks each plane's share of all ray hits. Above the graph is displayed each plane's area efficiency (for all eight octaves) and its share of the total absorption area. For area efficiency, a value of 100% indicates that a surface is hit according to classical Sabine theory (area-proportional), < 100% means hit less often and > 100% means hit more often. Parameter overview plot-files (n = 1,2,3). The data for each octave is a plot frame. If a value is too high to display with three digits ">>>" is shown and if a value is too low "<<<" is shown. If a value could not be estimated "***" is shown and if it is not applicable "---" is shown. Parameter trend plot-files (n = 1,2,3). A plot frame line can be moved marking the receivers. Receivers not used are indicated by a small ring and values that could not be estimated are indicated by a small square. Similar to TRENDn_ss.PLT but with normalized parameters, see Theory. Trend of RASTI values, 500Hz/2kHz average D-50 (Deutlichkeit), and 500 Hz/2 kHz SPL (RASTI is built from these two octaves). Receivers not used are indicated by a small ring. Background noise levels are indicated. Trend of STIuser and octave band TI (Transmission Index) values with an without background noise included. Receivers not used are indicated by a small ring. Background noise levels are indicated. If any ray leaks were encountered during the tracing of rays, this file is automatically created showing where the leaks occurred. At the top of the largest leak, the number of rays that escaped through that part of

PATH_ss.PLT

ABS_ss.PLT

HITS_ss.PLT

PARAMn_ss.PLT

TRENDn_ss.PLT

NTREND_ss.PLT

RASTI_ss.PLT

STIUSER_ss.PLT

LEAKS_ss.PLT

2-67

2. PREDICTION MODULE the model is indicated. Note: the direction of a ray is not recorded but only the location where it escaped. Causes to leaks are warped planes, actual holes and a finite numerical accuracy. In addition is displayed a graph showing the fraction of lost rays over time. E_ss_rr.TXT Single receiver result text-file. If Include parameters normalized to expected values has been selected the normalized values are shown alongside with the absolute values. Example:

CATT-Acoustic v8.0a : Acoustic parameters Copyright CATT 1988-2002 ============================================================================================ Original file name: C:\CATTDOCS\V8\EXAMPLE\OUT\E_A0_01.TXT Original save time: 2002-03-22 15:23:51 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Project : v8.0 Manual Example Hall GEOMETRICAL INFORMATION Src id and loc [m] : Rec id and loc [m] : VARIABLE SOURCE DATA Directivity Type (library) : Dir. Index (DI) [dB] : Level On axis 1m [dB] : Total power [dB] : Auxiliary delay [ms] :

A0 01

3,000 -7,600

-2,000 5,000

1,700 0,600

OMNI.SD0 0,0 0,0 70,0 80,9 0,0 73,0 83,9

0,0 76,0 86,9

0,0 79,0 89,9

0,0 82,0 92,9

0,0 85,0 95,9

0,0 85,0 95,9

0,0 85,0 95,9

VARIABLE AIR DATA Temperature [C] Relative humidity [%] Density [kg/m] Sound speed [m/s] Impedance [Ns/m] Diss. coeff. [0.001/m]

: : : : : :

20 50 1,2 343 412 0,10

0,30

0,63

1,07

2,28

6,83 24,23 83,90

(estimated)

CALCULATION RESULTS Head direction [m] : 01 head turned towards stage GLOBAL RESULTS FROM TRACING -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Trunc[s] Rays[-] Lost[-] Absorbed[-] Angle[] ............................................................................................ 1,50 10088 0 0 2,0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k .......... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ................................. Mean Free Path MFP [m] 10,45 10,45 10,43 10,44 10,46 10,47 10,47 10,49 Average scattering coefficient Diffs[%] 15,11 18,71 22,66 27,86 31,76 32,42 33,19 33,91 ............................................................................................ T-15 [s] 1,84 1,82 1,68 1,70 1,59 1,35 0,84 0,34 (LS-fit -5 to -20 dB) T-30 [s] 1,92 1,91 1,79 1,81 1,73 1,47 0,85 0,32 (LS-fit -5 to -35 dB) EyrT [s] 1,61 1,54 1,35 1,29 1,32 1,21 0,77 0,36 (MFP, AbsC) EyrTg[s] 1,61 1,53 1,33 1,27 1,30 1,19 0,76 0,35 (MFP, AbsCg) SabT [s] 1,79 1,71 1,52 1,45 1,46 1,30 0,81 0,37 (Vact, Sact, AbsCg) AbsC [%] 22,9 23,7 26,3 27,0 25,6 24,2 25,4 26,3 (based on tracing) AbsCg[%] 23,0 23,9 26,6 27,4 26,0 24,7 26,0 27,0 (area-proportional) Back[dB] 45,0 38,0 32,0 28,0 25,0 23,0 21,0 19,0 (background noise level) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AVERAGE/ACTUAL VOLUME/SURFACE INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------V[m] Lx[m] Ly[m] Lz[m] S[m2] Sact[m] Vact[m] ............................................................................................ 7892 21,0 31,7 11,9 3019 3019 7747 V is volume estimated from MFP and S

2-68

2. PREDICTION MODULE
Lx,y,z is an average size of the model is surface area estimated by the rays S is total surface area Sact is actual estimated volume (requires a correct model) Vact -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Initial delay [ms] : 37,14 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RASTI [%] 56,3 (FAIR) 56,3 (FAIR) with background noise STImod [%] 57,6 (FAIR) 57,2 (FAIR) with background noise -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k ........... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... TI [%] 54,6 52,7 56,2 56,7 56,0 59,2 67,5 TI(n)[%] 52,0 52,4 56,2 56,6 56,0 59,2 67,5 Weights 0,13 0,14 0,11 0,12 0,19 0,17 0,14 (original) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum ........... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... Ts [ms] 92,2 94,3 82,3 82,1 82,8 73,4 47,0 23,2 69,8 D-50 [%] 52,6 46,0 52,1 51,5 52,6 52,4 68,1 88,0 56,9 C-80 [dB] 3,1 2,5 3,5 3,9 3,1 3,8 7,1 14,3 4,4 LFC [%] 47,5 48,8 48,4 45,1 46,0 49,4 46,5 33,1 46,6 LF [%] 35,6 36,5 36,3 32,8 34,6 36,6 34,9 24,9 34,7 G [dB] 7,4 7,4 6,7 6,4 6,2 6,7 4,4 1,3 5,6 SPL [dB] 57,4 60,4 62,7 65,4 68,1 71,4 68,3 62,7 75,6 75,6 (A) (previous line) EDT [s] 1,62 1,43 1,21 1,23 1,28 0,98 0,62 0,34 --T-15 [s] 1,84 1,82 1,68 1,70 1,59 1,35 0,84 0,34 --T-30 [s] 1,92 1,91 1,79 1,81 1,73 1,47 0,85 0,32 ----- not calculated *** impossible to calculate with accuracy

PARAM_ss.TXT

Multiple receiver result text-file. Similar to E_ss_rr.TXT but for all receivers. Always created. Multiple receiver result text-file to import into spread-sheet programs e.g. MS Excel. Similar to PARAM_ss.TXT but tabular data is semicolon delimited and text data is quoted. Always created. Echogram files for the post-processing. The basic contents can be checked by a Post-processing utility. Echogram files for the multiple source addition module. The basic contents can be checked by a Multiple source addition utility. Source combination file for the Multiple sources addition module automatically created if ADD-files are selected. name is taken from the current source-file.

PARAM_ssX.TXT

E_ss_rr.ECH

E_ss_rr.ADD

name.CMB

2.5 Theory
Prediction methods
CATT-Acoustic offers three independent prediction, or acoustic simulation, methods detailed in this section: Audience area mapping utilizes standard ray-tracing with a spherical receiver. Raytracing is a robust method for prediction of numerical measures

2-69

2. PREDICTION MODULE but the echograms are difficult to use for auralization since the reflection density growth over time is unnatural. Early part detailed ISM utilizes the Image Source Model with added first-order diffuse reflection. This method is meant for qualitative reflection path analysis and does not estimate any room acoustic parameters. The reason is that diffuse reflection is extremely difficult to include in the ISM in a general manner. For special cases that require high early part detail but no reverberation, postprocessing files can be generated. utilizes Randomized Tail-corrected Cone-tracing (RTC) that combines features of both specular cone-tracing, standard raytracing and the ISM. The RTC is a general and robust numerical prediction method and can as well create echograms that can be used for auralization. Since this method (as all other prediction methods) has drawbacks, the direct sound, first order diffuse and specular reflections and second order specular reflections are handled deterministically by the ISM.

Full detailed calculation

The predictions method are based on geometrical acoustics and are partly documented in a Ph.D. thesis [Dalenbck-95b], [Chalmers].

Speed of sound and air absorption

The speed of sound and air absorption is calculated according to the following expressions:

c0 = 331.4 1 +

) 273

(2.5-1) (2.5-2)

mb = from ISO 9613-1 (6.2 Formulae) based on , fb, and

where mb fb air temperature, C -1 air dissipation coefficient, m (see [Cremer] p213, mb = 2m) octave-band center frequency, Hz relative humidity, %

Audience area coverage mapping

Audience area coverage mapping estimates early sound pressure level, lateral energy fraction, and parameters (D-50 etc.), or direct sound only over a grid covering selected audience-planes. A separate ray-tracing with fixed-size spherical receivers, where also source directivity and source delay is taken into account, is performed. "fixed-size receiver" means that, unlike cone-tracing, the receiver radius does not change depending on how long a receipted ray has traveled. Diffuse reflection is handled by randomizing the direction of rays reflected off diffusing surfaces and the likelihood of diffuse reflection is determined by the scattering coefficient, s. The map is divided into a square grid where the grid step can be selected in the Audience area mapping dialog. The receiver diameter is set to slightly larger than the map step and the receiver center is normally placed at half a map step above the mapping planes so that

2-70

2. PREDICTION MODULE the sphere does not penetrate the audience plane. Some squares may fall partly outside the room (close to wall positions) causing a loss of energy received at those positions. To arrive at correct pressure levels the number of rays used should ideally match the map step chosen. To avoid this strict dependence, a different approach has been used. The number of rays needed to give a possibility of one ray per square at the longest chosen time is first calculated. The power of each ray is then adjusted dependent on the actual number of rays used so that roughly the same levels are obtained even if the number of rays are "too few". A systematic error is thus converted to a statistical error. If audience surfaces overlap in z, only the surface with highest z is mapped (i.e. if both balcony and stalls are included the stalls under the balcony will not be mapped but has to be predicted separately). For 3D map views the map points closest to the viewpoint are drawn last thus covering points behind. The direct sound is handled separately connecting the source directly to each receiver center taking into account any obscuring surfaces and is not effected by the number of rays chosen.

Early part detailed ISM

The Image Source Model (ISM) can determine all specular reflections between a source point and a receiver point. The ISM works by calculating first order image sources (IS) of the main source in all reflecting planes. From each of these first order IS, second order sources are created by calculating new IS in all reflecting planes (except the plane that created the first order IS since it would yield the previous order IS). This procedure is repeated until a requested max order of reflection or max arrival-time is exceeded. Once all valid IS are found, the corresponding reflection arrival times can be found simply by calculating the length of the three-dimensional vector from each IS to the receiver. The level of each reflection is calculated from the output power and directivity of the source, spherical spreading (inverse square law) and is adjusted by absorption and diffusion (first order) properties of the planes that created the IS and also by air absorption. On each diffusing surface a number of square patches are placed. For first order reflections these patches act as elementary sources radiating according to Lambert's law when excited [Kuttruff]. Diffusing surfaces are automatically patched. The Early part detailed ISM dialog selection Diffuse refl. order determines the maximum order that will give diffuse reflection. All specular reflections up to and including the diffusion order will be diminished by (1 - s). For higher order images sources the scattering coefficient, s, is neglected (or the energy would be lost). The diffuse reflection order should typically be set to 1.

Full detailed calculation

CATT-Acoustic v7 and v8 utilize a unique prediction method that is based on many years of experience from using the ISM, ray-tracing and combinations thereof, in previous software versions as well as on a Ph.D. thesis at Chalmers University [Dalenbck-95b], [Chalmers]. The design goals for the new method, called Randomized Tail-corrected Cone-tracing (RTC for short, v7.2 uses RTC-II), were to create: a general method that requires as few assumptions as possible e.g. regarding the statistical properties of the room under consideration: RTC only assumes that reflection density growth is quadratic and that can be shown to hold generally for closed rooms. For open rooms no use is made of the reflection growth.

2-71

2. PREDICTION MODULE a method that uses the same algorithm for both the early part and the late part of the echogram: RTC-II employs randomized cone-tracing (cone-tracing that handles diffuse reflection in the same manner as ray-tracing does) for the full response but handles the direct sound, first order specular and diffuse reflection, and second order specular reflection deterministically. What is labeled the "early part" in RTC is up to the time where details of the echogram are considered to be valid and no extrapolation of the growth is necessary (due to the divergence of rays cone- and ray-tracing do not detect late reflections from small surfaces). The more cones that are used the longer the "early part" becomes (typically 300-500 ms in concert halls, i.e. longer than in most other combined methods). The early part is limited to 1 s. a method that can handle frequency dependent diffuse reflection for the full echogram and not only for the late or the early part (this rules out pure ISM, specular cone- or pyramid- tracing, the hybrid method etc.): RTC handles diffuse reflection for order > 1 the same way as ray-tracing does i.e. for each reflection a random number [0,1[ is generated and if the number is less than the scattering coefficient, s, of the surface the ray direction is randomized according to Lambert's law (ideal diffuse reflection [Kuttruff]) otherwise the reflection is specular. As a necessary consequence of the frequency dependent diffuse reflections, an independent cone-tracing is performed for each octave-band, so when 10000 rays are selected, 8x10000 rays are actually traced. RTC handles diffuse reflection for order = 1 by creating a number of elementary sources on each diffusing surface (the density is governed by s(1-) giving hard diffusing surfaces the highest density). The radiated power is according to Lambert's law and is proportional to s(1-) where s is the frequency dependent scattering coefficient of the surface and the absorption coefficient. Similarly, any first-order and second-order specular reflections (handled by the ISM) are diminished by (1- s)(1- ). This procedure will generate a very great number of weak first-order diffuse reflections. a method that requires few settings (methods with different algorithms for the early and the late part often have settings about the early-late transition that may be very critical and that are difficult to select): RTC just requires the selection of the number of rays/cones to use and how long to trace them and even offers an automatic choice. a method that can handle open rooms: RTC detects the case of an open room and does then not use extrapolation (since the reflection growth is unknown in an open room). Good calculations for open rooms require more rays than for the average closed room but no fundamental method limitations exist. Calculations for open rooms also goes faster since all rays eventually escape. For very big open rooms, such as stadiums, the ISM can be used as an alternative for auralization. a method that can handle rooms with one or two dimensions very different from the third (this rules out many methods that rely on e.g. classical statistical tails): RTC requires the use of more rays for rooms with odd shapes than for the average closed room but no fundamental method limitations exist (it is quite natural that unusual cases require more rays). However, extremely disproportionate rooms (say with dimension ratios of 1:1:10 and worse) will be less well predicted. Since rooms like these are also less usual there is little feedback from measurements.

2-72

2. PREDICTION MODULE a method that can resolve under-balcony positions and similar: RTC requires the use of more rays (i.e. narrower cones) for good prediction of difficult positions such as under balconies but no fundamental method limitations exist (it is quite natural that under balcony positions require more rays because the shape is narrow). However, extremely convoluted rooms where the direct sound is not present, and where the first sound may not reach a receiver until after one or even more reflections, is unlikely to be predicted well since diffraction effects will be considerable. Since rooms like these are also less usual there is little feedback from measurements. a method that is robust and gives reasonable results also with fairly few rays: Since cone-tracing has an initially small receiver (or cone face) the likelihood for detection of a randomized ray is less than for ray-tracing (using a larger fixed-size receiver) giving a higher statistical variation from run to run. This is compensated for in the RTC by handling the very important first-order specular and diffuse reflections, as well as second order specular reflections, deterministically. Even with as few as 1000 rays, estimated parameters should not vary more between runs than the difference limen of each parameter unless the statistical properties are very special (although minor details in the early echogram for reflection order > 1 will differ from run to run). Since a stochastic process is involved it may be necessary to perform test runs for each new hall to determine the number of rays needed to give sufficiently repeatable results (this is no difference from other methods using a stochastic process). a method that can create echograms possible to use for auralization (this rules out direct use of standard ray-tracing since the reflection density is not naturally increasing with time, and specular cone-tracing since it creates unnatural late echoes when no diffusion is applied): RTC creates discrete reflections as were they created by the ISM and the reflection growth goes as time squared up to the end of the "early part" where reflections are beginning to become undetected. For numerical prediction, energy in the late part (the "tail") is corrected using extrapolation but details are not valid and would give an unnatural-sounding response. For binaural post-processing only, the late part is re-created by statistical generation of reflections (with the correct reflection density growth) using a simplified model of the room taking into account the room shape. The late part ray incidence distribution from the prediction is used for post-processing so that also the late part of the synthesized impulse response has some spatial properties from the actual model. Since the early part often is as long as 300-500 ms the details of the reverberation tail is not so important. If a longer early part is required more rays/cones have to be used which is only natural. This procedure means that late flutter echoes visible in predicted echograms will not be audible in auralization unless they are in the early part. A truthful auralization of the late part would require an extreme amount of rays so at the moment this is the only practical way of having both a natural-sounding late decay and a reasonably fast calculation. Hopefully, cases with late flutter echoes would not need to be auralized since it is so obvious from the echogram graphs that a good room acoustics has not been achieved. For flutter echo demonstration purposes a high order ISM can be used but then only to illustrate the phenomenon.

Automatic edge diffusion

Reflections falling within a quarter of a wavelength from an edge can optionally be considered not to give a valid specular reflection and the energy can instead be transferred to diffuse. This is controlled globally in the General settings dialog and locally by appending an asterisk "*" to the surface property name in a plane or sub-plane definition for those surfaces that are to give edge diffusion. Edge diffusion is typically applied to reflectors,

2-73

2. PREDICTION MODULE windows, cupboards, tables etc. that often are flat and smooth and only give significant diffusion if their size is small in relation to the wavelength. Example: [ 10 reflector / 1 2 12 11 / wood* ] The edge is assigned a scattering coefficient: sedge = 0.5 (50%).

The frequency dependence is implied by the frequency dependent edge width rather than the coefficient itself. For first order reflections edge diffusion is handled as an extra diffuse reflection from the edges so that specular reflections are multiplied by (1 - sedge) and diffuse reflections are multiplied by sedge. For orders > 1 in the RTC, as well as in ray-tracing (audience area mapping), the effective scattering coefficient will be seffective = ssurface + sedge Sedge/Ssurface Where ssurface Sedge Ssurface the normal surface scattering coefficient (if used) the area of an edge quarter of a wavelength wide the complete plane or sub-plane area.
Edge High freq. Low freq.

seffective is truncated if it exceeds 100%. This treatment of edge diffusion as an added surface diffusion for orders > 1, can be justified since diffuse reflection then is handled by randomized ray directions and exact impact points are no longer significant. For (too) small surfaces at low frequencies it might result in the whole surface being treated as an edge and they will function as diffusors. Actual edge scattering coefficients (i.e. sedge Sedge/Ssurface) are displayed in the PLINFO.PLT plot-file below the surface scattering coefficients.

Reverberant decay and reverberation time estimation

The reverberant decay is estimated from the RTC and by classical methods for reference. There are five measures of the reverberation time calculated: SabT, EyrT, EyrTg, T-15, T-30. The first is a classical Sabine RT, the second two are based on the Eyring formula [Cremer] while the last two are derived from the decays estimated by the RTC for each receiver. SabT is only valid for closed rooms and when surfaces are not overlapping each other (if they are, the total area calculation will be wrong and the covered absorption will be included). Also the volume calculation may be in error, see Fig. 2.5 2.8. EyrT is based on the mean free path calculated from all ray segments (i.e. not from 4V/S) and the mean absorption coefficient from the arithmetic mean of all absorption values encountered by the rays, AbsC. EyrTg is based on the mean free path as for EyrT but instead the classical area-weighted mean absorption coefficient is used, AbsCg (g stands for "geometric"). Just like SabT, EyrTg requires non-overlapping surfaces etc.

2-74

2. PREDICTION MODULE T-15 and T-30 are derived from straight-line least-square fits to receiver decay curves at the intervals -5 to -20 dB and -5 to -35 dB respectively (the regression lines are shown in the decay plot-files E_ss_rr_INT.PLT and in E_ss_rr_oct.PLT). T-30 is considered to be the best estimate of the reverberation time and is used for re-creating the late part in the post-processing module (if T-30 cannot be evaluated due to a too short echogram T-15 is used instead). The global T15 and T-30 values, as shown in RT_ss.PLT and PARAM_ss.TXT are calculated as an average for all receiver positions. In addition, Audience area mapping offers a special RT measure called RT that is derived from Ts assuming an exponential decay (RT' = 13.8 Ts ; calculated from Eq. 2.5-5 and 2.5-6) and relates well to EDT, see [Cremer]. To estimate a true T-30 for mapping would require an echogram to be recorded at each map point which in turn would mean many MB of data. RT' is often a good estimate of T-30 for positions far from the source. The sometimes large differences between SabT/EyrT and T-30 values are typically explained by a lack of diffuse reflection especially in simply-shaped halls with uneven absorption distribution (a low amount of "mixing" by the shape itself). A good example of this is a shoebox-shaped hall with an absorbing floor where, without diffusely reflecting walls, the reverberation time estimated by Sabine/Eyring and the actual one estimated by the RTC are very different (the ray-decay estimates a much longer RT). This phenomena has been thoroughly investigated in [Kuttruff-88]. The ray-tracing procedure used by Kuttruff is different from the one used in CATT-Acoustic but very similar results are obtained. Also in [Hodgson91] the need for including diffuse reflection in the calculations are emphasized. This behavior can be observed for the simple shoebox example in Section 1.2. Default diffusion (General settings) can be used to assign basic diffusion to surfaces that have not been assigned specific diffusion in the geometry-files. Note: this phenomenon is also present in real rooms, e.g. rectangular sports halls or factories where all surfaces but the ceiling have little absorption. For more details see Calculation recommendations (end of Section 2-5). Another reason why T-30 may be different from SabT/EyrT is if the ray truncation time has been set too short. It should always be set to the longest estimated RT or T-30 will be underestimated. In [ISO] it is said that at least 3/4 of the actual RT must be measured (i.e. down to -45 dB) for T-30 evaluation and it is beneficial to view the prediction as a virtual measurement.

Room acoustic parameters

Explanation of how the various room acoustic parameters (measures) are calculated.

Mean free path

The mean free path is calculated from all complete reflection paths with reflection order > 1.

Mean absorption coefficient

Mean absorption coefficient, AbsC, is calculated from the same reflection paths as the mean free path. AbsCg is calculated area-weighted in the classical way and assumes that surfaces are not overlapping. In a well built model, AbsC and AbsCg should be very close.

2-75

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Early/late energy-ratio based parameters

Early-to-late energy-ratio based parameters (or measures) such as Deutlichkeit (D-50), Clarity (C-80) etc. are calculated according to their respective definitions [Cremer,ISO].

Lateral measures LF and LFC

80 ms

LFC = 100

5ms

(t ) | cos( ) | dt (2.5-3)
2

80 ms

h
0

(t )dt

where reflection angle related to the ear to ear axis on an assumed listener looking towards the main source as defined by the head-direction in General settings. [ISO] states that the head-direction should be towards the source.
2

LF uses cos () instead. LFC is better correlated to the spatial impression but LF is easier to measure [Barron-81].

Strength (G)
G is the sound pressure level relative the free field sound pressure at 10 m from the source (assuming an omni-directional source with the same output power as the actual source):

2 2 G = 10 log p tot 10 log p 10

( )

( )

(2.5-4)

where p10 ptot sound pressure rms for the direct sound at 10 m distance in free field, Pa total sound pressure rms, Pa

Multiple source G estimates If more than one source is used (Audience area mapping or Multiple source addition), G is calculated as: G = 10 log where pI pi10 total rms pressure squared at a receiver or map point caused by source i rms pressure squared at 10 m in free field for an omni source with the same total output power as the real source i

p2 / p 210 = 10 log i i

10G i

10

2-76

2. PREDICTION MODULE Gi G for source i

G is not really defined other than for a single source but better to include something reasonable than not to show a requested plot. One can say that G for multiple sources normalizes so that the level is independent of individual source power, as if all sources were identical.

Early Decay-Time (EDT)

EDT is the decay time evaluated from 0 to -10 dB on the backward integrated echogram. Due to difficulties of doing a least square fit to the sometimes not very linear early backward integrated curve this procedure, as suggested in draft standards for measurements, has its problems (especially with a very strong direct sound). The best way to determine EDT remains to be defined, see e.g. [Bradley-96].

RASTI
RApid Speech Transition Index is calculated from the echogram according to the procedures described in [Houtgast-80] and [Jacobsen-86]. Background noise levels can be specified in the General settings/Acoustic environment dialog. Rather than using generic speech levels for the 500 Hz and 2 kHz octave-bands (with a 9 dB difference), the actual levels set by Lp1m in the source-file are used. It is the user's own responsibility to set these to appropriate levels. Predefined constants or Lp_voice shortcuts can be used for this purpose, see source-file syntax section 2.3.

STIuser
Speech Transition Index is like RASTI calculated from the echogram. Original STI is based on 14 modulation frequencies (0.63 - 12.5 Hz) and the octave-bands 125 - 8k Hz but fewer bands and/or different weights can be selected by the user in Preferences. One available option is to use "STI modified" based on the Articulation Index (AI) weights from French & Steinberg (AI is a predecessor to STI but took into account only the S/N ratio in each band and no modulation, see [Steeneken-67]. It appears that MLSSA [MLSSA] is the only measurement system where these weights are used as an option. Background noise levels can be specified in General settings/Acoustic environment. Rather than using generic speech levels, the actual levels set by Lp1m in the source-file are used. It is the user's own responsibility to set these to appropriate speech levels. Predefined constants or Lp_voice shortcuts can be used for this purpose, see source-file.

Normalized values
It can sometimes be useful to compare estimated (or measured) parameters to values expected from an exponential decay calculated from the reverberation time [Cremer, p434]. It is simply a matter of using a pure exponential function in the integrals involved:
E (t ) = E 0e t

(2.5-5) (2.5-6)

=
where T

13.816 T

reverberation time, s

2-77

2. PREDICTION MODULE The values thus obtained do, however, not take into account the direct sound and can only work far away from the source where the reverberant field dominates. Barron and Lee therefore developed a new, but still simple, theory for expected values in concert halls [Barron-88]. Theoretical calculations where compared with measurements in 15 different concert halls. The new theory matched measured values much better. The formulas used were: For the direct sound:
2 p dir =

W Z0 4r 2

(2.5-7)

where W Z0 r total output power of the source, W directivity factor (not included originally) wave impedance in air, kg s /m
2

distance from source to receiver, m.

For the subsequent decay: p 2 (t ) = r c0 4 W Z 0 e -t e - A (2.5-8)

=
where A

(2.5-9)

absorption area, m Sabine

The directivity factor was not originally included in the theory as the measurements were performed using an omni-directional source, but with computerized prediction also the directivity can be taken into account. The normalization can be switched on in the Full detailed calculation dialog. The parameters G, D-50, C-80, and SPL will then have a line each (in E_ss_rr.TXT and PARAM_ss.TXT) where the expected values have been subtracted. A positive value means that the predicted value is higher than the expected. A plot-file (NTREND_ss.PLT) similar to TREND_ss.PLT is also created if Normalized trend is selected.

Echogram calculation
All echograms presented begin at the arrival of the direct sound (marked by a small ring on echogram graphs if the source is visible from the receiver). For receivers where the source is invisible due to blocking walls or balconies, the echogram and thereby parameter calculations still starts at the time the direct sound would have arrived had the source been visible. Note that most parameters loose their meaning if the direct sound is not present and predictions become less accurate. Echogram graphs Echogram graphs come in a variety of forms.

2-78

2. PREDICTION MODULE A forward integrated echogram approximates: F (t ) = h 2 ( )d

0

(2.5-10)

where h (t)
2

impulse response squared, Pa

Shown in E_ss_rr_oct.PLT (Full detailed calculation) and in I_ss_rr_oct.PLT (Early part detailed ISM, option). A backward integrated echogram approximates:

B(t ) = h 2 ( )d
t

(2.5-11)

Shown in E_ss_rr_oct.PLT, E_ss_rr_INT.PLT (Full detailed calculation) and in I_ss_rr_oct.PLT (Early part detailed ISM, option). The crossing of the forward and backward integrated curve will be an estimate of "Rise time" as defined by W.J. Jordan [Cremer, p 433]. Although the time-constant of the ear is not easily defined, it is often useful to view echograms convolved or smoothed with some kind of filter function, e.g. exponential (lowpass), so that the effects of reflection gaps and/or many reflections arriving close in time can be studied in the echogram:
M (t ) = h 2 (t ) G (t )

(2.5-12)

where G(t) filter-function (exponential/triangular/rectangular) convolution symbol

Shown in E_ss_rr_oct.PLT (Full detailed calculation, filter-type/time-constant option). By using a linear scale of Sone and also taking the ear integration into account, a function more like how the ear hears it can be plotted. The function used for impulse sound is the square root of h. See [Cremer, pp 456-464] and [Cremer-89]. The ear-simulated echogram approximates:

S(t ) =

h t

( ) e

-(t - )/

1/ 4

(2.5-13)

where S(t) ear-simulated function, Sone ear integration time constant, s

Shown in I_ss_rr_oct.PLT (Early part detailed ISM, option).

2-79

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Directivity handling
The source directivity handling depends on the type of directivity selected. For the types SD0 and SD1 the application is straightforward since they both have the value at the source axis as the reference (set to 0 dB). For the SD2 type however, based on the DLL Directivity Interface (DDI), a particular model may have a distance dependent directivity (typically arrays). With SD2, the direct sound and first order reflections are taking into account the distance dependence while for higher order reflections the far-field directivity is used. For details on the various directivity formats, turn to the Directivity Module section 4. A note on arrays: If the physical dimensions of an array modeled in a DDI interface is considerable, there is a risk of errors since the rays etc. originate from only one point in the prediction (the acoustical center of the source; the reference point for an array) but with the directivity of the full array. Consider the two examples below in Fig. 2.11 and 2.12. In these cases the array will in reality not give the predicted directivity at the receiver because some transducers may be blocked (for higher order reflections it is further complicated). However, an array is seldom placed so that its direct sound is screened and with a long array is also associated a strong directivity meaning that the direct sound will dominate so this error is likely to be of limited importance. The ability to model the distance dependent directivity would be of far greater importance than any errors of this kind.

Actual array receiver

SD2 source

Fig. 2.11 Direct sound from SD2 arrays: some direct element paths are cut off.

2-80

2. PREDICTION MODULE

Image array

Wall A

Actual array receiver Wall B

Image array

Fig. 2.12 Reflected sound from SD2 arrays: some reflected element paths are cut off.

Calculation recommendations
Audience area mapping
At least the number of rays estimated by the Auto number setting. If warnings are on (File|Preferences) a warning will be given if the selected number of rays is less than half of what would have been estimated by the Auto number setting. A ray truncation time corresponding about -30 dB (50% of the RT).

Early part detailed ISM

No definite guidelines can be given here since it depends on what type of information is wanted. For example, to check for potential late strong echoes a long truncation time should be used but orders higher than 3 would in practice be diffused and would seldom cause echoes.

Full detailed calculation

At least the number of rays estimated by the Auto number setting. If warnings are on (File|Preferences) a warning will be given if the selected number of rays is less than half of what would have been estimated by the Auto number setting. A ray truncation time corresponding about -60 dB (100% of the RT).

Diffuse reflection
Diffuse reflection heavily influences the RT estimate and many other parameters. It is very important to give reasonable estimates for the coefficients.

2-81

2. PREDICTION MODULE a minimum of 20% default diffusion is recommended for average-size flat smooth surfaces (10% for big flat smooth surfaces) 30 to 80% for the audience (30% for 125 Hz and increasing up to 80% at 4 kHz). for rough surfaces a high value (80%) should be assigned where the roughness scale is of the order of the wavelength (i.e. if the roughness is about 3 dm the 1 kHz diffusion should be set high). If in doubt, it is better to assign too high than too low scattering coefficients. automatic edge diffusion can be applied to reflectors, windows, cupboards, tables etc. that often are flat and smooth and only give diffusion if their size is small in relation to the wavelength. with the advent of an ISO standard for measuring scattering coefficients guidelines [ISOscatt] measurements will gradually be available but in the majority of rooms most scattering coefficients will have to be estimated.

2.6 Tips and Tricks

This section contains a number of recommendations and examples on how to get the most out of CATT-Acoustic. Work in steps - first build the main parts of the hall then the details. View the geometry as often as possible between changes. Dont add too much new geometry between viewing. Use constants (LOCAL, GLOBAL) - it is much easier to make changes. Use constants especially where you suspect changes. It might seem to be a great effort to plan the use of constants and to do other structuring of the geometry but this initial effort almost always pays off in the long run. If one corner's z-value (for example) always has the same z-value as another corner use the z() function (or x(), y() for x,y-values):
10 -3 ... 20 -7 5 12 12.5 z(10)

This signals that corner 20 does not just happen to have the same z as corner 10 but it is always the same z and should automatically follow any changes in corner 10. This makes the model both simpler to build, change and interpret. Use the lock() tool whenever possible, typically for slanted floors or ceilings but also for walls. The x(), y(), z() functions can be used to create a copy of a part of the model, which then can be treated as an object and be "lifted off". The COPY function can be used to create multiple identical reflectors. As the structure of the reflector is defined in one file only, the structure can, initially, be made very simple (typically rectangular) for rough tests and then, towards the final calculation, be changed to a more realistic shape. If the coadd and pladd values, from start, are chosen to accommodate for the realistic shape, all that is needed is to create the shape (around the same origin) and the result will be instant multiple realistically-shaped reflectors. The possibility to define one surface property to equal another (ABS name1 = name2) can be used for fast and secure absorption changes. If e.g. all parts of the ceiling that will

2-82

2. PREDICTION MODULE have the same absorption are assigned e.g. ceilingabs, then ceilingabs can be defined as e.g. wood and when changed to e.g. plaster all ceiling parts will change absorption. This works in a similar manner to "styles" in a word-processor. With symmetrical designs where the MIRROR directive can be used, add the ceiling and other bridging planes as single planes instead of utilizing the mirroring to avoid potentially dangerous edges in the middle of the ceiling. Since the mirror function creates all corners it is just a matter of defining the plane and it can be defined in the same file since planes bridging over from the negative x side to the positive x side are not mirrored. If all parts are mirrored more planes are generated which increases the calculation time and also makes wire-frame plots harder to interpret. INCLUDE GEO-files - especially for parts of the hall you would like to compare with and without. It is also possible to include alternative versions of e.g. ceiling reflectors and compare them without having to make a complete new version of the hall. Use constructs like:
GLOBAL highbalcony = TRUE IF highbalcony THEN INCLUDE highbalc.GEO ENDIF IF -highbalcony THEN INCLUDE lowbalc.GEO ENDIF

Use a subset of planes (General settings/(Plane use)) or disable INCLUDEs by turning them into comments when you build the model. This makes geometry plots and the debug-file easier to interpret as you can view/check parts instead of the whole hall. With a symmetrical hall and use of the MIRROR directive, all mirrored planes can be switched off while building the model: if planes are mirrored by 500, switch off all planes e.g. 501-999. This is better than to temporarily comment out the MIRROR directive since also nonmirrored planes, such as floors bridging from -x to +x, will be included in the design and plots, assuming they have plane ids 500). Always define reflectors as objects. They are always separate from the main geometry and are usually moved and rotated. Leave the work of calculating the corner coordinates to the computer! If corners coordinates actually are needed - generate a debug file and read the corresponding values from the corner list. If multiple identical reflectors are intended the COPY directive will simplify the job. Simulate audience areas by a plane at about shoulder height (about 0.8 m) having the normal pointing up. The audience should be "walled-in" by planes and the floor below should not be modeled, but if they are not (see Fig. 2.8), possibly for simpler runs for early reflections or direct sound mapping, the back-side of the audience plane must also be defined and assigned the pre-defined absorption TOTABS. The reason for this is that this plane will then catch some impossible rays running under the audience. The audience should typically have a high degree of diffusing properties assigned to it (30 to 80% ascending from 125 Hz to 4kHz). If the hall has audience areas the lock() tool can be used to set the receiver positions at an exact height over the audience plane. First, create three help corners at a fixed height above three audience plane corners. Then lock() the z-coordinate of all receiver positions to a plane defined by these three corners. Typically use the "sum" or "1k" for octave-band plot-file output. Only select all bands if you really want a detailed check (e.g. for a certain receiver position) or a lot of plot-files will be generated. If all plot-file options are used together with many receivers and all octave-bands several hundreds of plot-files may be created! This may seem strange but CATT-Acoustic is built to give the possibility of a lot of information - but if you don't want/need it you don't have to request it - at least not for all receivers!

2-83

2. PREDICTION MODULE Reminders about the source spectrum: If a "white spectrum" on the source axis is desired the values should increase by 3 dB/octave (or use the predefined Lp_white). The octave-band sum value of the acoustic parameters, D-50 etc., RASTI and STIuser are affected by the source spectrum as are multiple source additions. If a comparison between measurements and calculations in a certain hall is desired and octave-band values cannot be extracted from the measurements, be sure to match source spectrum to the actual source or the comparison may be meaningless. To create a soffit-mounted source the source position must not be placed exactly inside a wall but slightly in front of it and an absorbing patch must be placed behind it on the wall. Soffit-mounted sources are difficult to handle since the directivity of a source when placed in a large baffle changes from that of the free source. If a directivity measured in a large baffle is not available a free-field directivity must be used with great caution. To check for occurrence of late low-order reflections, that might cause echoes, do a lower-order run with specular order 2-3, a long early part truncation time. The history plotfile (H_ss_rr_oct.PLT) will give the echo information. Avoid placing both source and receivers exactly on the symmetry-line of a model. Same goes for measurements since it may introduce interference effects.

2-84

2. PREDICTION MODULE

2.7 Trouble-shooting
This section lists probable causes to Prediction module errors.

Geometrical errors
The program performs extensive checking on the consistency of the geometrical model. In spite of this checking, some geometrical errors might be so severe that the program crashes and even, occasionally, dead-locks the computer. Such errors will typically occur while the program is calculating plane information. Below are some probable causes listed: you have happened to "cross" a plane by a mistake in the entering order of the plane corns (an example: what was intended to be a rectangular plane has been entered as a "bow tie"). See Fig. 2.10.
1 2 1 2

3 correct / 1 2 3 4 /

4 wrong / 1 4 2 3 /

Fig. 2.10 Plane corner entering order error you have happened to make an edge of e.g. a reflector cut another plane. You should not put a corner of a plane in the "middle" of another plane without using that corner in the definition of both planes (see Fig. 2.4). By using immediate debug (Geometry view/check dialog) errors of this kind will be trapped while building the model. you have happened to make an error in a corner coordinate causing one or some of the corners to be "out of the plane" when a plane equation is built from three of the corners. By using immediate debug (Geometry view/check dialog) large errors of this kind will be trapped while building the model but smaller will pass and can cause an error. the DEBUG.TXT file (Geometry view/check dialog) will always list all corners even for planes not used and you can check if there is an error in coordinate values or entering order. when using SCALE together with external coordinates (defined in another GEO-file) by using e.g. x(), a value may be scaled twice if the coordinate was scaled in the file it was defined in too. In such cases use e.g. x(120)/s, if 120 is a corner defined in another file with a global x scale-factor of s, to inhibit the extra scaling.

The problem plane id is often listed in the left status bar when an error occurs but it depends on the error. One way to find a problem plane is to insert a RETURN statement in a PLANES section and gradually move it down until the error occurs, thus identifying the problem plane. For most efficient search, use a binary search technique so that the return statement is first put in the middle of the PLANES section, thus identifying if the problem is in the first or last half of the planes defined, and then moved to the middle of the problem half etc. However, best is to not add too many planes before viewing the model.

2-85

2. PREDICTION MODULE Geometrical errors will confuse the algorithms and will result in calculation errors. There is no way of knowing for sure if the error will be of great importance or not - the geometry should be as accurate as reasonably possible. *** Even if a model is simple it should be correct! ***

Audience area mapping problems

If boxes are placed on top of a floor, defined as an audience plane, and with a big Map step it may look like positions inside the box are hit. This is simply because some part of the receiver spheres are outside of the box.

Early part calculation problems

-

Full detailed calculation problems

If you obtain strange results or numerical errors one probable cause is that you have created an acoustically impossible or unreasonable model e.g. by using the predefined absorption TOTABS carelessly or defined another absorption property that has 99.9% absorption for all or some octaves. By using such non-realistic absorption values, the early part might be possible to interpret but the late part will be very strange since rays encountering a totally absorbing surface will be truncated. If you want to test a "very high absorption" use 95-99% instead. The 100% absorption is reserved for special purposes such as under the audience surface as described in section 2.6 but is best avoided. Note that measured absorption giving 100% (or even more) is due to a limitation in the measurement method where a very high absorption destroys the diffuse field (that is assumed when deriving the coefficients). A small example illustrating the danger of using totally absorbing surfaces: Consider one reflection on a 99% absorber followed by 5 successive reflections on a 25% absorber. The reflection is then attenuated by a factor (1-0.99)(1-0.25)5 = 0.0024. If there instead 6 were 6 successive reflections on the same type of absorber it would correspond to (1-) = 0.0024 = 0.63 i.e. not an absorber that would be approximated by total absorption. If TOTABS were used instead of 99% the ray would be truncated while with 99% there is a chance that the high absorption of one surface is compensated for by several subsequent hits on hard surfaces. If reverberation decay curves become very non-linear (E_s_rr_oct.PLT and E_ss_rr_INT.PLT) and thereby T-30 very different from T-15 and EyrT the most probable causes are a lack of diffuse reflection or that you have created a model with TOTABS planes or that contains holes, see Prediction Theory. In both types of output textfiles (E_ss_rr.TXT and PARAM_ss.TXT) and in the reverberation time overview plot-file (RT_ss.PLT) the number of rays lost and/or absorbed as compared to the number of rays sent out can be seen. If more then 10% are lost a warning is given. Lost rays are caused by holes in the model, inaccurate planes and by the finite numerical accuracy. Absorbed rays are caused by use of the predefined TOTABS absorption.

2-86

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

The Surface properties module manages an absorption/scattering coefficient library contained in the Surface properties library file as selected in Preferences. The library files (*.DAT in the CATT- folder ABSLIBS) are in a private binary format but text-file import/export is provided. The library file is implemented with variable-length records so it is only the records that actually use long descriptions and/or references that occupy space in the library which means a flexible but compact format. This module can also create a new empty library or a copy of an existing library that then can be extended. Absorption/diffusion properties declared in the library will be known in every GEO-file. In addition to using the library, properties can be defined directly in a GEO-file and an attempt to re-declare a property will be trapped, see the ABS directive, Section 2.3. Note that properties with no diffusion defined may still be assigned a default diffusion by selecting Prediction:General settings/Surface default. It is also possible to complement an absorption-only library property with scattering coefficients in the GEO-file using the ABS directive. For predictions to be made, the Surface properties module does not have to be open, but they will run a fraction faster since the library-file does not have to be loaded each time. Keeping the module open does, of course, consume more memory.

3.1 Menus
File|Save library Saves the current library to disk. Before saving, the current version on disk is backed up to a file with the same name but with extension .~DA. File|Import|CATT Exchange TXT... Imports an absorption/diffusion properties library in the extended text format intended for library exchange and updates. The syntax is the same as used for the GEO-file directive (ABS) in section 2.3 except that the ABS keyword is left out and that three extra mandatory fields per record are added. If a key name already exists it may, at import, either replace the current one or be skipped. The file has the format:
absname = <125... 4k [: 8k 16k]> m <s125...s4k [: s8k s16k]> [m_data] [{R G B}]
C: category D: description R: reference ...

Where the scattering coefficient part, 8k and 16k values and the RGB color are optional. The C:, D: and R: fields may be empty but the field labels must be present. Property names can be in mixed case but will always be converted to uppercase. CATT-Edit can create an empty record template if some values are entered manually.

3-1

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

If a category does not exist it will be created and if no category is specified, category "None" is assigned. Comments are introduced by ";" and blank lines are allowed Example exchange-file with three properties:
CONCRETE = < 1 1 1 2 3 4 > C: walls D: painted R: Building research data HARDWOOD = < 12 10 8 7 6 5 > {200 100 0} C: walls D: 15 mm thick R: estimated values DIFFUSOR_1 = <12 10 10 10 10 10> L <30 40 50 60 70 80 > C:diffusors D:hand-made in wood R:estimated values

File|Import |CATT v5.0 TXT... Imports a text-file in the older CATT-Acoustic v5.0 for DOS absorption library format. The syntax is the same as used for the GEO-file directive (ABS) in section 2.3 except that the ABS keyword is left out. The category will be "None" and description/reference fields will be empty. If a key name already exists it may, at import, either replace the current one or be skipped. A better alternative than to import an old-format file directly, is to first load the old library into CATT-Edit or another suitable editor, convert all comments etc. to the Windows ANSI character set, and then transform comments to be descriptions or references as appropriate. CATT-Edit can also assist with a new-format template. The new file format can then be imported as CATT exchange text, see below where also the format is described. The file has the format: absname = <125...4k> m <s125...s4k> m_data ... Where the scattering coefficient part is optional. Comments introduced by ";" and blank lines are allowed. Example file with three properties:
CONCRETE = < 1 1 1 2 3 4 > HARDWOOD = < 5 5 7 7 7 8 > DIFFUSOR_1 = <12 10 10 10 10 10> L <30 40 50 60 70 80 >

File|Export CATT Exchange TXT Exports the properties library in the extended text format, see above. This is intended for library data exchange and updates, and possibly manual editing since it is sometimes faster to work directly in a text editor. Edit|Copy Key to Clipboard Places the property name (e.g. "WOOD") on the Clipboard so that it can be pasted into a GEO-file. This is the same as double-clicking on a property name in the list except that an open Prediction:Interactive Sabine dialog will not be updated with the new property. Note that an absorption-only property (say "WOOD") can be complemented by scattering

3-2

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

coefficients when used in a GEO-file: ABS MyWOOD = WOOD L <5 10 15 20 25 30> if the actual wood construction is not flat. Edit|Copy Definition to Clipboard Places the complete property definition (e.g. "ABS WOOD = <12 10 8 7 6 5>") on the Clipboard so that it can be pasted into a GEO-file and be renamed and edited e.g. to "ABS MYWOOD = <12 10 8 7 6 5> L <10 20 30 30 20 20>". Utilities|Create a New Library As... Creates a new generic library that can be selected in Preferences and be filled in with more properties. Utilities|Save Copy of Library As... Creates a new library as a copy of the current one. The new library can be selected in Preferences and be filled in with more properties. Category|New... Creates a new category.

Category|Remove... / Category|Rename... Displays a list of all current categories and the selected one can be removed/renamed. All properties in the removed category will be assigned the category "None".

Options|Sort Order... Sorts the entries according to various criteria.

3-3

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

Key, Category, Reference Sorts alphabetically according to Windows ANSI character set. 125/250 Alpha , 500/1k Alpha, 2k/4k Alpha Sorts according to the type of absorber. The sorting function used is:

( (f ) + (f )) / (f )
2 1 2 i i

where f1 = 125 and f2 = 250 for 125/250 Alpha etc. This means that with e.g. 125/250 Alpha a dedicated low-frequency absorber is sorted before a wide-band absorber with the same values at f1 and f2. 125-4k Alpha Sorts according to average absorption coefficient (125 4k Hz). 125-4k Diffusion Sorts according to average total scattering coefficient (125 4k Hz). For all sorting options entries are sub-sorted after Key.

3-4

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

3.2 Dialogs
The main dialog displays a scrollable list-box showing all defined properties. When a property is selected the graphs and other related information about the property is updated.

List Lists all defined properties according to the Options|Sort Order menu. The current sort order is displayed in the module window title. Search key The key or name of the property. This key is the name that is used in GEO-files. To use a property in a GEO-file without having to type it in, either double-click the property in the listbox or press Enter when it is selected. The property name is then transferred to the clipboard and can be pasted into a GEO-file using the CATT-Edit Edit|Paste menu. A similar procedure can be used when assigning surface properties in the AutoCAD interface. Property key names are always converted to upper-case and may consist of a maximum of 15 characters being A-Z, _, 0-9, and native language characters. A key must always start with a letter. Category A property category e.g. Walls, Windows, Audience etc. See the Category menu for adding, removing and renaming categories. Description A description of the selected property such as 13 mm plaster-board on studs etc.

3-5

3. SURFACE PROPERTIES MODULE

Color A color assigned to the property. Reference Source of the data. This is an important information since properties are of limited value if it is not known how they are measured. Add/Update Updates (if already present) or adds to the list if a new Search key has been entered. A property can be changed either by entering values in % in the edit-controls below the graphs or by direct manipulation of the small handles attached to the curves. If diffusion model is selected as "None", the scattering coefficients still remain in the record so when turned back to Lambert they appear as before. There is no special "New property" button. To add a new property simply change the key and the coefficients as required and select the Add/Update button. If the key name already exists you will be prompted for the action to take. In this manner it is very handy to add several properties from the same source since the reference field needs to be filled in only once.

3-6

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE
The source Directivity module allows graphical and numerical editing of source directivity library-files (*.SD0, *.SD1 and *.SD2 in the CATT-folder SD). The directivity key-name (i.e. the file-name including extension) is entered in a source-file at prediction. "OMNI" is a predefined natural omni-directional source and need not have a directivity-file. Three formats are available, a 15 interpolated format (SD0), a 10 full-space measured format (SD1) and a general format capable of very high resolution and distance dependence based on a DLL Directivity Interface, DDI (SD2).

4.1 Menus
File|Open From Collection... Displays a dialog where directivities from defined collections can be selected. A collection is a list of directivities and does not contain the directivity files themselves.

Help (Collection)

Select from collections

Displays collection-specific help if available (HLP, PDF, HTM or TXT) File|Edit Collections... Displays a dialog where directivity collections can be created and edited. Typical use of collections is to group directivities into manufacturer groups but a user can also make his own collections of often used or "favorite" directivities.

4-1

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

New (Collection) Creates a new collection (stored as .COL files in CATT-folder SD). Delete (Collection)

Edit collections

Edit collections

Deletes the selected collection. Note: the directivity files themselves are not deleted, only the collection. Help (Collection) Display collection-specific help if available (HLP, PDF, HTM or TXT). SD0/SD1/SD2... (Directivity) Adds a new directivity to the currently selected collection. Remove (Collection) Edit collections Edit collections Edit collections

Removes a directivity from the currently selected collection. Note: the directivity file itself is not deleted, only the reference to it in the collection. File|New Directivity|15 format (SD0) Creates new generic data for the 15 interpolated format. File|New Directivity|10 format (SD1) Creates new generic data for the 10 full-space format. File|New Directivity|DLL-format (SD2) Creates new default data for the DLL-interface format. Displays a dialog listing all installed Brand DLLs and the models they implement.

Each brand DLL is installed in a CATT-folder SD2DATA sub-folder with the same name as the DLL itself and will be automatically recognized. Optional dedicated help is included. Example for the CATT_Generic module:

4-2

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

CATT-folder SD2DATA (folder) CATT_Generic (folder) CATT_Generic.DLL CATT_Generic.HLP

File|Open Directivity|15 format (SD0)... Opens a 15 interpolated format directivity file from the CATT-folder SD. File|Open Directivity|15 format (SD1)... Opens a 10 full-space format directivity file from the CATT-folder SD. File|Open Directivity|DLL- format (SD2)... Opens a DLL-interface format file from the CATT-folder SD. An SD2-file is normally only edited via the interface but it is in text-format and can be loaded into an editor for more efficient editing of e.g. complex array definitions: Syntax (keywords in BOLD, values in italic, explanations in plain text, [ ] items are optional): CATT-SD2 Version = file-version Model = model-name Accuracy = level Description = description Visuals = none|extents|marker (version 1 only) Brand = dll-name DLLversion = dll-version lines of optional model dependent data CATT-SD2 Version Model Accuracy a file-type tag a file-format version number, 0 for v7.1 and v7.2, 1 for v8.0 a model name as defined in the DLL help. some models may have optional accuracy levels (see DLL help). If not this value should be 1. a descriptive name of the source for version 1 only: If marker then the DLL returns marker-files for all array elements. name of the DLL (without .DLL) that handles the model. An SD2 DLL is placed in the CATT-folder SD2DATA sub-folder with the same name as the DLL (assuming that Brand = BrandX, the DLL will be CATTfolder\SD2DATA\BrandX\BrandX.DLL). the optional model-dependent data assumes a DLL with this version.

Description Visuals

Brand

DLLversion

lines of optional model dependent data any number of lines of data that each DLL knows how to interpret.

4-3

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

The model-dependent optional data can be edited via the SD2 dialog but for some models it may be more efficient to use an editor to edit the SD2-file directly. An SD2-file has optional dedicated help on each model implemented (Help button in the SD2 dialog). An example:
CATT-SD2 VERSION = 0 MODEL = Intellivox-2c ACCURACY = 1 DESCRIPTION = Duran column array BRAND = Duran_CATT DLLVERSION = 0 AZIMUTH = 0 FOCUSDISTANCE = 40 OPENINGANGLE=8

File|Save Directivity Saves the directivity to the current file. File|Save Directivity As... Saves the directivity to a new file of the same type. The name can have max. 15 characters. File|Import Directivity|CATT-SD0 TXT... Imports the 15 interpolated format. In the SD0 text-format the source directivity is entered as polar measurements for horizontal and vertical directivity-values for each of the six octave bands 125Hz to 4kHz, see Fig. 4.1. Keywords are case-insensitive, blank lines and comments allowed (introduced by semicolon). Syntax (keywords in BOLD, values in italic, explanations in plain text, [] items are optional):
15 horizontal front 0 vertical front 15 0

90

left

right

270

90

top

bottom

270

back 180

Top view

back 180

Side view

Fig. 4.1 15 source directivity angle convention (SD0).

CATT-SD0 Version Description OctaveBands

=n = loudspeaker name = <[125] [250] [500]

[1k]

[2k]

[4k]

[8k]

[16k]>

If electro-acoustic source: Sensitivity = <[S125Hz] [S250Hz]

[S8kHz] [S16kHz]>

4-4

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

If natural source: NomSPL_at_1m = <[N125Hz] [N250Hz]

[N8kHz] [N16kHz]>

MaxSPL_at_1m = <[M125Hz] [M250Hz] [M8kHz] [M16kHz]> Extents = xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax [125 polar data for 125 Hz] [250 polar data for 250 Hz] [500 polar data for 500 Hz] [1k polar data for 1kHz] [2k polar data for 2kHz] [4k polar data for 4kHz] [8k polar data for 8kHz] [16k polar data for 16kHz] CATT-SD0 Version Description a file-type tag a file-format version number, 1 for v7.2, 2 for v8.0 a descriptive name of the source e.g. manufacturer model (max 30 characters). defines which of the octave-bands 125 to 16k (version 1 only 125 to 4k) that are measured (in the order of increasing center frequency). The octaves not measured are extrapolated. source sensitivity i.e. the SPL at 1 m distance on the axis for 1 W electrical input. Only values for the OctaveBands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). Used for electro-acoustic sources instead of NomSPL_at_1m. nominal SPL at 1 m distance on the axis. Only values for the OctaveBands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). Used for natural sources instead of Sensitivity. max. SPL at 1 m distance on the axis. Only values for the OctaveBands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). (for Version >= 1) lists the min-max 3D-extents of a rectangular box surrounding the source. The origin is the acoustic center. The x-axis is forward along the source axis, the y-axis is right to left as viewed from the source, the z-axis is upwards. Note that v8 also allows actual source 3D visuals.

OctaveBands

Sensitivity

NomSPL_at_1m

MaxSPL_at_1m

Extents

For all OctaveBands polar data for every 15th degree is given. H125Hz,0 ... H125Hz,180 sym or H125Hz,0 ... H125Hz,345

4-5

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

V125Hz,0 ... V125Hz,180 sym or V125Hz,0 ... V125Hz,345 where Hb,a horizontal directivity in dB ( -15dB, 50dB) in relation to (0,0) for octaveband b and angle a for every 15th degree. Vb,a vertical directivity in dB ( -15dB, 50dB) in relation to (0,0) for octave-band b and angle a for every 15th degree. sym can be entered instead of the remaining values if the directivity is symmetrical The amount of attenuation is in dB relative the on-axis value that should be zero (if the first on-axis value for each band is non-zero the value is subtracted from all sub-sequent values for that band). The resulting numbers must lay in the range -15 to 50 dB. The sign is reversed only not to have to enter a lot of minus-signs. Hb,180 and Vb,180 must have the same value. Data is specified comma, space or TAB delimited and decimal point must always be used independent of language settings. Sample SD0 TXT-file:
CATT-SD0 Version = 2 Description = none OctaveBands = < 125 250 500 1k 2k> ;Note: no 4k 8k or 16k values Sensitivity = < 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0> ;electro-acoustic source MaxSPL_at_1m = < 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0> Extents = -0.2 0.1 -0.1 0.2 -0.2 0.3 ; >= version 1 125 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 1.5 2.5 4.5 6.5 8.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 6.5 4.5 2.5 1.5 0.5 0 0 0 250 0 0 0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 sym 500 0 0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 sym 0 1.0 2.5 3.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 sym 1k 0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 sym 0 0.5 1.5 3.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 sym 2k 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 sym 0 1.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 sym

Note that a file must be correct or it will not import. File|Import Directivity|CATT-SD1 TXT Imports the 10 measured full-space format (*.TXT), see Fig. 4.2. The SD1 text-format is made flexible so that the row order is selectable. Keywords are case-insensitive, blank lines and comments allowed (introduced by ";"). Syntax (keywords in BOLD, values in italic, explanations in plain text, [] items are optional):

4-6

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

top

10

0 top

rot direction 180 170

right

left

90

left

right

270

front (on-axis) 0

10

arc direction

bottom bottom 180

Back view

Fig. 4.2 10 source directivity angle convention (SD1).

CATT-SD1 Version Description RotGroups OctaveBands

=n = loudspeaker name = from - to [, from - to ...] [2k] = <[125] [250] [500] [1k]

[4k]

[8k]

[16k]>

If electro-acoustic source: Sensitivity = <[S125Hz] [S250Hz] If natural source: NomSPL_at_1m = <[N125Hz] [N250Hz]

[S8kHz] [S16kHz]>

[N8kHz] [N16kHz]>

MaxSPL_at_1m = <[M125Hz] [M250Hz] [M8kHz] [M16kHz]> Extents = xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax [125 matrix for 125 Hz] [250 matrix for 250 Hz] [500 matrix for 500 Hz] [1k matrix for 1 kHz] [2k matrix for 2 kHz] [4k matrix for 4 kHz] [8k matrix for 8 kHz] [16k matrix for 16 kHz] CATT-SD1 Version Description a file-type tag a file-format version number, 1 for v7.2, 2 for v8.0 a descriptive name of the source e.g. manufacturer model (max 30 characters).

4-7

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

RotGroups

defines how the groups of source rotation data is stored in the file. Angle convention according to Fig. 4.2 is used but an imported file may have another convention. This field describes the convention used in the imported file in terms of the convention used in CATT-Acoustic. Arcs for rotation values not stored in the file are created assuming symmetry. If the data to be imported assumes full symmetry the possible values are: RotGroups = 0-90 RotGroups = 90-0 and 100-180 is created as a vertical mirror copy of 80-0 and then 190-350 is created as a horizontal mirror copy of 170-10. If the data to be imported assumes horizontal symmetry some possible values are: RotGroups RotGroups RotGroups RotGroups RotGroups = 0-180 = 180-0 = 0-90,180-100 = 90-0,180-100 = 90-0,100-180

and 190-350 is then created as a horizontal mirror copy of 170-10. If the data to be imported assumes no symmetry at all, many combinations are possible, e.g. RotGroups RotGroups RotGroups RotGroups OctaveBands = 0-350 = 350-0 = 0-180,350-190 = 90-0,180-100,270-190,350-280

defines which of the octave-bands 125 to 16k (version 1 only 125 to 4k) that are measured (in the order of increasing center frequency). The octaves not measured are extrapolated. source sensitivity i.e. the SPL at 1 m distance on the axis for 1 W electrical input. Only values for the OctaveBands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). Used for electro-acoustic sources instead of NomSPL_at_1m. nominal SPL at 1 m distance on the axis. Only values for the OctaveBands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). Used for natural sources instead of Sensitivity. Max. SPL at 1 m distance on the axis. Only values for the octave-bands included are specified (in the order of increasing center frequency). (for Version >= 1) lists the min-max 3D-extents of a rectangular box surrounding the source. The origin is the acoustic center. The x-axis is forward along the source axis, the y-axis is right to left as viewed from the source, the z-axis is upwards. Note that v8 also allows actual source 3D visuals.

Sensitivity

NomSPL_at_1m

MaxSPL_at_1m

Extents

For each octave-band 125 - 16k a matrix of data according to the header definition (RotGroups and OctaveBands) must be included. A file must at least contain values for

4-8

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

the range 0 to 90. Each octave band matrix is preceded by the octave-band label (125, 250, 500, 1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k). The amount of attenuation is in dB relative the on-axis value that should be zero (if the first on-axis value for each band is non-zero the value is subtracted from all sub-sequent values for that band). The resulting numbers must lay in the range -15 to 50 dB. The sign is reversed only not to have to enter a lot of minus-signs. The value at 180 must always be equal for all octave-band arcs. Data is specified comma, space or TAB delimited and decimal point must always be used independent of language settings. Sample SD1 TXT-file:
CATT-SD1 Version Description RotGroups OctaveBands Sensitivity MaxSPL_at_1m Extents = = = = = = = 2 Sample speaker 90-0 ; i.e. data < 125 250 500 1k < 100 100 100 100 < 120 120 120 120 -0.2 0.1 -0.1 0.2

is specified in reverse order from Fig 4.1 > ; i.e. no data for 2k 16k are available > > -0.2 0.3 ; version 1

125 ;according to 0 1.7 4.2 6.3 0 0.8 3.5 5.8 0 0.7 3.2 5.7 0 0.8 3.0 5.3 0 0.6 2.4 4.8 0 0.1 2.0 4.3 0 0.5 1.7 4.0 0 0.1 1.3 3.6 0 0.3 1.5 3.2 0 0.3 1.5 3.0

RotGroups rows correspond to 8.5 11.7 13.9 16.4 19.6 22.6 8.4 10.9 13.8 16.3 19.1 22.0 8.5 10.5 12.7 15.4 18.5 21.9 7.8 10.0 11.6 14.5 17.8 21.6 6.8 9.2 11.6 13.9 17.4 21.3 6.8 9.6 11.1 13.8 17.6 20.6 6.1 9.0 11.4 14.0 17.5 21.3 5.8 8.0 10.4 13.4 16.5 20.5 5.0 7.2 9.3 12.0 15.2 19.0 4.7 7.5 8.8 11.4 14.4 18.0

90, 80, 70, ..., 0 26.2 27.9 30.0 31.7 25.3 27.3 29.0 30.7 24.9 27.6 29.7 31.4 24.5 27.1 29.3 30.4 24.2 26.1 27.3 28.1 24.1 25.4 26.5 26.0 24.0 26.4 26.8 26.7 23.5 26.6 28.3 28.3 21.9 25.2 27.7 29.3 21.3 23.8 26.2 27.3

rotation 30.0 29.8 30.7 30.9 30.6 31.7 31.7 33.7 30.8 33.2 26.7 28.0 26.2 26.2 27.3 26.0 29.6 30.1 27.5 29.0

28.0 30.3 33.3 33.1 34.2 31.6 29.4 28.5 31.6 34.4

33.6 30.0 31.7 33.6 35.9 34.9 33.2 32.1 31.3 32.0

31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4

250 ;same principle for 250 Hz

...
500 ;same for 500 Hz

...
1000 ;same for 1kHz

...
;2k-16k ;no data

Note that a file must be correct or it will not import. File|Export Directivity|CATT-SD0 TXT... Exports the current SD0 or SD2 format to the 15 interpolated text format. If the current format is SD2, the export is made at the selected plot distance (if distance-dependent). File|Export Directivity|CATT-SD1 TXT... Exports the current SD1 or SD2 format to the 10 measured text format. If the current format is SD2, the export is made at the selected plot distance (if distance-dependent).

4-9

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

File|Export Directivity|CATT-SD2 Interpolated... Exports a current distance-dependent SD2 format to a set of 10 3D-ballons valid at different distances. A new SD2-file is created based on the CATT_Generic DDI model INTERPOLATED0 that is less accurate than an actually run-time array-modeled SD2 but is much faster and can be used for faster initial aiming. For details see the CATT_Generic help-file. The set of SD1 3D-balloons are placed in CATT-folder SD2DATA\CATT_Generic\Interpolated0 rather than in CATT-folder SD since they do not represent actual sources. These files are named expname_01.SD1, expname_02.SD1 etc. where expname is selected at export. Utilities|Make Omni Makes the directivity of the currently selected octave band be omni-directional. Utilities|Copy From Copies the directivity of another octave-band to the current one. Since most sources have a directivity gradually increasing with frequency, it is often practical to start from the 125 Hz band and then copy and modify the next band until all bands are created. This function is most useful for the SD0 format since it is often entered manually creating generic directivity patterns. Utilities|Calculate DI|Re Axis Calculates and displays the directivity index, DI, re the axis for the currently selected directivity and octave-band. DI is also shown in prediction output text-files (E_ss_rr.TXT and PARAM_ss.TXT) and with "3D balloons". Utilities|Calculate DI|Re Beam Calculates and displays the directivity index, DI, re the beam axis (for SD2-sources with beam-steering). Utilities|Copy Name to Clipboard Copies the currently loaded directivity name into the clipboard. It can then be pasted into CATT-Edit while editing a source-file. Utilities|Protect Data An option to protect the data in an SD0- or SD1-type directivity file. If a file is protected no data can be changed unless it is exported as text and imported again. A protected file shows the protection info in the module window title, e.g. Directivity - Horn15.SD0 [Hornmakers Inc.]. The purpose of the protection is to prevent accidental alteration of files supplied from manufacturers. SD2-files do not need this protection because data is locked in a DLL anyway and can't be tampered with (except for the CATT_Generic DLL that is supposed to be more open). The demo version cannot load protected files.

4-10

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

Utilities|Show Array Elements Creates a plot-file for showing the location and aim of all array elements as well as their polar patterns and weights. The polar patterns are in |p| rather than dB and 1.0 is at the same scale as 1 m. Any applied weights are indicated by a correspondingly changed radius for the polar pattern concerned. The x-,y-, and z-axis have large tics every meter and small tics every half meter. Lines are drawn from each element location to a point on the array axis located at the selected plot distance from the array origin. The plot-files are named CATTfolder SD\PLT\ELEMENTS_oct.PLT. Note: the element information is not necessarily available for all kinds of DDI array modules. The ARRAY0 model of the CATT_Generic DDI module does however supply the information.

4-11

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

4.2 Dialogs
SD0, SD1 and SD2 formats have several dialog items in common as described after the format specific dialogs.

15-degree interpolated format (SD0)

This format requires horizontal and vertical polar measurements for every 15 to be entered or imported.

Symmetrical Makes the current polar graph be horizontally or vertically symmetrical mirroring the values from the side with the active angle to the other side. The active angle is marked by a black handle. Cylindrical Creates a cylindrical symmetry by first making the current polar graph symmetrical and then copies the values to the other graph.

4-12

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

10-degree measured format (SD1)

This format requires arcs rotated in 10 steps around the source axis and with values every 10 along each arc to be entered or imported.

Symmetrical Makes the current directivity be horizontally symmetrical mirroring the arcs on the current side of the sphere to the other side. Cylindrical Creates a cylindrical symmetry by copying the current arc to all rotation angles.

4-13

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

DLL-format (SD2)
This format is based on the DLL Directivity Interface (DDI) and requires DLLs that translate or calculate the directivity. DLLs are placed in sub-folders to the CATT-folder SD2DATA. The sub-folders have the same names as the DLLs.

Name (Model)(DLL-interface directivity) The model name, the info field shows additional model info. Ver (Model)(DLL-interface directivity) The minimum DLL-version that this model's optional data is meant for. Name (Brand)(DLL-interface directivity) The name of the DLL (.DLL removed). Assuming the name BrandX the DLL is CATT-folder SD2DATA\BrandX\BrandX.DLL. All data needed by the particular DLL is placed in its own folder as well as any help available (BrandX.HLP, BrandX.PDF, BrandX.HTM or BrandX.TXT) that is shown when Help is pressed. Ver (Brand)(DLL-interface directivity) Version of the DLL, the info field shows additional DLL info.

4-14

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

Help (Brand)(DLL-interface directivity) Displays the DLL help if available. Help in HLP, PDF, HTM or TXT format (searched in that order) placed in the DLL folder with the same name as the DLL but with .HLP,.PDF,.HTM or .TXT extension. This gives a manufacturer an opportunity to include custom made on-line documentation for their loudspeaker models.
{

Plot-distance (DLL-interface directivity)

For distance dependent models the directivity is plotted and exported at this distance. Accuracy (DLL-interface directivity) For models where accuracy can be selected offering trade-off between speed and accuracy. Far-field at (DLL-interface directivity) For distance dependent models this value marks where the far-field starts (approximately). Ref (DLL-interface directivity) For distance dependent models the reference (what is set to 0 dB when plotting) can be selected. The options are: on axis (1 m) on axis (r) on beam (r) the reference is the directivity on axis at 1m the reference is the directivity on axis at the selected plot distance, r the reference is the directivity of the main beam at the selected plot distance, r (same as on axis (r) if the source has no beam-steering indicated). Because the polars are created with 2 resolution a beam angle of e.g. 5 may cause the value at the beam not to be exactly 0 dB.

Additional model-dependent data (DLL-interface directivity) A listbox with the optional model-dependent data along with some edit and manipulation buttons. Press Help to learn about optional data for each model implemented in the current DLL. Update model data Reads the model-dependent data and passes it to the DLL. Can be used to check the validity of the added or edited data.

Elements common to both SD0, SD1 (and SD2) formats

A polar value can be changed either by entering a value in dB in the Value edit-control below the left graph or by direct manipulation of the small handles attached to the graphs. If Enter is pressed, with the cursor in the Value edit-control, the current value is updated and the active angle is incremented. Natural (Source type) A natural source such as a talker, singer or an instrument.

4-15

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

Electro-acoustical (Source type) An electro-acoustical source such as a loudspeaker or loudspeaker array. Sensitivity/Nominal SPL 1m (Source type) The sensitivity information is not used but should be given for reference and future use, for natural sources the nominal (typical) spectrum can be used in the source-file using Lp1m_a = Lp_nominal. Max. SPL (Source type) Max SPL at 1m on axis. These values are compared to the Lp1m values entered in the source-file. These maximum level can be set in the source-file using Lp_max. None (Visuals) When plotted, the source has no visuals except for a point a the source id. 3D Extents... (Visuals) For sources the 3D extents (a min-max box) can be set (relative the acoustic center). This will serve as a reference and give a feeling for the actual size of the source in plot-files as well as VRML exports and SHADED.OGL. Note that for SD2 the extents can not be changed from the dialog like SD0 and SD1 since the extents of an SD2 is typically taken from the DLL (for CATT_Generic models, the extents may be entered in the Additional model-dependent data list but typically it will be given by the DLL in question and cannot be altered). 3D marker (Visuals) The source visual is defined by the selected CATT marker-file located in the CATT-folder SD. Marker-files can be created in GEO-format using the NOROOM directive and be exported using Prediction module File|Export|CATT Marker MRK. The coordinate system used should be x as the source axis, z up and y to the left and the origin at the acoustical center, see dialog above for 3D extents. Note: For SD2-files the marker-files (if any) are supplied by the DDI module DLL. Description For reference purpose e.g. for the real name of the loudspeaker or source e.g. "Female talker" or "Horn, type 15" (SD0/SD1).

4-16

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

(Octave-band) The radio-buttons selects what band to edit (SD0/SD1) and/or to create 3D balloons for. If bands are extrapolated or estimated it is indicated. Locked When the check-box is selected no change of directivity data can be made but only inspection. Each time a new directivity is loaded or imported, editing is initially locked to prevent accidental changes. See also Utilities|Protect Data. For plot-files this module will create a CATT-folder SD\PLT where all plot-files are created. Polar (Plot) Creates a plot-file for all octaves (SD\PLT\POLARS.PLT) with polar directivity plot-file octave bands 125Hz - 16kHz. For SD0 and SD1 the data at is plotted from the data set at the respective resolution while SD2 is plotted at 2 resolution. Contours (Plot) Creates a plot (CATT-folder SD\PLT\CONTOURS.PLT) of the -3, -6 and -9 dB contours at selected distance and angle to a fictive audience plane. For details on directivity contours, see Section 4.3.

3D balloon (Plot) Creates plot-files for the interpolated 3D directivity for the selected octave-band (SD\PLT\BALLOON_oct.PLT). The directivity is sampled at 7.5 steps for SD0 and 5 for SD1 and SD2 and is thus not simply a plot of the entered values. For SD0 seamless interpolation is inherent in the procedure employed, for SD1 3D interpolation is performed between the closest 4 data points and for SD2 (depending on the DLL, this may either be exactly simulated angles or be interpolated from measured data). Visuals (Plot) Creates a plot-file (SD\PLT\VISUALS.PLT) for the source visuals (if not None).

4-17

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

4.3 Theory
Three types of directivities are available. Type SD0 is interpolated from horizontal and vertical polar measurements entered at 15 steps. This format is most suitable for sources that are entered manually from polar data supplied on loudspeaker data-sheets or for creating generic loudspeaker types. Type SD1 is based on full space measurements in 10 steps. (often assuming symmetry so that only a fourth or half of the values are actually measured), intermediate values are interpolated. Type SD2 is based on the DLL Directivity Interface (DDI) defined by CATT and is capable of arbitrary data-format translation, array modeling and other special functions.

The 15-degree interpolated format (SD0)

The directivity approximation can handle any type of polar patterns, also non-symmetrical ones. The only constraints are to ensure consistent and logical patterns: 1) the on-axis value must be 0 since it is the reference (enforced); 2) the horizontal and the vertical value at 180 (in the back) must be equal (enforced); 3) values must be in the range -50 dB to 15 dB .

The 10-degree measured format (SD1)

Can handle any type of polar pattern, also non-symmetrical ones. The only constraints are to ensure consistent and logical patterns: 1) the on-axis value must be 0 since it is the reference (enforced); 2) all values at 180 (in the back) must be equal (enforced); 3) values must be in the range -50 dB to 15 dB.

The any-degree measured, interpolated or simulated format (SD2)

The SD2 directivity format is based on a DLL interface rather than a data format. This means that the data that a DLL interfaces with may: 1) be measured, analytical or simulated at any resolution; 2) be based on unorthodox spacing (e.g. 1 in the front and 10 in the back of a directive speaker); 3) have > 15 dB overshoot. 4) be distance dependent e.g. for arrays that typically do not have 1/r behavior and that may have very long nearfields (up to 100 m is not uncommon) 5) be in higher frequency resolution that 1/1-octaves (v8 still only handles 1/1-octaves but the SD2-format opens up for a future higher resolution)

4-18

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

To achieve the above it is "only" a question of writing a DLL for it since the interface towards the prediction software is the same. Prediction using array-modeling takes at least one magnitude longer with a full array modeled (say 16 transducers that all call an internal DLL SD0-version or SD1-version of the transducer directivity and for every 1/6-octave it makes a summation for the octave band value so it has to take some extra time). On the positive side is that when predicting using high directivity fewer rays can be used since the direct sound (that is not solved by rays) is dominating and that compensates some for the longer calculation.

Directivity Index
The Directivity Index (DI) is: DI = 10 log10() where is the directivity factor defined as in [Beranek], p109: ...the ratio of the intensity on a designated axis of a sound radiator at a stated distance r to the intensity that would be produced at the same position by a point source if it were radiating the same total acoustic power as the radiator. Free space is assumed for the measurements. Usually the designated axis is taken as the axis of maximum radiation, in which cases always exceeds unity... DI is always calculated on the main axis and if directivities are entered with the maximum radiation off axis, DI may become negative. This causes no problems in the predictions. For SD2-sources that have beam-steering, the DI re the beam angles can be displayed. To obtain the total acoustical power and DI of a source and octave-band the directivity is sampled at 412 uniformly spaced points for SD0 and SD1 (4/412 steradians) and at 1652 points for SD2 (4/1652 steradians).

Directivity Contours
Directivity contours are created by backing off from the axis until -3 dB (for the 3 dB contour) is reached. This is done for every 5 around the axis and by stepping back 1 at the time. Since the contour calculation starts out from the axis, sources that do not have their maximum radiation on-axis will have somewhat misleading contours, see fig for a 3dB contour example.

Fig. 4.1 Contours for max radiation off-axis

4-19

4. DIRECTIVITY MODULE

4-20

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

CATT-Acoustic creates four types of plot-files. Static 2D, static 3D and 2D-, 3D-files with dynamic sub-frames. Depending on the type, different buttons on the optional Plot-file control dialog and the toolbar are enabled. The plot-file type is displayed in the left status bar after the plot-file name. When the mouse is passed over 2D graphs, maps and geometries the left statusbar shows values corresponding to the current mouse position: 2D geometry projections shows ( x ; y ; _ ), ( x ; _ ; z ) or ( _ ; y ; z ) depending on view, graphs show (x_value ; y_value), 2D maps show (x ; y ; map_z ; map_value).

In addition to viewing, printing, and exporting plot-files, the module can also play Windows WAV-files. A Preferences option allows the View module to be automatically minimized when another module becomes active or to not show the Plot-file control.

5.1 Menus
File|Open Plot-file... Opens a particular plot-file (.PLT) for viewing. File|Save Plot-file Saves the current plot-file (only meaningful for 3D plot-files - the perspective will be saved). File|Save Plot-file As... Save current plot-file under a new name. File|Export Plot-file To|Meta... Exports the current plot-file to the 32-bit Enhanced Windows Meta-file format to insert in e.g. MS Word. Displays a dialog for Meta-file settings. File extension is set to .EMF. See also Edit|Copy below.

Plot width

Windows Enhanced Meta-file export

Width of the plot-area to use, in mm. The height will be calculated to preserve true aspect. File|Export Plot-file To|Bitmap... Exports the current plot-file to Bitmap (BMP) file for import into e.g. MS Word. Depending on the type of plot-file a 4, 8 or 32-bit color file is created.

5-1

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

File|Export Plot-file To|EPSF... Exports the current plot-file to Encapsulated PostScript Format. Displays a dialog for EPSF settings. Plots that use palettes are converted to gray-scale. File extension is set to .EPS. Plot width (General) Width of the plot-area to use, in mm. The height will be calculated to preserve true aspect. Encapsulated PostScript-file export

Pen-size (Format-specific)

Encapsulated PostScript-file export

Pen-size in points. The value 0 makes the given laser-writer use the thinnest pen it can. At 600 DPI and higher resolutions the lines may then get too thin for some purposes. Font (Format-specific) Encapsulated PostScript-file export

Font to use (Palatino | Courier | Times | Helvetica | ...). Dependent on the fonts actually installed in or downloaded to the printer. To make WYSIWYG, proportional width fonts are converted to constant width fonts and will typically look wider than usual. On some systems more complete names such as Times-Roman may be required. (Orientation) (Format-specific) Export orientation: Landscape or Portrait Export Maps For Spreadsheet... If the current plot-file contains one or more audience area maps they can be exported to a semi-colon delimited text-file for import into e.g. MS Excel, the maps will be written including x, y coordinates and some general info. If the complete data set is marked and a Surface graph is chosen it can be viewed inside Excel. Map points with no data will show up as blank cells in Excel. This is a function requested by several users but using Excel's Surface graph instead of the actual map in a PLT-file is not recommended, see below. There may be other reasons to export the data though. Note: The map values are upside down in Excel as compared to the map shown by the PLTviewer. This is because a different convention in Excel but a Surface graph will have the same principal look as the original in the PLT (since the x-y coordinates are given they will help the interpretation). However, carefully note that the Excel Surface graph interpolates the values to create a nice-looking smooth graph and that can sometimes be deceptive. For maps with a small Step value the x- and y-values on the graph axis must be set as Numbers with say 2 decimals to display well. A further note is that the actual data values are located at the crossing of the lines in the Surface graph rather than in the middle of each map square as in the PLT-file. Encapsulated PostScript-file export

5-2

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

File|Create Header Plot-file... Creates a plot-file with only a header text displayed in the center. This can be used e.g. to create a plot-file list interleaved with short descriptions. If a list-file is currently open the header file is inserted in the list after the currently selected plot-file (to simplify creation of lists with header plots). To edit the list, see List menus below. File|Page Setup... File|Print Plot-file... Prints the current plot-file to the printer. The print-out is WYSIWYG so if you zoom a 2D plot also the print-out will be zoomed. To change printer, paper, size, or orientation, use Page Setup that displays a standard Page Setup dialog for selection of printer, page size, margins and orientation. These settings are local to the software and are kept until the application is terminated. Since the plots have a fixed aspect ratio (640x385) the print-out is maximized and placed towards the top margin of the selected print area.

margins

plot

plot

plot

plot

Portrait mode

margin

title

paper

Landscape mode

Edit|Copy As 32-bit Meta Copies the current plot-file into the Windows Clipboard in Enhanced (32-bit) Meta-file format. The picture can then be pasted into some 32-bit programs (e.g. MS Word or PageMaker). The size of the plot is preserved. Note: the size of the plot-file viewer window is displayed in the right status bar. This makes it easier to copy/paste using a particular size since the size can be noted and if a new export/copy must be done with the same size, the window can be resized to match the previous export/copy. Edit|Copy As Bitmap Copies the plot-window to a clipboard bitmap. Palette information is included so that true colors are preserved. The size of the plot is preserved. See note about plot size above. Edit|Copy 3D-view to PRD Copies the current 3D view parameters to be the default settings in the current PRD-file (the Geometry view/check dialog) List|Open List-file Opens a text-file with a list of plot-files (and optionally WAV-file) names. Each time plot-files are created a list of all the names are written to a module-dependent text-file (e.g. PREDPLT.TXT for the Prediction module). The View module then receives a message to display the list.

5-3

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

The format of a list-file is: [PATH]PLOTFILE.PLT ... [[,][PATH]WAVFILE.WAV]

where the WAV-file is optional. If folder- or file-names contain spaces the whole path and name must be enclosed in "". Sample list-file:
C:\temp\view4.PLT C:\temp\shaded.PLT c:\temp\sound.WAV "C:\temp\view4 old.PLT" "C:\temp\shaded old.PLT" "C:\temp\sound old.WAV" "C:\temp\shaded old.PLT" C:\temp\sound.WAV "C:\temp\shaded old.PLT", C:\temp\sound.WAV

Note: if edited manually, be sure to include the full path to the files so that the viewer always can find them. List|Save List-file Saves the current list-file. List|Save List-file As Saves the current list-file under a new name. The current plot-file then becomes the first file in the new list. List|Insert Plot-file... Inserts a new plot-file after the current one. Tu insert multiple files use Ctrl-LMB or ShiftLMB. List|Remove Plot-file Removes the current plot-file from the list. Note: if only one file remains in the list it can not be removed. List|Associate WAV-file Associates a WAV-file with the plot-file. The WAV-file can be played by pressing the Play WAV-file button on the Plot-file control dialog or the toolbar. When Options|Auto Play WAV is on the WAV-file is played automatically when the plot-file has loaded. List|Deassociate WAV-file Deassociates the WAV-file associated with the current plot-file. List|Prev Plot-file, List|Next Plot-file Display previous/next plot-file in the list (PgUp/PgDn). The File << and >> buttons on the Plot-file control dialog and the toolbar duplicates these actions. If the previous/next plot-file has an associated WAV-file and Options|Auto Play WAV-file is on the WAV-file is played.

5-4

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

List|Select Plot-file... Displays a small listbox where plot-files in the list can be selected and the list be edited. List|Auto View List Toggles auto view the list of files the list (Ctrl+A). Use Options|Auto View Delay to set interfile delay. If plot-files have associated WAV-files and Options|Auto Play WAV-file is on WAV-files are played automatically. List|Print All Files In List Prints all plot-files in the list with an option to skip files. Options|Plot-file Controls Show/hide the floating dialog (Ctrl+R). Most functions on the control can be accessed via the toolbar or by direct mouse-actions on the plot window. A Preferences option can be selected so that the dialog is never opened. Options|Auto Play WAV-file Automatic play of a WAV-file attached to a plot-file when it is loaded. Options|Auto View Delay... Selects the inter-file delay (in ms) for plot-file list auto view. Options|Select Frame... Displays a small listbox where any plot-file frame can be selected.

Options|Map Scale...

5-5

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

Choice of scale for color mapping. Use original scale in plot-file Mapping scales

If this option is check the original scales selected in Audience area mapping dialog is used instead of the ones selected here. Options|Map Palette|... Choice of palette for color mapping. The status line at the bottom of the frame window spells out the abbreviations. Options|Shaded 3D Palette|... Choice of palette for shaded 3D plots. The status line at the bottom of the frame window spells out the abbreviations. Options|Remove 3D Shading Converts a shaded or colored 3D plot to wire-frame. The process is irreversible but the file on disk is not changed. To permanently convert a file to wire-frame it must be saved after conversion.

5.2 Dialogs
Plot-file control
Most functions can also be performed with click-drag with the mouse directly on the plot window where the value under mouse-control is updated according to the speed of mouse movement. Angle and movement step factor is according to the value selected on the plotfile control or the toolbar. In the descriptions below LMB means Left Mouse Button and RMB Right Mouse Button. If an equivalent button is found on the toolbar it is noted.

5-6

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

General buttons
<< File >> Display previous/next plot-file in a list (duplicates the function of menuselections List|Prev Plot-file / List|Next Plot-file). (toolbar) Reset to initial or saved settings

Reset

Play WAV-file Plays a WAV-file if attached to a plot-file. (toolbar)

2D buttons
(Zoom) Scroll bars Zoom out/in. (toolbar) Moves the plot

Scroll arrows Moves the plot Click in the plot window. When the plot is currently not zoomed: zooms and moves directly to the corresponding fourth of the screen; when the plot is currently zoomed: the zoom will be reset (same as the Reset button); If the dialog is closed, or not activated, pressing the 1, 2, 3 or 4 on the keyboard while the plot window is active gives the same result. If 2D plots are zoomed, pressing/releasing the SHIFT key toggles the size of the text.

2DA buttons
2D buttons plus: < Frame > Previous/next "frame" in the animation list. If the dialog is closed, or not activated, left and right arrow keys performs the same function allowing for basic list operation with PgUp/PgDn and arrow keys. (toolbar)

3D buttons
When a button is pressed, the current value is displayed. (Dist.) "Distance", move closer/farther (for Camera and Camera Set move forward/ backward). (RMB + toolbar) Lens angle smaller/larger for Natural, Camera and Camera Set (Ctrl-RMB + toolbar). Horizontal arrows: moves the picture left/right (for Camera and Camera Set moves the camera left/right). Vertical arrows: moves the picture down/up (for Camera and Camera Set moves the camera down/up). (Ctrl-LMB + toolbar) Horizontal arrows: horizontal view angle (for Camera and Camera Set rotate camera horizontally). Vertical arrows: vertical view angle (for Camera and Camera Set rotate camera vertically). (LMB + toolbar)

(Lens)

(Move)

(Rotate)

5-7

5. PLOT-FILE VIEW/PRINT MODULE

(Step)

Decrease/increase factor when selecting e.g. Dist. (1/64 to 64). If the dialog is closed, or not activated pressing keyboard < decreases and pressing > increases the step (can be done while click-dragging) (toolbar).

(View) Natural Parallel Camera Set Selects Natural point perspective. If the dialog is closed/not activated press N. Selects Parallel perspective. If the dialog is closed/not activated press P. Selects Camera perspective. If the dialog is closed/not activated press C. Shows and moves the camera in the current perspective (Natural or Parallel). If the dialog is closed/not activated press S.

3DA buttons
3D buttons plus: < Frame > Previous/next "frame" in the animation list. If the dialog is closed, or not activated, left and right arrow keys performs the same function allowing for basic list operation with PgUp/PgDn and arrow keys. (toolbar) The extensive toolbar duplicates most controls on the floating Plot-file control dialog:

The toolbar tooltips displays the current value for a 3D setting (the current camera position and target for camera mode, i.e. the aim line end-points as seen in the Camera Set mode)

5-8

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

The Multiple source addition module is used for adding echograms of multiple sources together when analyzing one or more PA-loudspeakers interacting with the natural speaker and similar situations. The module can optionally create ECH-files for the binaural postprocessing module so that multiple source auralization can be fine-tuned without requiring a new calculation for every source change. The actual addition for auralization is made after Post-processing by adding created SIM- or WAV-files. Several source parameters can be varied without the need for a recalculation in the Prediction module. The files created by the multiple source module follow basically the same principles for name syntax as for the Prediction module, see 6.3. Note: for purely numerical estimates the Audience area mapping directly predicts maps for multiple sources with delays. To use this module the (Save data for) setting in the Prediction dialog for Full detailed calculation must have been selected at prediction (for special cases also the Early part detailed ISM can be used). The Prediction module then creates files with the name syntax E_ss_rr.ADD which are read by the Source addition module. With the exception of source directivity-files, ADD-files contain all necessary information to perform the source addition. When prediction is made with (Save data for) multiple source addition selected, a CMB-file is generated for the calculation case with the same base-name as the current source-file (typical name SRC.CMB). A CMB-file can also be generated with only a geo-check by selecting Create .CMB in the Geometry view/check dialog. This can be used to change the source aims and, at the same time, generate SRCINFO plot-files where all source aims can be seen. The module always works with files in the directory where the CMB-file was loaded from and when a CMB-file is first loaded all ADD-files are searched and the module figures out which source-receiver combinations are possible. Also the geometry check-sums are compared. No information regarding source data (other than source locations) are saved in the ADDfiles. It is possible to create each source separately and then later add them together as long as the geometry check-sums and the head-direction match and ADD-files have been created. The quality of the calculations is up to the user to decide as no comparison is made concerning number of rays used etc. The following parameters can be varied for each run: source combination (i.e. which sources to add together) source directivities source aims and roll angles source level spectrum electrical delays background noise level (for RASTI and STIuser). a project name

6-1

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

receiver combination (i.e. which receivers to use) summation of direct sounds with or without phase.

Zero time (from where D-50 etc. is calculated) is set to when the first sound arrives (electrical delay taken into account) i.e. the "law of the first wavefront" is used. The length of the sum echogram created is set from the shortest of the added echograms (delay taken into account).

6.1 Menus
File|Open Combination... Opens an existing source combination/data CMB-file. File|Save Combination Saves the current source combination/data CMB-file. File|Save Combination As... Saves the current source combination/data under a new name. Utilities|Latest Results List Each time text-based result-files are created the corresponding filenames appear in a small list in the main window. This item toggles the list on and off while preserving its contents. To load a file for viewing in CATT-Edit double-click the filename. Utilities|Show Source Combination... Displays an overview over currently selected source combination settings. Example:
Project: Example --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S# Directivity Aim_x Aim_y Aim_z 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k Delay ................................................................................................... A0 LSP1.SD0 1.0 3.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 A1 LSP2.SD0 1.0 3.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 A2 LSP3.SD1 1.0 3.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 ................................................................................................... S# Hor Ver Roll ...................... A0 -0.0 0.0 0.0 A1 -26.6 0.0 0.0 A2 45.0 0.0 0.0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The source aim angle definition (Hor, Ver, Roll) is documented in section 2.4 about SRCINFO.PLT. Utilities|Addition-file Info... Displays essential information from an ADD-file created by the Prediction module and that is read by the Source addition module (reverberation time, etc.). Example:

6-2

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

Essential ADD-file info -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Source location [m] : ( 1.000 1.700 1.700 ) Receiver location [m] : ( -3.000 20.000 1.300 ) Early part trunc. [ms] : 178 Early part max order : 18 No of reflections : 17111 (all 8 octaves) + direct Mean free path [m] : 7.49 Mean abs. coeff. [%] : < 18.77 18.37 19.68 20.02 19.69 20.15 20.96 24.57 > Reverberation time [s] : < 1.44 1.47 1.35 1.30 1.27 1.09 0.72 0.33 > Background noise [dB] : < 45.00 38.00 32.00 28.00 25.00 23.00 21.00 19.00 > -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6.2 Dialogs
The main Multiple sources dialog controls the combination of sources and receivers to add echograms for.

(Sources) Enable/disable the corresponding source(s). Show all (Sources) Displays all currently selected and enabled sources. Add direct sound with phase (Sources) With this option selected direct sounds from each of the sound sources are allowed to interfere (two equal in-phase source contributions give close to +6dB while out-of-phase signals can be -10 dB down or more). Without this option the direct sound is, just like higher order reflections, added on a power basis (two equal source contributions always give +3dB). The interference calculation is based on digital octave-band filters and not only on the octaveband center frequencies (i.e. the interference is calculated with full bandwidth but the result is filtered in octave-bands so interference patterns will be somewhat smoothed). With this option, the direct sound in the echograms displayed will appear to have a short decay due to the digital filters used but it is numerically insignificant. Note: the addition with phase affects LF values too since a figure-of-8 microphone is simulated for the lateral sound taking into

6-3

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

account the reversed phase of reflections registered at the left side of the microphone. LFC is not calculated if direct sound is added with phase. (Sources) Displays a dialog where the source data is selected: SPL at 1m distance, eq/gain, electrical delay, source directivity, source aim coordinate and source roll angle.

(Level control, dB)

Data source

For a natural source only Lp at 1m acoustic (Lp1m_a) can be varied, for an electro-acoustic source all three (Lp1m_a, Gain_a, Lp1m_ea) can be varied and a change in one causes a change in one of the other according to: Change in Gain_a Change in Lp1m_a Change in Lp1m_ea Lp1m_ea = Lp1m_a + Gain_a Lp1m_ea = Lp1m_a + Gain_a Gain_a = Lp1m_ea - Lp1m_a

Clicking the scrollbar arrows changes a level with 0.2 dB. Directivity To select OMNI natural directivity select (none) using SD0 or SD1 buttons. Receivers Selection of the set of available receiver positions to use. Data source

6-4

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

Show all Displays all currently selected and enabled receivers.

Receivers

Different types of output-files are created depending on if a single receiver is selected or if multiple receivers are selected, see Section 6.3. Note: all parameters are calculated with the direct sound from the source that arrives first as the reference (utilizing the "law of the first wave-front"). Show source aims Creates a simplified plot-file (SRC.PLT) over the geometry showing a rough view of the chosen source aims. Only the extents of the hall are shown (as a rectangular box). The plotfile created for this purpose will have the same base name as the current CMB-file. Additional plot-files are created automatically, see Section 6.3. For a more detailed view of the how the sources are aimed, create a CMB-file together with SRCINFO plot-files using the Prediction module. (Octave-bands (for plots)) Selection of octave-bands for detailed output. Text-file results are created for all bands. Project A comment describing the project. Create E_ss_rr.ECH Creates files for the binaural post-processing module. In the files, information on source eq. and delay is contained which can be taken into account at post-processing using the SIM- or WAV-file addition utilities (Post-processing:Utilities|SIM-file addition) or WAV-file addition utility (Post-processing:Utilities|WAV-file addition). These ECH-files are identical to those that may have been created by the Prediction module at the same time as the ADD-files were created, except for any source changes applied in the addition module. Bkg noise change This option enables a change of background noise level to study the effects on RASTI and STIuser. This option or the values given are not saved in the CMB-file but are just to be used for experimenting. If the option is off, the background levels as found in the ADD-files from prediction are used.

6-5

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

6.3 Output-files
This section contains a list of all result plot- and text-files created by the Multiple source addition module. It complements the general overview of file-types in Section 1.4. For the sample output text-files below, the case in Fig. 6.1 has been used.

5m

Audience:240m

Volume:1921m (approx.)

01 B1

Y
A0 02

Fig. 6.1 Sample source addition configuration for two sources (A0 and B1) and two receivers (01 and 02).

General
MULTPLT.TXT E_ss_rr.ECH SRC.PLT list of the latest result plot-files. optional echogram files for the Binaural post-processing module. source aim view with simplified geometry.

Single receiver result-files

If a single receiver is selected detailed data for that receiver is created in two types of result files. E_nn_rr_oct.PLT (nn is 01, 02, 03 etc. depending on the number of sources used and with 8 sources per page). In each small diagram both the echogram of the specific source (solid lines) and the total echogram from all used sources (dashed lines) can be seen. In each diagram the direct sound from the corresponding source is marked by a small circle. The responses are integrated using a time-constant roughly corresponding

6-6

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

to the length of the response divided by 500 (for typical 300 ms responses the time constant will be 0.6 ms). E_rr_INT.PLT gives a multiple source decay curves and RT estimate. This decay may be useful with large systems and long geometrical delays. When multiple sources are used (especially widely spaced) the RT is no longer only a room property but a property of the electro-acoustical system as a whole. Note that the latest part of the decay may have a steep slope that is caused by limited lengths of individual originally calculated full echograms. If the late part data is missing (e.g. when using Early detailed ISM for special purposes, no decay file is created). contains source combination/data and results in the form of acoustic parameters. The parameters included are D-50, C-80, LFC, LF, Ts, SPL, RASTI and STIuser with and without background noise. 8k and 16k Hz values can optionally be included (see Preferences). Example:

E_rr.TXT

CATT-Acoustic v8.0a : source add. acoustic param., Copyright CATT 1988-2002 =================================================================================================== Original file name: C:\CATTDOCS\v8\SHOEBOX_multsrc\OUT\E_01.TXT Original save time: 2002-03-25 12:04:21 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Project : v8 Shoebox Receiver id : 01 Location : -3.00 20.00 1.30 Head direction : -3.00 19.00 1.30 SOURCE COMBINATION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S# Directivity Aim_x Aim_y Aim_z 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k Delay ................................................................................................... A0 CATT.SD0 1.0 4.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 B1 CATT.SD1 -2.0 7.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 S# Hor Ver Roll ...................... A0 -0.0 0.0 0.0 B1 -0.0 0.0 0.0 Direct sound power addition. DIRECT SOUND DELAY/LEVEL (re first arrival) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S# delay 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum ................................................................................................... A0 9.5 -3.3 -1.1 -1.3 -4.3 -0.1 -0.8 -1.6 -3.1 -1.4 B1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Sound from Src B1 arrives first (becomes the reference). Sound from Src A0 arrives 9.5 ms after Src B1 and with relative level 125 Hz to 16 kHz <-3.3 -1.1 -1.3 -4.3 -0.1 -0.8 : -1.6 -3.1> dB i.e. slightly weaker than that of Src B1. PARAMETERS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum ................................................................................................... Ts [ms] 90.4 79.3 71.9 64.2 56.2 53.9 40.7 28.9 45.4 D-50 [%] 42.4 49.3 54.5 59.5 69.9 70.8 75.7 90.8 75.3 C-80 [dB] 2.5 3.5 4.4 5.5 6.3 6.4 10.2 16.6 8.5 LFC [%] 39.5 39.7 37.3 30.5 29.0 31.5 37.9 32.2 34.5 LF [%] 23.8 24.1 22.4 17.5 15.1 16.6 20.3 15.1 18.0 SPL [dB] 61.9 62.7 63.7 64.3 65.8 79.2 79.5 75.5 83.4 82.8 (A) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------STIuser [%] without / with bkg. noise : < 45.0 38.0 32.0 28.0 25.0 23.0 : 21.0 - > dB

6-7

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

................................................................................................... 63.5 / 63.3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RASTI [%] without / with bkg. noise : < - - 32.0 - 25.0 - > dB ................................................................................................... 62.5 / 62.5 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k ................................................................................................... Weights 0.13 0.14 0.11 0.12 0.19 0.17 0.14 (original) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameters are calculated assuming the sound from the source arriving first as the reference. SPL is the total SPL of all sources.

E_rrX.TXT

same as E_rr.TXT but made for MS Excel import (text is within "" and data is semi-colon delimited).

Multiple receiver result-files

If multiple receivers are selected two types of overview result files are created. TREND.PLT this file is similar to TRENDn_ss.PLT created by the Prediction module, as it concentrates the results for all selected receivers. The sources used are marked along the top of each of the four graphs. Within each source group the numbers used are marked by a dot pattern:

A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PARAM.TXT

contains source combination/data and results in the form of acoustic parameters. Example:

CATT-Acoustic v8.0a : source add. acoustic param., Copyright CATT 1988-2002 =================================================================================================== Original file name: C:\CATTDOCS\v8\SHOEBOX_multsrc\OUT\PARAM.TXT Original save time: 2002-03-25 12:11:11 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Project : v8 Shoebox --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rec id Location Head direction --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 -3.00 20.00 1.30 -3.00 19.00 1.30 02 3.00 12.00 1.30 3.00 11.00 1.30 SOURCE COMBINATION --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S# Directivity Aim_x Aim_y Aim_z 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k Delay ................................................................................................... A0 CATT.SD0 1.0 4.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 B1 CATT.SD1 -2.0 7.7 1.7 70.0 73.0 76.0 79.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 95.0 0.0 S# Hor Ver Roll ...................... A0 -0.0 0.0 0.0 B1 -0.0 0.0 0.0 Direct sound power addition. DIRECT SOUND DELAY/LEVEL (re first arrival) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S# delay 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum 01................................................................................................. A0 9.5 -3.3 -1.1 -1.3 -4.3 -0.1 -0.8 -1.6 -3.1 -1.4 B1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

6-8

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

02................................................................................................. A0 4.5 -1.5 2.0 3.4 2.3 7.6 8.5 9.4 9.9 8.7 B1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Sound from Src B1 arrives first (becomes the reference) to both Rec 01 and 02. Sound from Src A0 to Rec 01 arrives 9.5 ms after Src B1 but 4.5 ms later at Rec 02. PARAMETERS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ts [ms] 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum ................................................................................................... 01 90.4 79.3 71.9 64.2 56.2 53.9 40.7 28.9 45.4 02 86.5 77.5 72.3 65.9 55.3 54.3 36.8 24.4 39.0 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D-50 [%] 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k sum ................................................................................................... 01 42.4 49.3 54.5 59.5 69.9 70.8 75.7 90.8 75.3 02 48.6 53.9 57.6 60.7 64.8 66.0 80.0 96.4 80.6 C-80, LFC, LF, SPL, RASTI, STIuser Note: results for receivers that are not reached by any direct sound are always hard to interpret since most measures assume that the direct sound is present. In the PARAM.TXT and E_rr.TXT result-files, an absent direct sound will not give a DIRECT SOUND DELAY of 0.0 ms for the source-receiver combination concerned even if the source is the closest one to the receiver (had the direct sound not been blocked).

PARAMX.TXT

same as PARAM.TXT but made for MS Excel import (text is within "" and data is semi-colon delimited).

6-9

6. MULTIPLE SOURCE ADDITION MODULE

6-10

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

The binaural post-processing (BPP) module synthesizes binaural as well as other types of room impulse responses (IRs) from generic octave-band echograms created by the Prediction module or by the Multiple source addition module. The module can create multiple source auralization, convolve synthesized or measured impulse responses with anechoic WAV-files, perform relative calibration, as well as file-format conversions and many other supporting functions. The BPP module uses settings-files with the extension .PST that stores all necessary information to perform a post-processing (except for the echogram-file itself). The settings consist of sample-rate, IR length, output data format, processing methods and more. Several settings-files can be created for different purposes. PST-files can also be used in the Sequence processing module for batch processing. By selecting (Save data for) binaural post-processing in the Full detailed calculation (or for special cases in the Early part detailed ISM dialog) in the Prediction module, files with the name syntax E_ss_rr.ECH are created (ECH is short for echogram). ECH-files are read by the BPP module and contain all hall-specific information needed to synthesize a binaural room impulse response (BRIR), as well as various mono, stereo, B-format (for Ambisonic [Bformat]) and 5-channel impulse responses (IRs). The prediction project name is included in the file but it is recommended to keep a copy of the corresponding E_ss_rr.TXT or PARAM_ss.TXT for reference. Note: the more rays that are used the longer the early part will be and more of the unique spatial properties at a receiver position will be included. See Fig 7.1 for an overview of the data-flow for binaural post-processing (source A2 and receivers 01 and 02).
X.WAV E_A2_01.ECH E_A2_01_L.SIM

Postprocessing

Software Convolution

X_A2_01.WAV X_A2_01.SCL (calibration-file)

E_A2_01_R.SIM Y

Lake DSP convolution Lake DSP convolution

Prediction

HRTFs

Headphone Equalization

SIM-file Calibration
Y

WAV-file Calibration SCL-files required

E_A2_02_L.SIM E_A2_02.ECH

Postprocessing

E_A2_02_R.SIM X.WAV

Software Convolution

X_A2_02.WAV X_A2_02.SCL (calibration-file)

X.WAV = Anechoically recorded mono WAV-file X_A2_01.WAV, X_A2_02.WAV = processed stereo WAV-files Y = Anechoically recorded material (AES/EBU or analog)

= Headphone replay = Desktop auralization = Lake DSP auralization

Fig. 7.1Data flow from prediction to binaural post-processing and auralization The synthesis of a BRIR is explained in the Theory section 7.3. The convolution of a BRIR and anechoic music/speech can be done directly on the PC (a few seconds to a few minutes processing) and the processed sound be listened to using a

7-1

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

16-bit stereo soundcard capable of playing WAV-files - desktop auralization (WAV-files or "RIFF Wave" is part of the Windows Multimedia specification). Optionally Lake DSP CP4 or Huron convolution processors can be used which then enables real-time convolution, head-tracking and virtual reality applications [Lake]. Information on the Lake DSP SIM-file format, which is used to feed the BRIR data to the convolution processors, can be obtained from Huron/CP4 manuals. To limit the number of file-formats used the SIM-file format is used also with software convolution. In the software convolution case all tools necessary are provided and detailed knowledge of the SIM-format is not necessary. The two alternative processing paths are shown in Fig. 7.1. The BPP module utilizes HRTF libraries (in the CATT-folder HRTFs), headphone equalization filters (in the CATT-folder HEADPHONES). These are selected in Preferences. Anechoically recorded WAV-files must be placed in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC.

7.1 Menus
File|New Settings... Creates new post-processing settings. File|Open Settings... Load new post-processing settings (*.PST). File|Save Settings Saves current settings. File|Save Settings As... Saves current settings under a new name. Utilities| Various utilities for file-format conversion etc. Some of the provided functions may also be performed by Lake DSP software, see Lake manuals. The CATT utilities below manipulating Lake SIM-files assumes real vectors only (i.e. FIR filters as created by the BPP module). Utilities|Information|CATT ECH-file... Displays essential information from an echogram ECH-file, that is created by the Prediction or the Multiple source addition modules, and that is read by the BPP module (reverberation time, prediction project name etc.). Example: Essential ECH-file info
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Prediction project : Sample project Source location [m] : ( 1.500 3.500 1.500 ) Receiver location [m] : ( 0.000 7.500 1.200 ) Head dir. coord. [m] : ( 1.500 3.500 1.500 ) Detailed refl. to [ms] : 134 Early part max order : 44 No of reflections : 19830 (all 8 octaves) + direct Mean free path [m] : 4.19 Mean abs. coeff. [%] : < 15.65 12.95 13.35 15.24 13.20 13.71 : 14.57 14.99 >

7-2

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Reverberation time [s] : < 0.99 1.20 1.15 0.99 1.12 0.96 : 0.65 0.33 > Source gain/eq. [dB] : < 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 : 0.0 0.0 > Source aux. delay [ms] : 0.0 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Utilities|Information|Lake SIM-file... Displays the file-header of a Lake SIM-file. The comment section before the actual SIM header is used by the BPP module for comments stating the BPP version, the prediction project name, initial scale factor needed for calibration, and some other data required for SIM- and WAV-file addition and calibration. Example:
Lake SIM-format file -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------;Copyright CATT 1988-2002 ;Project=Sample project ;Head-direction= 1.500E+00 3.500E+00 1.500E+00 ;Initial scalefactor= 1.442E+06 ;Init delay= 1.247E-02 ;Aux delay= 0.000E+00 ;Eq=< 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 : 0.0 0.0> dB ;Internal sample-rate=44100 ;RECEIVER_MODEL = Binaural ;HRTF library=CATT1_plain_44.DAT ;Headphone eq=SENNH_HD600_plain_44.DAT ;IACC = < 0.95 0.64 0.54 0.28 0.30 0.20 : 0.14 0.36> wideband = 0.22 ( (struct real) (mode binary) (dmode stream) (dtype bit24) (vsize 52920) (cattscale 1.442E+06) (samplerate 44100) )

Utilities|Information|Windows WAV-file... Displays information about a 16-bit WAV-file: If a CATT SCL-file, as created at a software convolution, is present the contents are displayed for reference. If the file is an anechoically recorded file and a CATT AWI-file is found the contents are displayed for reference. Example:
16-bit WAV-file -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sample-rate [Hz] : 44100 Type : binaural HRTF-lib : CATT1_PLAIN_44.DAT Headphone : BEYER_DT990PRO_PLAIN_44.DAT Head dir. : 2.500 5.000 -2.500 Receiver : 1 Init Delay : 39.69 ms Aux Delay : 0.00 ms No of samples : 223369 stereo samples Length corresponds to 5.065 seconds @44100Hz -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D:\temp\V72DOC\ADD\Ftb_a0_01.wav is Anechoic file C:\CATT32\ANECHOIC\FTB_44_AN.WAV (1998-02-19 13:12:12) Convolved with D:\TEMP\V72DOC\ADD\E_A0_01_L.SIM (1999-09-23 08:54:56) and D:\TEMP\V72DOC\ADD\E_A0_01_R.SIM (1999-09-23 08:54:56) Scale-factors for the WAV calibration utility: Filters : 4.09200E+06

7-3

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

WAV-file : 2.83603E-06 Total : 1.16050E+01 (21.3 dB) Not yet calibrated/scaled --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The calibration count (last line) gives a measure of the numerical degradation of the file (see WAV-file calibration below). Utilities|Information|HRTF-library... Displays information about a binary CATT HRTF library. Example:
Description Copyright Subject/Type HRTF-type Normalization FIR-size Sample-rate : : : : : : : CATT-Acoustic v7 HRTFs CATT 1997 Unknown single person plain 256 44100Hz

Utilities|Information|Headphone filter... Displays essential information about a binary CATT headphone filter file. Example:
Description Copyright Subject/Type Left/Right For HRTFs w. FIR-size Sample-rate Description Copyright Subject/Type Left/Right For HRTFs w. FIR-size Sample-rate : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Beyer Dynamic CATT 1998 HRS II same filter normalization 4096 44100Hz Beyer Dynamic CATT 1997 Unknown same filter normalization 512 44100Hz DT990 Pro

plain

DT-990

plain

Utilities|WAV-file Player... Opens the CATT WAV-file player (can also be made to open automatically after a convolution or a WAV-file addition). The player has three modes. Single file player:

7-4

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

A/B file player:

Play-list player: A CATT play-list is a text-file. Example:

CATT-PLAYLIST VERSION = 0 C:\Temp\mt_A1_21.WAV C:\Temp\mt_A1_22.WAV "C:\Temp\folder 2\mt_A0_21.WAV" "C:\Temp\folder 2\mt_A0_22.WAV"

where "" must be used for filenames with space. CATT-PLAYLIST has to be on line one and the VERSION statement on line two.

Utilities|File scaling... Enables scaling of either a Lake SIM-file or a Windows WAV-file. The scale factor to be selected must be > 1 and scales the data down. Lake SIM-file (adds factor to text header) (File-type)

Scaling

The selected factor is added to the header so that the calibration utility below can keep track of the total scale-factor. The major reason for scaling a SIM-file is that it may overflow the 24-bit integer convolution in a Lake DSP convolver. An output SIM-file from the BPP module is optimally scaled so it should normally not be necessary. For software convolution using the BPP module, SIM-file scaling is never required.

7-5

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Windows WAV-file (updates SCL-file if found) (File-type)

Scaling

The software convolver reads and writes WAV-files. The processed sound is auto-scaled for maximum dynamic range. If, however, several receiver-positions in the same hall are going to be compared their relative levels must be correct. With files created by CATT, an SCL-file is also maintained by the scaling and calibration utilities and documents each scaling operation. This utility is not used very often. Utilities|File calibration Enables relative calibration of either Lake SIM-files or Windows WAVfiles (with corresponding SCL-files). Note: Only files created or manipulated by CATT-Acoustic can be correctly calibrated and SIM-file calibration is only necessary for use with a Lake convolver. For details on calibration, see section 7.3. Lake SIM-files (contained in a single folder) (File-type) This utility performs relative calibration of all SIM-files in the selected folder that matches the specified pattern. Lake SIM-files (across several folders) (File-type) Calibration

Calibration

This utility performs relative calibration of all SIM-files in the folders that are listed in the selected list-file and that matches the specified pattern. The list-file is simply a text-file listing the folders with one entry/line. This utility is useful should more source-receiver combinations than allowed for by 260 sources and/or 100 receivers be used. Windows WAV-file (corr. SCL-files required) (File-type) Calibration

Relative calibration of a set of Windows WAV-format files. The software convolver reads and writes WAV-files. The created WAV-files are auto-scaled for maximum dynamic range. This utility uses the specified WAV-file template and performs relative calibration of all WAV-files in the same folder that have SCL-files stating exactly the same anechoic source-file as in the template. The SCL-file is updated so the same WAV-file can be calibrated again against other files. If the scale-factors of the WAV-files are very different, repeated calibration may cause noticeable numerical degradation. The SCL-file therefore also keeps track on the calibration count as a measure of the degradation (quantization noise). The Utilities|Information| Windows WAV-file utility above reads and displays the contents of an SCL-file if present. Note: to use the WAV-file addition utility, the WAV-files do not have to be calibrated in advance since the scale-factors are applied at addition. WAV-file calibration can also be performed by the Sequence module, Section 8. Utilities|SIM-file addition Adds created SIM-files to enable multiple source auralization where each source sends out the same source material (only available in the full auralization version). The result SIM-file can then be convolved with anechoically recorded material in the usual manner. To make SIM-file addition meaningful, the SIM-files must be compatible with each other. To determine the compatibility the file-name syntax E_ss_rr_f.SIM is relied upon and also that the SIMfile header has not been altered after post-processing (other than by CATT utilities described in this section). The following properties are checked:

7-6

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

same receiver-model (for binaural also the headphone eq and HRTFs must be the same) same receiver position (file-name check) same sample-rate same head-direction (note that headdirection source cannot have been used at prediction since the headdirections then will be incompatible)

If in doubt about compatibility, use the Utilities|Information menu to display the SIM-file header. Gain Additional wideband gain for the selected SIM-file. Aux delay Auxiliary electrical delay. Impulse response (SIM-file) addition Impulse response (SIM-file) addition

Update

Impulse response (SIM-file) addition

Updates the selected SIM-files with gain and delay settings. If Enter is pressed when gain or delay edit boxes are active it performs the same action. The list-box displays all selected files (only the base-name where e.g. for binaural _L.SIM and _R.SIM will be appended at addition). It also displays the initial delay (source-receiver delay, ms), current gain (dB), and auxiliary delay (electrical, ms) for each file. Add first SIM-file/Add SIM-file(s) Impulse response (SIM-file) addition

Displays a standard Open File dialog. The first file selected determines the compatibility. Sub-sequently, only compatible files and such that are not already listed can be added. It is sufficient to select e.g. the left file (E_ss_rr_L.SIM) for binaural and e.g. the omni (E_ss_rr_W.SIM) file for B-format. When the actual addition is performed all files required for a format will be used. Several files can be selected in one operation by using multiple selection in the Open dialog (Shift-LMB, Ctrl-LMB etc.). Remove Remove the currently selected file from the list-box. Result SIM-file base-name Impulse response (SIM-file) addition Impulse response (SIM-file) addition

The base-name of the resulting SIM-file. M.SIM, _L/_R.SIM, _W/_X/_Y/_Z.SIM, or _1/_2/_3/_4/_5.SIM_will be added depending on receiver model.

7-7

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

OK

Impulse response (SIM-file) addition

Performs the addition and creates the result SIM-file as well as a plot-file with the same base-name as the result-file and with _I.PLT added (e.g. E_01_I.PLT). The 2DA plot-file shows plot-frames indicating the direct sound of each source as well as file-names, Gain and Aux-delay of each added file. Note: due to headphone eq a delay may exist so that the actual direct sound comes a few ms after the dotted line. This delay has no audible effect since it is contained in all responses added. Utilities|WAV-file addition Adds created stereo/binaural WAV-files to enable multiple source auralization but with possibly different anechoic source material for each source (only available in the full auralization version). To make WAV-file addition meaningful, the WAV-files must be compatible with each other. To determine the compatibility an accompanying SCL-file is required (created at convolution). The following properties are checked: same receiver-id same receiver-model (stereo or binaural, for binaural also the headphone eq and HRTFs must be the same) same receiver position (info saved in SCL-file created at convolution based on SIM-file name) same sample-rate same head-direction (note that headdirection Source cannot be used at prediction since the head-directions then will be incompatible.

If in doubt about compatibility, use Utilities|Information that can display WAV/SCL-file headers. WAV-files do not have to be relative calibrated to take part in addition since all scale-factors are applied properly at addition. The addition is documented in a text-file (.TXT) with the same name as the created sum WAV-file (which WAV-files have been added etc.) so that operations can be tracked. Note: for addition of B-format or 5-channel use the MultiVolver that will convolve and add in one step. Gain Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

Additional wideband gain for the selected WAV-file. A major problem with WAV-file addition is that the scale-factors in most anechoic WAV-files are unknown. The Gain factor can be used to compensate so that if it is known that a weak signal has been amplified e.g. 10dB before sampling as compared to a strong signal, the weak-signal WAV-file must be assigned a Gain of -10dB so that the two anechoic signals will be compatible in level. The addition is made using floating point so there is no major numeric loss in adding a weaker signal to a stronger. Note: v8.0 does not use scale information in anechoic WAV-info files (AWI-files).

7-8

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Aux delay Auxiliary electrical delay. Update

Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

Updates the selected WAV-file with Gain and Aux delay settings. If Enter is pressed when Gain or Aux delay edit boxes are active it performs the same action. The SIM and WAV scale factors are both automatically taken into account when adding. The list-box displays all selected files. It also displays the initial delay (source-receiver delay), current gain, and auxiliary delay for each file. Add first WAV-file/Add WAV-file(s) Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

Displays a standard Open File dialog. The first file selected determines the compatibility. Subsequently, only compatible files can be added. Several files can be selected in one operation by using multiple selection in the Open dialog (Shift-LMB, Ctrl-LMB etc.). Remove WAV-file Remove the currently selected file from the list-box. Result WAV-file name The full name of the resulting WAV-file. Auto play after addition Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

If selected, the resulting sum WAV-file is played automatically after completed addition using the CATT WAV-file player. OK Performs the addition and creates the result WAV-file. Some notes on the addition with a schematic explanation with 6 files to be added: i a 1, 2, 3,... s
1 2 3 4 5 6 ->

Binaural/Stereo WAV-file addition

initdelay auxdelay data in file 1, 2, 3, sum of files 1-6

iiiiiiiiiiiaaaaaaaaaalllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll iiiaaaaaaaaaa2222222222222222222222222222222222222 iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiaaaaa3333333333333333333333333333333333333 iiiiiiiiiiiaaaaaaaaaa444444444444444 iiiiiiaaaaaaaaaa555555555555555555555555555 iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiaaaaa66666666666666666666666 sssssssssssssssssssssss

i.e. the new sum WAV-file will start at t_start= minimum(initdelay+auxdelay) time (i.e. determined by file 2) and last to t_end= minimum(initdelay+auxdelay+datalength) time (i.e. determined by file 4) and be t_end-t_start long. It is thus of interest to have all WAV-files of similar lengths (delays taken into account) to get a long enough common sound to listen to.

7-9

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Sample use of this utility is binaural auralization of stereo replay: 1) Place two sources on stage, one for the left channel and one for the right channel; 2) Predict and post-process both sources using a head-direction typically in-between the two speakers; 3) Convolve the left speaker impulse responses with the left channel of the anechoic WAVfile and then the right response with the right channel of the anechoic file; 4) Select WAV-file addition and add the two WAV-files and binaural auralization of stereo replay is created. The initial delay (source to receiver) and any extra (aux) delay will be taken into account and just like for SIM-file addition (that assumes the same anechoic material for all sources) the aux delay can be altered. It is most natural to use the WAV-file addition utility with several sources using different material (e.g. stereo, 5-channel (see below) replay, or speech+noise) but it can also be used to add WAV-files using the same anechoic material just like the SIM-file addition (but it is less efficient). Note: stereo to binaural can also be performed by the MultiVolver using a 2x2 setup. Utilities|File conversion 16-bit INT -> Mono WAV Conversion from a mono "signed 16-bit integer" to Windows WAV-format (extension is changed to .WAV). This utility may come in handy when converting anechoic material from other sources (many sound-file conversion programs can create header-free signed 16-bit integer files). Also the samplerate in Hz needs to be specified. MATLAB MAT -> Lake SIM Conversion from MATLAB v4 .MAT [MATLAB] to Lake SIM-format (extension is changed to .SIM). The data has to be properly scaled since the Lake-format files are 32-bit integers. For Lake convolution only 24 bits or less can be used (see Lake manuals), for software convolution the full 32 bits can be used. Note: this utility only reads the first variable in the file - save only the IR from MATLAB or save it as the first variable. File conversions File conversions

7-10

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Lake SIM -> MATLAB MAT

File conversions

Conversion from Lake SIM-format to binary MATLAB v4 MAT-format (extension is changed to .MAT). The MATLAB variable name of the vector will be sim_data. If the sample-rate is contained in the SIM-file header, it is named sim_fs. Lake SIM -> MLSSA TIM File conversions

Conversion from Lake SIM to a binary MLSSA TIM-file [MLSSA] (extension is changed to .TIM). Also the sample-rate in Hz needs to be specified. The sample-rate may be defined in the SIM-file header. If it is, it is compared to the given value. Lake SIM -> Windows WAV mono File conversions

Conversion from Lake SIM to Windows WAV mono (extension is changed to .WAV). The sample-rate may be defined in the SIM-file header. If it is, it is compared to the given value. This utility enables direct listening to a IR (equivalent to first convolving it with a unit impulse and then listen), see note below. Lake SIM -> Windows WAV stereo File conversions

Conversion from Lake SIM to Windows WAV stereo (extension is changed to .WAV). The sample-rate may be defined in the SIM-file header. If it is, it is compared to the given value. Left and right SIM-files, output WAV-file name, and the sample-rate needs to be specified. This utility enables direct listening to a BRIR (equivalent to first convolving it with a unit impulse and then listen). MLSSA TIM -> MATLAB MAT File conversions

Conversion from MLSSA TIM to MATLAB v4 MAT-format (extension is changed to .MAT). The MATLAB variable name of the data will be tim_data and the sample-rate in Hz will be tim_fs. The data can optionally be saved as double precision floats instead of single precision. Note: only a PC MATLAB can read the single precision format. Windows WAV mono -> MATLAB MAT File conversions

Conversion from Windows WAV mono to binary MATLAB v4 MAT-format (extension is changed to .MAT). The MATLAB variable name of the vector will be wav_data and the sample-rate in Hz will be wav_fs. Windows WAV mono -> Lake SIM File conversions

Conversion from Windows WAV mono to Lake SIM-format (extension is changed to .SIM). Windows WAV stereo -> Lake SIM File conversions

Conversion from Windows WAV mono to two Lake SIM-format (one SIM-file/channel, _L.SIM and _R.SIM will be added to the name extension is changed to .SIM). MLSSA TIM -> Windows WAV stereo File conversions

Conversion from MLSSA TIM to Windows stereo WAV-format (extension is changed to .WAV). This utility enables direct listening to a measured BRIR using a sound-card. Left, and right TIM-file and the output WAV-file names need to be specified. Note: the sample-rate has to be one supported by Windows soundcard (typically 11025, 22050 or 44100 Hz) or it will not play correctly.

7-11

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Utilities|SIM-file Filtering... A general FIR-filtering tool for SIM-files (only available in the full auralization version). Typical use is to apply a loudspeaker on-axis filter, band-limit the response, or apply a head-phone eq (for binaural SIM-files where no eq was made during processing i.e. the headphone "(none)" was selected in Preferences). This tool is quite open and general and not a lot of checks are performed on the validity of a filtering action (mainly that samplerates are compatible for TIM and Headphone eq). Input SIM-file SIM-file to be filtered. FIR filter SIM-file filtering SIM-file filtering

FIR-filter file-name. The file can be in the following formats: MATLAB v4 (.MAT), MLSSA (.TIM) or a CATT headphone eq filter (.DAT, assumes that left and right filters are identical). Output SIM-file SIM-file to be created as a result of filtering. Truncate output to input length SIM-file filtering SIM-file filtering

If a vector length N is filtered with an FIR-filter length M the resulting length is N+M-1. This option makes also the output be N long by skipping the M-1 last samples. For a typical long decaying SIM-file and a short filter this truncation will not be audible. Normalize filter to unit power gain SIM-file filtering

Typically, filters used should have the proper normalization but this option gives a reasonable overall gain change by normalizing the filter to unit power gain. Utilities|SIM-file Sample-rate Conversion A tool that can samplerate convert SIM-files (only available in the full auralization version).

7-12

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Input SIM-file SIM-file to be converted. Sample-rate in Sample-rate of the file to be converted. Output SIM-file SIM-file to be created as a result of conversion. Sample-rate out

SIM-file sample-rate conversion

SIM-file sample-rate conversion

SIM-file sample-rate conversion

SIM-file sample-rate conversion

Sample-rate of the converted file. The OK button is disabled for not supported conversions. Conversions implemented are:
From/To

16000 22050 32000 44100 48000 88200 96000

16000 x

22050 -

32000 x -

44100 x

48000 x

88200

96000

x x x x x

x x x

Utilities|Calculate IACC... Calculates the Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient for a binaural SIM-file pair. Select one of the files in the pair (left or right) and the IACC will be displayed, See Theory for details. As a General settings option, IACC can also be calculated after completed postprocessing and be put in the SIM-file header. Note: the responses are assumed to have no significant common initial delay since that is how CATT SIM-files are created. Utilities|Crosstalk Cancelling... Crosstalk cancelling enables loudspeaker listening to binaurally recorded or simulated sound. The background is that when listening to a binaural recording over loudspeakers (in a typical symmetrical stereo configuration), the left as well as the right ear is reached by sound from both left and right speakers while for binaural replay the left signal is supposed to be sent only to the left ear and the right signal only to the right ear. The crosstalk cancellation technique uses the HRTFs for the angle to the loudspeakers from the listening position and creates filters that cancels the "error" signal i.e. the signal from left to right and right to left. If this can be done perfectly, one will hear the same sound as one would in headphones but there are several problems that need to be addressed. The implementation here uses the so called "Shuffler" filter configuration and a more thorough description and discussion is found in the Theory section. The description below concentrates on the interface.

7-13

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Spacing, S

Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Loudspeaker spacing as measured between the acoustic centers. Distance, D Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Loudspeaker distance as measured between the center of the head and the line joining the two loudspeakers. Apply loudspeaker correction Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Optionally uses two supplied inverse filters to correct the on-axis response of the loudspeakers used. Files must be Finite Impulse Responses (FIRs) in MATLAB v4 PC format and be created for the samplerate used, see Theory. There is no practical limit on the length of these filters. (Crosstalk option) Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

The Crosstalk cancellation can operate in three basic ways: Normal operation operates on a binaural room impulse response SIM-file pair (without headphone eq). The new SIM-file pair will have its first filename character changed to "X" (E_ss_rr_L.SIM becomes X_ss_rr_L.SIM) and the "HEADPHONE EQ=" fields in the SIM-file headers are changed from "(none)" to "TRANSAURAL" so that pure binaural and transaural cannot accidentally be mixed in SIM- and WAV-file additions). The new SIM-file pair can then be convolved with anechoic sound in the normal manner but the resulting WAV-file is to be played over loudspeakers instead of over

7-14

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

headphones. If the same basic response is to be used for headphone replay the original SIM-file pair can be filtered for headphones using the SIM-file filtering utility or the Sequence processing module. In this operational mode, the samplerate is given by the SIM-file pair. Left (or Right) channel calibration creates calibration filters for finding and evaluating the sweetspot, see Theory. When convolved with e.g. pink noise they will give a left (or right) calibration signal. If the filters work well and the listener is in the sweetspot, sound should appear to come only in the left ear. A good way to find the sweetspot is to cover the left ear and move the head sideways until a minimum in the right ear is heard. When the left ear is uncovered the sound should be as if it was played in the left headphone only. In this operational mode the desired samplerate must be specified and the files created are calib_L.SIM and calib_R.SIM where calib is the given base-name. Create X-talk filters only creates dedicated crosstalk cancellation filters that can be used to process e.g. binaural recordings. In this operational mode the desired samplerate must be specified and the files created are xtalk_L_L.SIM, xtalk_L_R.SIM, xtalk_R_L.SIM and xtalk_R_R.SIM where xtalk is the given base-name. To crosstalk cancel a binaural recording the simplest is to use the MultiVolver with a 2x2 setup. The dummy head should typically have had microphones at the blocked ear canal entrance but also simple clip-on binaural microphones can give excellent results. For an overview of available binaural microphones see: http://onramp.uscom.com/~soundpro/compare.html (Filter smoothing) Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Various options for smoothing affect how well the cancellation works and the size of the sweetspot. See Theory for a description of the filters S and A and further details. HRTFs smoothes the S and A (HRTF) magnitudes before creating the crosstalk cancellation filters. Makes the left and right HRTFs have minimum phase with an added pure delay to A. In general, smoothing the HRTFs affects the crosstalk canceling ability too much. smoothes the magnitude of the S+A and S-A filters and forces them to minimum phase before inverting. In general, smoothing the filters improves the crosstalk canceling ability at the expense of affecting the direct signal for the higher frequencies (i.e. left to left and right to right). Recommended settings are 1) both options set to None or 2) HRTFs set to None and Filters set to 1/3-octave smoothing (or finer). Samplerate Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Filters

The desired samplerate for calibration and dedicated crosstalk filters. For Normal operation the samplerate is taken from the SIM-file pair given.

7-15

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

10kHz LP-filter

Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Applies a 10 kHz low-pass filter to the resulting crosstalk cancelled filters. This has the effect of making the localization less sensitive to head rotations and widens the sweetspot somewhat at the expense of some high frequency loss. SIM-file name Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Name of the SIM-files to read and/or create. For Normal operation either the left SIM-file (e.g. E_A0_01_L.SIM) or the right (E_A0_01_R.SIM) is selected and (for the example) X_A0_01_L.SIM and X_A0_01_R.SIM are created, i.e. the first letter is changed to X. Note: to enable cross-talk cancellation of files created for HeadScape, an exception is if the first letter is H where the old files instead are overwritten (make a copy in another folder before processing). The reason is that SIM-files created for HeadScape have the syntax HhhhvvvL.SIM and HhhhhvvvR.SIM and HeadScape cannot load files if they start with X. If files are created for HeadScape (but without headphone eq) followed by a batch crosstalk cancellation in the Sequence module, the tracking mechanism can be used to rotate the sound around the head with a transaural replay. If nothing else, this is a great way of testing the head-tracking and cross-talk operation. Save Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Saves the current settings for the current User (see File|Preferences). If crosstalk cancellation is applied using the Sequence processing module the latest saved settings are used. OK Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Performs the requested processing and saves the settings for the current User. Cancel Crosstalk cancelling for loudspeaker replay

Leaves the dialog without saving the settings (unless Save has been pressed). Utilities|Make Anechoic WAV-file Info Compilation of an anechoic WAV info file (AWI-file) for an anechoic recording. The information is used e.g. when the Post-processing:Utilities menu for file information is selected and it can also be used while specifying data in the source-file. For future revisions, this calibration info will also be used with WAVfile addition. Anechoic file The anechoic WAV-file to compile the info-file for. Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

7-16

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Distance (Anechoic recording)

Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

The distance that the recording was made at, measured from the acoustical center of the source. Pre-amp (Anechoic recording) Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

Assuming that, for example, the calibration file (see below) is recorded with a setting of 0 dB on the microphone pre-amp and the recording is made with a setting of 10 dB, 10 dB should be entered here. The reason for this option is that a fixed-level calibration signal may have been made that is stronger or weaker than the actual material recorded thus forcing a preamplification change to record to full scale on e.g. a DAT or a PC sound-card. Source (Anechoic recording) For example "Guitar", for reference purposes. Description (Anechoic recording) Compile an anechoic WAV info-file Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

A more detailed description, for reference purposes. For extended information, place the description in a file and enter the filename. Copyright (Anechoic recording) For reference purposes. Measured SPL (Calibration) Compile an anechoic WAV info-file Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

The measured SPL of the calibration signal (e.g. a loudspeaker sending out pink noise). This info is used to calculate the Lp1m in octave-bands of the source. Note: if no calibration signal has been measured but the level of the source at 1m on axis is known anyway (or can be estimated) the anechoic WAV-file itself can be given as the calibration file together with the known value at e.g. 1 kHz. Calibration file (Calibration) Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

A WAV-file (at the same sample-rate as the recording) containing the calibration signal at a known level. Name (Recommended directivity) Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

If a directivity is known for the source in question, it should be entered here. OK Compile an anechoic WAV info-file

Creates the WAV info-file. The filename will be wavname.AWI in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC assuming that the name of the WAV-file is wavname.WAV). If calibration info is given, the SPL at 1m is calculated as an average using a Hanning window with 50% overlap sliding over the data in the calibration file and the anechoic file. Also standard deviations are displayed to give an idea of how much the level varies during the sample. The following Utilities menu items are only available in special full versions with add-ons for Lake DSP convolution processors [Lake] or for users that are about to measure HRTFs or headphone eq.

7-17

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Utilities|Create Sphere HRTFs... This item creates analytical HRTFs from a solid sphere that can be compiled into a CATT-format HRTF-library (see below). A short text-file describing the HRTFs is created in the selected HRTF folder (name HRTF_info.TXT). HRTF folder Folder for the HRTFs to be created. Sphere diameter (HRTF information) Diameter of the solid sphere. Create individual sphere HRTFs Create individual sphere HRTFs

Sphere ear angle (HRTF information)

Create individual sphere HRTFs angle front

Angle from the front to the point on the sphere surface to act as ear.

FIR size (HRTF information) Size of the created FIRs. For better results use long filters. FIR sample-rate (HRTF information) Sample-rate for the created HRTFs. Frontal normalization (HRTF information)

Create individual sphere HRTFs

Create individual sphere HRTFs

Create individual sphere HRTFs

Makes HRTFs be frontal flat by dividing all HRTFs by the frontal ones. To be used with headphone eq normalization frontal. Without this option checked the headphone eq type must be plain. When compiling an HRTF library from the created filters the normalization type most be set according to this choice (see the created HRTF_info.TXT). Utilities|Compile HRTF-library... This item compiles individual measured or analytical HRTFs into a CATT-format HRTFlibrary. Libraries are created in the CATT-folder HRTFs folder and can then be selected in Preferences. Details on creating new HRTFs are supplied only with the special Lake add-on version.

7-18

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

HRTF MAT-files folder Folder where the HRTFs in MATLAB v4 format are to be read. Type (HRTF information) sphere artificial head person

Compile HRTF-library

Compile HRTF-library

HRTFs originate from an analytical sphere approximation HRTFs originate from a measurement on an artificial head HRTFs originate from an individual

person average HRTFs originate from some kind of average over several persons simple ITD/ILD other HRTFs are simple Inter-aural Time and Inter-aural Level Differences HRTFs are of any other kind (specify in Description) Compile HRTF-library

Sphere diameter (HRTF information)

If Type = sphere : Diameter of the solid sphere. To be set the same as when the sphere HRTFs were created (see the created HRTF_info.TXT). Sphere ear angle (HRTF information) Compile HRTF-library

If Type = sphere : Angle from the front to the point on the sphere surface to act as ear. To be set the same as when the sphere HRTFs were created (see the created HRTF_info.TXT). Normalization (HRTF information) What kind of normalization the HRTFs have: Compile HRTF-library

7-19

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

plain

the HRTFs are as directly measured at the blocked ear-canal entrance

frontal the HRTFs are measured at the blocked ear-canal entrance but all filters are divided by the frontal filters (requires frontal filters to be included in the headphone eq) diffuse the HRTFs are measured at the blocked ear-canal entrance but all filters are divided by an average "diffuse-field" HRTF. Requires the headphone used to have a corresponding diffuse-field eq. other Any other measurement type (e.g. measurements at the ear drum). Use Description to document. This will require special headphone eq filters measured to fit to the particular normalization or HRTF measurement made. Compile HRTF-library

Sample-rate (HRTF information)

Sample-rate of the FIRs specified in the MAT-files and of the created library. FIR-size (HRTF information) Compile HRTF-library

Size of the FIR-filters to be used for the library. Must be the same size or larger than the FIRs specified in the MAT-files. Library name Compile HRTF-library

Library name (max 28 characters since a string specifying normalization and sample rate is added). Example: for 44100 Hz and plain normalization the full name will be name_plain_44.DAT. Description (Library information) Compile HRTF-library

Library description (max 30 characters) to be used e.g. for the name of the person or artificial head whose HRTFs have been measured. For reference purposes only. Copyright (Library information) Name of the HRTF copyright holder and other similar information. Subject/Type (Library information) Compile HRTF-library Compile HRTF-library

Name of the measurement subject such as an individuals name or type of artificial head. Utilities|Make Headphone Filter... This item creates a CATT-format headphone eq filter from MATLAB v4 MAT-files. The resulting filter is placed in the CATT-folder HEADPHONES and can be selected in Prefs for processing. Filters are assumed to have been measured at the blocked ear-canal entrance unless normalization type other is specified. Details on creating new filters are supplied only with the special Lake add-on version.

7-20

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

FIR MAT-file Name of filter-file in MATLAB v4 format. Separate left and right filters

Make headphone filter

Make headphone filter

Uses separate left and right headphone filters. Note that this option will make the eq be tightly coupled to a particular set of HRTFs or a particular pair of headphones that has be found to have different left/right responses. For HRTFs with normalization (Filter information) Make headphone filter

Specify what type of HRTF normalization the filter is made for. Unless the type other is used HRTF and filter normalization cannot accidentally be mixed. Sample-rate (Filter information) Make headphone filter

Sample-rate of the MAT-file filter and the created CATT-format eq file. FIR size (Filter-information) Make Headphone filter

Size of the equalization FIR-filters. Must be the same size or larger than the FIR(s) specified in the MAT-file(s). Headphone (Filter-information) Brand name and type of headphone. Copyright (Filter-information) Make Headphone filter Make Headphone filter

Name of company that holds the copyright of the measurement and similar information.

7-21

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Subject/Type (Filter-information)

Make Headphone filter

The subject used for the eq measurement e.g. an individual's name or type of artificial head. Filter name (Filter-information) Make Headphone filter

Descriptive headphone name e.g. "BRAND_TYPE". Max 28 characters, normalization type and sample-rate will be added. Utilities|5-Ch Binaural Setup... This is a very special option and should only be used if the steps involved are fully understood. It is not meant for general-purpose room acoustic simulation but for research and experimentation with various recording and replay techniques. Basically, it creates binaural IR SIM-files as from five surround speakers.

Distance

Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup

Distance from the listening position (receiver 01 placed at 0;0;0). Angle Angle from the negative y-axis. Symmetric setup Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup

Makes R1 and R2 be mirror copies of L1 and L2 and forces C0 to be at x = 0. Include initial delays in response (for Lake convolution) Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup The distances to the speakers affect the initial delay and 1/r attenuation but all responses normally start at time 0 and the initial delay is included in the SIM-file header just as for normally created SIM-files. With WAV-file convolution/addition and SIM-file addition the delays are taken into account. With Lake convolution the delays will have to be added by DSP unless this option is checked. The different initial delays are then taken into account by

7-22

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

shifting the responses in time so that only the response of the closest speaker starts at time zero. Create GEO-files for non-anechoic setup/mic placements Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup Optionally prediction project-files are created: MASTER.GEO, SRC.LOC, REC.LOC, Speakers.PRD, Mics.PRD that can be used as templates to create a non-anechoic 5channel simulation either by using the simple shoebox shape with diffusing walls (see instructions in the created GEO-file) or by using the receiver layout for an existing room model. Also receivers are created corresponding to mic placements. Mics.PRD: Source A0 represents a natural source, receivers 00,11,12,21,22 represent mic positions (same as speaker positions). Speakers.PRD: Sources C0,L1,L2,R1,R2 represent speaker positions describe below, receiver 01 represents the listening position. Sample-rate Sample-rate of the created SIM-files. Result folder Folder were all created files are placed. OK Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup Anechoic 5-channel binaural setup

5 speakers, all pointed at an assumed listener and 5 SIM-file Left/Right pairs, containing the HRTFs concerned, are created in the selected folder: C0
E_C0_01_L.SIM E_C0_01_R.SIM E_L1_01_L.SIM E_L1_01_R.SIM E_L2_01_L.SIM E_L2_01_R.SIM E_R2_01_L.SIM E_R2_01_R.SIM E_R1_01_L.SIM E_R1_01_R.SIM Front Center

L1
Front Left

R1 01

x
Back Left

Back Right

L2

R2

Front Right

The name syntax is the same as for normally created binaural impulse response SIM-files and can be used as such (SIM-file addition and the WAV-file addition after convolution). In addition a plot-file Ch5.PLT is created showing the speaker layout. SIM-files created are optimized in level for Lake convolution (makes no difference for software convolution). The goal is to binaurally simulate 5 ideal loudspeakers as placed in a perfect anechoic chamber. The main use of this option is together with a Lake Huron to be able to listen to a 5-channel recording (e.g. Dolby Surround) binaurally. With software convolution, a mono WAV-file for each of the 5 channels can be convolved with the corresponding filters and the 5 resulting stereo WAV-files be added together (the

7-23

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

WAV-file addition utility). After convolution the WAV-files can be calibrated only if all 5 channels use the same anechoic material. WAV-file addition can be used to create a binaural replay of a simulated 5-channel system. Non-symmetrical setups are allowed so that, for example, the effect of non-symmetrical speaker placement can be studied. For the HRTFs and the headphone eq the Prefs settings are used just like for normal postprocessing and are documented in the SIM-file headers. Actual processing is simplest to perform in the MultiVolver using a 5x2 setup a.k.a. binaural down-mix. If a non-anechoic replay is desired (e.g. a living-room using another configuration of MASTER.GEO) a full prediction of C0->01, L1->01, L1->01, L1->01, L1->01 followed be binaural post-processing must be made so that new E_C0_01_L.SIM etc. will be created for a non-anechoic 5-speaker setup and a 5x2 process can be run again. To compare the 5-channel recording to a full binaural simulation (i.e. an artificial head recording, use A0->01 (head-direction source) but post-process binaurally and convolve with the anechoic singer.

7.2 Dialogs
The main Post-processing dialog controls settings for the combination of actions to be performed, which types of data-files to create, and software convolution options. For research and other special uses, it is possible to create only the early, or only the late part. For normal auralization both the early and the late part should of course be included. When Save and Run... is clicked the current settings-file is saved, and an ECH-file to post-process must be selected. The BPP module then performs the actions requested.

General settings
The General settings dialog controls basic settings such as receiver model, length and sample-rate of the FIR filters to be created.

7-24

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Length (Impulse response (IR))

General settings

Length in ms (per channel) of the total synthesized IR in Lake SIM-format. Each time this item is altered the corresponding IR size in points is updated. Recommended length corresponding to at least 40 dB decay (i.e. 2/3 of the reverberation time) or the truncation is clearly audible. Samplerate (Impulse response (IR)) General settings

Sample-rate (sampling frequency) of the synthesized and saved IR in Lake SIM-format. Each time this item is altered the corresponding IR Size is updated. For software convolution 44100 Hz is recommended, while for Lake convolution 48000 Hz is used with analog I/O and with digital I/O it depends on Huron settings (typically 44100 Hz). Transform-size (Reflections) General settings

Transform-size for use in digital octave-band filters, spline, Hilbert transform, IFFT, FFT etc. for synthesizing reflections in the IR. Each reflection path transfer function will be approximated with half this number of points ranging from 0 to the Nyqvist frequency. Recommended sizes: Rate, Hz 44100 48000 Size 512 (lower not allowed) 512 (lower not allowed) General settings

Apply source eq/gain (Reflections)

The normal case is to include the source eq/gain so that the created impulse responses are affected by the system eq/gain for an electro-acoustical source (it has no effect for a natural source). If this option is not checked, it is as if the acoustical input was through a system with unit gain but with the directivity of the loudspeaker selected. See Section 2.3 and 7.3 for details.

7-25

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Fractional delay (Reflections)

General settings

Fractional delay means that a reflection is not added at the nearest sample bin but an interpolation technique is used to add it at the exact "fractional" delay. Slightly longer processing but useful for some applications. (Stopband suppression)(Reflections) General settings

How much to suppress above the upper limit of the highest octave-band and optionally below the lower limit of the 125 Hz band (88 Hz). These settings affect only direct sound and firstorder specular reflections that are constructed using a spline magnitude, see Fig 7.3 in Section 7.3. Level (Stopband suppression) (Reflections) General settings

The suppression is made using a raised cosine bell from the lower limit of the 125 Hz octaveband to 0 Hz. Recommended value -40 dB. Suppr. below 88 Hz (Stopband suppression) (Reflections) General settings

How to handle the low frequency part of the reflection path transfer function amplitude (below the lower limit of the 125 Hz octave-band: 88 Hz). Suppresses the low frequencies using a raised cosine bell function 88 to 0 Hz. If "off" a flat response down to 0 Hz is created for each synthesized RP impulse response. LF suppression should in most cases be off since it requires large transform-sizes to work well. Recommended setting off. (Receiver-model) Type of directional response to use for the receiver. Omni-directional Apply no receiver directivity at all. Creates a mono omni-directional response (same as using a (1.0;0) Mono microphone). _M is added to the ECH-file base-name. Apply measured HRTFs. Headphone equalization and HRTF library are selected in Preferences (Prefs button). IACC can optionally be calculated and will be put in the SIM-file header (use Utilities| Information|Lake SIM-file to check the values) _L and _R are added to the ECH-file base-name. Mono microphone directivity. The microphone direction is the same as the head direction selected at prediction. See Mic settings below. _M is added to the ECH-file base-name. Create a two-channel conventional stereo IR where Mic settings and Angle between the mics can be selected. _L and _R are added to the ECH-file base-name. General settings

Binaural

Mono microphone

Blumlein/X-Y stereo

Mic settings (Receiver-model) Pre-made types available are: Omni, Cardioid, Hyper-cardioid, Super-Cardioid, Figure-of-8. For User defined and further details see Section 7.3.

7-26

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

B-format (WXYZ ) (Receiver-model) Creates four different responses according to the B-format as if measured by four microphones where X, Y, and Z are figure-of-8 types pointing in X, Y, and Z directions (X is at the front i.e. same as the head-direction) and W is an omni-directional response divided by 1.414. B-format [B-format] is mainly intended for use with a Lake Huron workstation running AniScape or a Convolver connected to a Speaker Decoder or a Binaural Decoder but also the The FIReverb Suite (MultiVolver) can be used. _W, _X, _Y and _Z are added to the ECH-file base-name. AniScape (Receiver model) (Full Huron version) When checking this button, the following is performed creating all required files for Lake AniScape: output samplerate is the selected one divided by 3. For Huron digital I/O typically choose 44100 Hz (giving reverb processing at 14700 Hz) and for Huron analog I/O choose 48000 Hz (giving reverb processing at 16000 Hz). reflection orders lower then 2 are excluded (Early part settings) a GEO-file for Lake AniScape is automatically created along with the SIM-files. The filesname syntax is E_ss_rr_.GEO and the file is created in the same folder as the SIM-files. The created GEO-file can be selected in the Huron Sound Field Filter VRack application for real time direct sound and first order reflections + a reverberation valid for the room model in question (that uses the names E_ss_rr_W/X/Y/Z.SIM in the same folder). If the actual room model is not rectangular an approximate rectangular outline is created in the GEO-file for first order reflection generation in AniScape. An alternative is to use The FIReverb Suite (PureVerb) that also can be set to create AniScape files (Options menu) 5-channel (Receiver model) Creates five different responses according to the 5-channel microphone setup selected. 5-channel is mainly intended for use with the MultiVolver. _1, _2, _3, _4 and _5 are added to the ECH-file basename corresponding to Center, Left, Right, Left surround and Right surround. Mic settings (Receiver model) The position, aim and directivity patterns for the five microphones. Pre-made types available are: Omni, Cardioid, Hyper-cardioid, Super-cardioid, Figure-of-8 and a special Figure-of-8+ (only the frontal lobe exists).

7-27

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Load/Save

5-channel microphone setup

Loads and saves a 5-channel mic setup file (.CH5). CH5-files can be exchanged with PureVerb and are normally kept in CATT-folder PV_MICS.

Plot

5-channel microphone setup

Plots the current setup and shows it in the stand-alone PLT-viewer. The plot includes the selected directivity patterns for reference and mouseover location read-out is shown in the status-bar. Example shows L,C,R cardioids and Ls,Rs figure-of-8.

Output-files
The resulting IR output data-files (Finite Impulse Responses, FIRs) will be saved to the same folder as the ECH-file and have names that are dependent on the receiver model selected.

7-28

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

The name syntax is (assuming that name.ECH was the original ECH-file name): Mono: Binaural/stereo: name_M.frm name_L.frm (left) name_R.frm (right) name_W.frm (omni) name_X.frm (x-axis figure-of-8 head-direction) name_Y.frm (y-axis figure-of-8) name_Z.frm (z-axis figure-of-8) name_1.frm (Center) name_2.frm (Left) name_3.frm (Right) name_4.frm (Left surround) name_5.frm (Right surround)

B-format:

5-channel:

The extension .frm stands for format: MATLAB v4 binary .MAT MLSSA ASCII .MLS

Lake DSP binary .SIM The SIM-file addition utility relies on the file-name syntax describe above. See the Utilities menu for manipulating output-files. Binaural/stereo examples below for ECH-file E_A0_22.ECH. Lake SIM-format (.SIM) for the convolver (IR) Output-files

Create a SIM-file for convolution using either the software convolver or the Lake DSP convolution processors. This is a binary file in the Lake SIM-format. The format allows any number of comments before the file-header. The BPP module uses this to document the prediction project name and some other parameters such as initial scale-factor needed for calibration. For Lake convolution the data is optimally scaled not to overflow the integer convolution. Software convolution auto-scales to give optimal dynamic range (introduces a second scale-factor). SIM-files will have the sample-rate and IR size selected in General settings. The header contents of a SIM-file can be inspected using a Utilities|Information submenu. Sample file-names: E_A0_22_L.SIM and E_A0_22_R.SIM. MLSSA ASCII-format (IR) Output-files

Create an MLS-file for MLSSA [MLSSA]. This is an ASCII-file to be imported to MLSSA by the "TRANSFER IMPORT" command. An alternative to use this function is to use the file conversion utility from SIM to TIM format. The resulting file can then be loaded into MLSSA by the "TRANSFER LOAD" command. MLS-files will have the sample-rate and IR size as selected in General settings. Sample file-names: E_A0_22_L.MLS and E_A0_22_R.MLS.

7-29

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

MATLAB binary-format (IR)

Output-files

Create a MAT-file for MATLAB v4 format [MATLAB]. This is a binary file. The BRIR vector (variable pp_ir) is calibrated i.e. no scaling is performed. The file contains various variables and is organized as follows (variable names): pp_initdelay pp_ir pp_intfs pp_auxdelay pp_procdelay pp_sincdelay pp_earlyp pp_latep pp_tailstart pp_lfsupp pp_supp pp_recmodel pp_micz pp_micx pp_decay delay source to receiver [s] the impulse response (left or right calibrated) internal sample-rate [Hz] short delay caused by processing [s] electrical loudspeaker delay [s] overall delay in samples if fractional delay is used (else = 0) early transform-size late transform-size late part start [s] LF suppression on/off (1/0) suppression value, < 0 [dB] receiver model (0 = omni, 1 = binaural, 2 = B-format, 3 = mic, 4 = stereo, 5 = 5-channel) microphone parameter if pp_recmodel = 3 or 4 microphone parameter if pp_recmodel = 3 or 4 corresponding to selected late part decay, > 0 [dB]

Sample file-names: E_A0_22_L.MAT and E_A0_22_R.MAT. (Plot-files) Output-files

Which plot-files in CATT PLT-format to generate. A plot list-file POSTPLT.TXT is created in the folder where the ECH-file is read and the view module automatically displays any created files. Filenames below assume that the ECH-file was name.ECH. Impulse response (early part only)(Plot-files) Output-files

Plot the IR with a length corresponding to 150% of the early part. Filename name_I.PLT. Octave-band decay curves (Plot-files) Output-files

Plots of octave-band decays before synthesis. Least-square fitted lines and RT values are shown. The decays always correspond to an omni microphone and are only generated if at least -30 dB has been reached for all octave-bands (or decay curves and reverberation times would be meaningless). Filename name_D.PLT.

Create files for HeadScape

This item is only enabled if binaural post-processing is selected and is useful either for including head rotations with the Walkthrough convolver or for the Lake DSP HeadScape application. Depending on application a different filename syntax is used for the created SIMfile, see Preferences. The processing needs a head-tracking data file with head rotation angles to be selected (.HTR). This file is for HeadScape use copied to the output folder after completed processing so when HeadScape is run all necessary files are present. Sample HTR-files are located in the CATT-folder HRTF. This option creates one pair of long filters as usual but also a set of short early-part filters to be head-tracked using HeadScape or to be used in a Walkthrough convolver script. To run

7-30

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

HeadScape the long filters and the HTR-file needs to be selected and the HeadScape application then expects to find the set of short filters in the same folder as the HTR-file. These files are preloaded into Huron RAM when the HeadScape Configure button is pressed. The tail filter will be truncated by HeadScape at 59392 taps. The structure of an HTR-file is: HURON1 N Hi [,] Vi ... Where HURON1 file identification tag N length of the early head-tracked FIRs at the selected samplerate ( 3840 for HeadScape use). Hi horizontal head angles from 0 to 360 (0 is straight ahead and > 0 is head turned to the left). Vi vertical head angles in from 30 to 90 (0 is straight a head, < 0 is looking up and > 0 is looking down). A maximum of 128 angle pairs (for HeadScape use) can be specified in any order and angle values can be specified with an accuracy of 0.5. Decimal point must be used. For HeadScape use the file-name syntax is : HhhhvvvL.SIM and HhhhhvvvR.SIM. For Walkthrough use the syntax is: E_ss_rr_hhhvvv_L.SIM and E_ss_rr_hhhvvv_R.SIM, the first part of the syntax is thus the same as for the long filter. Where hhh vvv

is the horizontal angle in the number of half degrees calculated as 2Hi giving values in the range 0..719. is the vertical angle in the number of half-degrees calculated as 2(90 + Vi)giving values in the range 120..360.

Example from E_A0_12.ECH: Files created for HeadScape use:

HURON1 3984 0.0 0 0.5 0 5.0 5.0 5.0 -5.0 ...

H000180L.SIM H001180L.SIM H010190L.SIM H010170L.SIM

H000180R.SIM H001180R.SIM H010190R.SIM H010170R.SIM

Files created for Walkthrough use:

HURON1 3984 0.0 0 0.5 0 5.0 5.0 5.0 -5.0 ...

E_A0_12_000180_L.SIM E_A0_12_001180_L.SIM E_A0_12_010190_L.SIM E_A0_12_010170_L.SIM

E_A0_12_000180_R.SIM E_A0_12_001180_R.SIM E_A0_12_010190_R.SIM E_A0_12_010170_R.SIM

7-31

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

For HeadScape use details, and for changes in possible filter lengths, consult current HeadScape documentation.

Early part response

Creation of an early part of the IR based on the predicted early part echogram (corresponding to the upper right graph in the Full detailed calculation plot-file E_ss_rr_oct.PLT), see section 7.3. Exclude orders lower than Early part response

This item is only available in a special version with addons for the Lake DSP AniScape application. For other software versions it is not displayed and the setting is always 0. It is a special purpose option to exclude e.g. the direct sound and all first order reflections (setting 2) to be handled in real time by some other method, e.g. by AniScape. Normal setting is 0 (i.e. direct sound and all early reflections are included). If not set to 0 a warning is issued if warnings are enabled.

Late part response

Settings for creation of the late part of the IR (i.e. the reverberation tail) based on the a simplification of the hall model and statistically generated taking into account spatial incidence from the actual model, see section 7.3.

(IR truncation)

Late part response

At which level in the decay-curve relative the direct sound, to truncate the reverberation tail generation (for the band with longest RT). Default User defined Truncate the IR at the selected total IR size. Selected by the user. A minimum of 40 dB is recommended (i.e. 2/3 of the RT) or the truncation may be heard. Be sure to match this value and the IR size so that truncation is done at the time intended (the decay can of course not be longer than the time corresponding to the selected IR size).

Convolution
Utility to run software convolutions. Convolves one- or two-channel impulse responses in Lake DSP SIM-format with anechoically recorded mono material in WAV-format. For convolution requiring > 2 channels the MultiVolver can be used. Floating-point convolution is used and any length of FIR can be convolved with any length of input-material (some temporary hard-disk workspace is required, see below). The resulting, processed, file is in

7-32

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

WAV-format auto-scaled to 16 bits for maximum dynamic range. A binary file containing scale-factor used and some other data is also created, the filename is Name.SCL if Name.WAV is the selected output filename, see below. The SCL-file contains all necessary information for the WAV-file calibration and addition utilities to perform relative calibration of processed files. To enable WAV-file calibration, and addition, a processed WAV-file needs to be accompanied by its SCL-file whenever it is copied to another location. The file info and WAV-file scaling/calibration/addition utilities reads the SCL-file if present. For details of calibration see 7.3 Theory. The sample-rate may be defined in the SIM-file header. If it is, it is checked so that it matches the sample-rate of the selected anechoic WAV-file. Note: The convolver may need temporary disk workspace of at least nine times the size of the input WAV-file or the output file will be truncated or may contain rubbish data. There are two reasons to this. The first reason is that the convolver uses a caching technique so that the first time an anechoic file is processed for a particular case it takes slightly longer but any subsequent convolutions will run twice as fast. The cache information is stored in PPW-files in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC and can be deleted at any time since they will be created again if needed (they are quite big for long WAV-files). The second reason is that the processing, if the anechoic WAV-file is large (> ca. 20 sec at 44.1 kHz), creates a temporary floating-point file that then is scaled to a full 16-bit WAV-file, these file are deleted after completion. It is recommended that all anechoic mono WAV-files follow a certain filename convention and they must be placed in the CATT-folder ANECHOIC. The naming convention is: mmmm_ff_AN.WAV where mmmm is the name of the source material (for example FT for Female Talker), and ff is the sample-rate (44 for 44100 Hz), and AN is for anechoic. A full example is thus FT_44_AN.WAV. If this file is convolved with E_A0_01_L.SIM and E_A0_01_R.SIM the processed file could be named FT_A0_01.WAV. This way both the source material (FT) and the source/receiver combination (A0_01) can be tracked. The sample-rate is stored in the WAV-file header and can be checked using the Utilities| Information menu along with other info. Note: the anechoic material provided with the full software version is copyrighted, see Section 1.1. For limited versions only a single 22050 Hz file can be used.

7-33

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Name (Input (anechoic) WAV-file)

Convolution

Anechoically recorded mono WAV-file from the CATT-folder ANECHOIC. The default file can be specified in Prefs. If non-anechoic material is used (e.g. binaurally recorded material that is to be cross-talk canceled it must also be put in ANECHOIC). Mono the specified input WAV is mono

Stereo left, Stereo right the specified input WAV is stereo and the left or the right channel is to be used as mono input (typically for cross-talk cancellation of binaural recordings or auralization of stereo speakers). Stereo mix the specified input WAV is stereo and the sum of the left and the right channel divided by 2 is to be used as mono input 2-channel convolution (binaural or stereo) (Impulse responses (SIM-files)) Convolution

If two-channel (stereo or binaural) or one-channel (mono) convolution will be performed. Left (Impulse responses (SIM-files)) Selection of the left (or mono) filter SIM-file. Right (Impulse responses (SIM-files)) Selection of the right filter SIM-file (if 2-channel). Name (Processed WAV-file (to be created)) Desired name of the processed file. See file-name syntax above. Auto play after completed convolution (Processed WAV-file (to be created)) Launches the CATT WAV-file player and automatically plays the file. Use less harddisk space Convolution Convolution Convolution Convolution Convolution

Does not use the cashing technique with PPW files as discussed above. Could be used to save temporary harddisk space. The convolution selected as a Sequence module step always uses the variant that is faster for repeated similar cases since that is a typical use of a sequence (to convolve e.g. responses from 16 positions in a room with the same WAV). For very long WAV-files the MultiVolver can be used since it does not use any extra hard disk space at all. Also, the WAV-files to be processed do not have to be in the ANECHOIC folder. On the other hand the MultiVolver does not create any SCL-files needed for calibration and WAV-file addition. OK Performs the convolution and optionally plays the file when finished. Convolution

7-34

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Walkthrough convolution
To be able to hear the sound of moving around in a room, the walkthrough convolver can be used. By calculating room responses along a walking path and associate each with a time the convolver interpolates and creates the effect of walking along the path while listening to the same sound playing. This convolver can also be used to create smooth transitions (morphing) between cases in e.g. continuos A/B tests (e.g. with or without room treatment, different loudspeaker alternatives etc). Note: doppler is not included.

Input (anechoic) mono WAV-file

Walkthrough convolver

Anechoically recorded mono WAV-file from the CATT-folder ANECHOIC. The default file can be specified in File|Preferences. (Walkthrough Convolver Script-file) Walkthrough convolver

A script-file that defines how the convolution is to be performed (.WCS). The syntax of a WCS-file is (note the Create button described below): CATT-WCS VERSION = version SIMFOLDER = "simfolder" INCHANNELS = inchannels INCHANNELSUFFIX = insuffix OUTCHANNELASSIGN = outassign MODE = mode UNIT = unit time "basename" ["tailname"] ... Where:

version simfolder inchannels

WCS-file version, 0 for v8.0 folder where all SIM-files are located, with full path given in "" number of input channels (e.g. 2 for binaural/stereo, 4 for B-format, 5 for 5-channel)

7-35

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

insuffix

the SIM-filename characters identifying the channel (e.g. "_L" "_R" for binaural or stereo). This suffix will be added to each SIM-file basename in the list, followed by ".SIM"

outassign

mono|stereo , i.e. if one mono WAV per channel is to be created or instead a set of stereo files. For binaural stereo is the normal choice but for B-format and 5-channel mono is often most practical. time_relative|time_absolute i.e. if the time associated with each response is relative or absolute ms|s|frames fps the unit times associated with each response is given in, i.e. milliseconds, seconds or frames with the given framerate (frames per second)
the time during which the given response is used (relative or absolute according to header MODE) is the base name of the SIM-file in "", e.g. "E_A0_12" optional: if basename is the SIM-file for head-tracking (e.g. "E_A1_23_000180") tailname is the full response for the corresponding position, i.e. "E_A1_23". The tail FIR is first loaded and then the first part is overwritten by the early part FIR.

mode

unit

time

basename tailname

Example of a script where the walkthrough goes from position 13 to 01, turns around, and walks back again looking backwards:
CATT-WCS VERSION = 0 FOLDER = "c:\v8doc\" INCHANNELS = 2 INCHANNELSUFFIX = "_L" "_R" OUTCHANNELASSIGN = stereo MODE = time_relative UNIT = frames 30 24 "E_A0_13" 24 "E_A0_12" 24 "E_A0_11" Walking from ... 10-04 removed here 13,12,1103,02,01 24 "E_A0_03" 24 "E_A0_02" 96 "E_A0_01" 4 "E_A0_01_000180" "E_A0_01" 4 "E_A0_01_010180" "E_A0_01" 4 "E_A0_01_020180" "E_A0_01" Turning around using HeadScape ... 030180-330180 removed here files13,12,1103,02,01 4 "E_A0_01_340180" "E_A0_01" 4 "E_A0_01_350180" "E_A0_01" 4 "E_A0_01_360180" "E_A0_01" 96 "E_A0_01_360180" "E_A0_01" 24 "E_A0_02_360180" "E_A0_02" 24 "E_A0_03_360180" "E_A0_03" Walking from 01,02,0311,12,13 24 "E_A0_04_360180" "E_A0_04" (cheating a bit using the old tail and just rotate the ... 05-10 removed here early part using HeadScape files) 24 "E_A0_11_360180" "E_A0_11" 24 "E_A0_12_360180" "E_A0_12" 24 "E_A0_13_360180" "E_A0_13"

7-36

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Create (Walkthrough Convolver Script-file)

Walkthrough convolver

A utility dialog that creates a basic script-file that can be filled in with a list of times and SIMfiles. Edit items correspond to WCS-file header items described above.

Processed WAV-file base-name, to be created

Walkthrough convolver

The resulting WAV-file base-name. The full name is created by adding the given INCHANNELSUFFIX and ".WAV". Examples: Binaural/stereo out-assign (one stereo file): basename_L_R.WAV. Binaural/stereo and mono out-assign (two mono files): basename_L.WAV and basename_R.WAV. B-format and mono out-assign (four mono files): basename_W.WAV basename_X.WAV basename_Y.WAV basename_Z.WAV. 5-channel and mono out-assign (five mono files): basename_1.WAV basename_2.WAV basename_3.WAV basename_4.WAV basename_5.WAV.

7-37

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

7.3 Theory
This section describes the background to the IR synthesis performed by the BPP module with some references to literature.

Impulse response scale and calibration

Created Impulse Responses (IRs) are normalized by not including the acoustical input spectrum (Lp1m_a in the source file) since the corresponding spectrum is included in the anechoic file. By removing the acoustical source spectrum it is also reasonable to switch anechoic material as long as the implied source has a directivity pattern similar to the one given in the source-file. The finally heard processed music/speech has been scaled in several steps, see Fig. 7.2.
Prediction Post-processing (sp) Performance xPa h sp Digital recording Convolution (sc) at 1 m distance (sa) s x a Pa scorr Playback system

yPa

Fig. 7.2 principal scale factors from anechoic recording to audible auralization. y = (x Pa s a ) h s p s c Where y final processed music/speech 16-bit integer format

(7.3-1)

xPa true pressure signal of anechoic music/speech material at 1 m in front of the real source [Pa]. xPa includes an extra, typically unknown, scale-factor if the recording was made at another distance. sa scale-factor when xPa was digitally recorded to 16-bit integer format [Pa ]. For the majority of available anechoic material this factor is unknown. impulse response as described above scale-factor applied at the binaural post-processing in the BPP module. The reason for this factor is the 24-bit integer SIM-file format used by the Lake DSP convolvers. The factor is saved in the SIM-format output-files header created by the BPP module. The SIM-file file information utility displays the value and the calibration and scaling utilities updates it. scale-factor applied at convolution to create 16-bit integer format. When using Lake DSP hardware this factor is unity. When software convolution is used this value is stored in the SCL-file with the same base-name as the processed material. The WAV-file information utility displays this value.
-1

h sp

sc

To arrive at absolute calibration the total scaling is thus:

7-38

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

y Pa = ys corr ; s corr = s a s p s c

(7.3-2)

Where yPa is the true pressure signal at the receiver position used in the particular hall modeled [Pa]. The playback system must then create this signal at the ears of a listener. scorr is the correction scale-factor [Pa] As can be seen from the various scale-factors above, absolute calibration may be very difficult to achieve and requires calibrated amplifiers and well known anechoic source material. Presently, the head-phone equalization filters applied are also not calibrated in level. Relative calibration for a particular anechoic source signal is, however, achievable. The relative level variations within a hall (or across halls) can be preserved by observing the two factors sp and sc. Since the software convolution auto-scales for maximum dynamic range the calibration for software convolution must be done after convolution by observing spsc. The WAV-file calibration and addition utilities do this automatically and, by using the corresponding SCLfiles, allows only for calibration of processed files that have exactly the same anechoic source-file. When using Lake DSP hardware the calibration can be done directly of the IRs before convolution so that the scaling of all responses are equal. See the post-processing flow illustration in Fig. 7.1 for an overview of both desktop/software and Lake DSP auralization including relative calibration.

Reflection path (RP) transfer function

The prediction module calculates early part octave-band echograms (125 Hz to 16 kHz). These echograms are saved in the ECH-file together with air absorption, reverberation time in octave-bands and other information.

Reflection path transfer function magnitude

Depending on reflection order, two different methods for reflection path magnitude synthesis methods are employed. For the direct sound (if present) and first-order specular reflections Frequency lines in-between the octave-band center-frequencies are interpolated using a cubic spline. To assure a smooth interpolation it is made for log(magnitude) vs. log(frequency). The interpolated function is then returned to lin(magnitude) vs. lin(frequency) and sampled at the requested number of points (half of reflection transform-size). The part below the lower limit of the 125 Hz octave-band (88 Hz) can be treated in two ways: either suppression by a raised cosine bell or a flat response down to 0 Hz, see Fig. 7.3.

7-39

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

For first-order diffuse reflection and all second- and higher order reflections Reflections are octave-band based since they originate from independent RTC tracing of each octave-band and cannot be splined. The reflections are instead built up by digital octave-band filters that are added together.

Fig. 7.3 Reflection path magnitude spline interpolation

Reflection path transfer function phase

Depending on reflection order, two different methods for reflection path phase synthesis methods are employed. For the direct sound (if present) and first-order specular reflections A minimum phase is constructed from the magnitude using Hilbert transform relations [Oppenheimer]:
arg[H(f )] = H (log | H(f ) |)

(7.3-3)

Where H(f ) RP transfer function arg[H(f )] RP transfer function phase (without the frequency independent linear phase shift corresponding to the RP total delay which is accounted for separately) |H(f )| RP transfer function magnitude Hilbert transform H For first-order diffuse reflection and all second- and higher order reflections For these reflections details are not important and the phase becomes that of the linear phase octave-band FIRs used (the filter delay is compensated for).

Receiver model
From the previous two sections the complete RP transfer function from the (point) source to the (point) receiver is estimated.

7-40

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Binaural
For a binaural room IR synthesis the next step is to calculate the pressure at the two ears of an imaginary head thereby splitting the point RP transfer function into left and right ear RP transfer functions which include the phase difference between the ears and the shadowing effect of the head. This is done using head-related transfer functions (HRTFs). HRTFs are measured at 15 elevation steps. In azimuth, measurement points are 15 apart from 30 below to 30 above the horizontal plane (i.e. for elevation -30, -15, 0, 15, 30). For higher elevation angles (45, 60, 75) the azimuth steps are 20, 30 and 60 respectively). Impulses arriving with angles of incidence more than 30 below the horizontal plane are assigned to the lowest sector, see Fig. 7.4.

Fig. 7.4 HRTF measurement positions For the early part synthesis horizontal (azimuth) HRTFs are interpolated but in the vertical (elevation) direction the closest measured angle is used. For the late part the space surrounding the receiver is divided into six sectors: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) above the head in front of the head to the left and in front of the head to the right and in front of the head to the left and behind the head to the right and behind the head

At RTC prediction the incidence distribution according to these 6 sectors is recorded and applied when the tail is created. For each sector and late part reflection the HRTF is selected randomly from three positions within the sector, see Fig. 7.4 and 7.5.

7-41

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

right back

6 top 1 2 front

left back

4 right side

3 left side

Fig. 7.5 HRTF tail sectors for sector processing

The final BRIR is equalized for use with headphones depending on the settings in File|Preferences. For further details about the headphone eq. and the HRTFs (e.g. to test or create further HRTF libraries) check the CATT users www page.

Mono and Blumlein/XY-stereo

For mono microphone or stereo IRs, angle dependent compensation is made according to the directivity selected. Microphones are ideal as were they of infinitesimal size and the directivity pattern is implemented as F() = Z + Xcos() where is the angle of incidence relative the main axis of the microphone and where Z+X = 1 (Z and X 0). For details see [Borwick]. With mono the microphones are aimed according to the head direction selected at prediction, with stereo the stereo pair is aimed according to the head direction.

B-format
Similarly for the B-format WXYZ response, microphones are ideal and perfectly coincident where figure-of-8 types are pointing in the X, Y, and Z directions. According to the most common B-format specification X is pointing in the head-direction, Y to the left, Z up. The omni response (W) is by convention scaled down by a factor 1.414.

5-channel
5-channel is similar to B-format but microphones are typically not coincident and are of arbitrary types. Common to all 5-channel setups is that they are left/right symmetric, the center microphone (1/C) is pointed forward, the left microphone (2/L) is pointed forward or to the left and that the left surround microphone (4/Ls) is pointed backwards (or backwards to the left) and that the surround mics are placed behind LCR. The microphone configuration affects the sound considerably and there are several different "schools". Therefore, 5channel auralization is not recommended for normal auralization since the microphone setup used affects the perceived soundfield considerably but may have its uses also there (e.g. for more informal presentations to a group of listeners). It also offers an opportunity to use the MultiVolver (The FIReverb Suite) for 5-channel responses created for models of actual rooms, such as e.g. well sounding churches or concert halls, to be used for surround sound music reverberation purposes.

7-42

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Late part generation

The late part reverberation tail is based on statistical reflection generation in a simplified version of the hall model where natural distributions or reflection path lengths and absorption factors are sampled. For faster processing, the number of reflections are decimated (sector processing) by first creating sector echograms. First the intensity from each virtual reflection in each octave-band is added into six sector echograms with 1 ms slot-size. Then a reflection is synthesized for each slot in each sector. Sector processing is a simplification based on limitations in the human auditory system and is much faster than detailed processing of each single reflection. The result is difficult to distinguish from detailed processing. Since there are six late-part sectors for binaural processing, a 1 ms slot-size can give 6000 reflections/s in the late part. Incidence angles are sampled from actual six-sector incidence angle distributions recorded during prediction. This approach will approximately preserve spatial reflection distribution and reflection density at the receiver. The BPP module optionally generates a plot-file (name_D.PLT in the same directory as the ECH-file as selected in the Output-files dialog) showing the resulting decays for octavebands 125 Hz to 16 kHz.

Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient

IACC, the Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient, gives an estimate on the similarity between the left and the right ear and is defined as follows [ISO][Cremer]. First, the Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Function:
1 / 2

IACFt 1t 2 ( ) =

2 2 hl (t )hr (t + )dt hl (t )dt hr (t )dt t1 t1 t1

t2 t2 t2

(7.3-4)

The Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient: IACCt 1t 2 ( ) = max IACFt1t 2 ( ) for min < t < max Where hl hr t1 t2 min max left ear response right ear reponse lower integration time limit, 0 ms upper integration time limit, 80 ms lower time limit for evaluation, -1 ms upper time limit for evaluation, +1ms (7.3-5)

IACC is evaluated in octave-bands 125 Hz to 16 kHz. IACC can be calculated from a binaural SIM-file pair and is selected from the Utilities menu or be requested to be calculated at processing and put in the SIM-file header, see General settings.

7-43

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Crosstalk cancelling filters

Crosstalk cancelling enables loudspeaker listening to binaurally recorded or simulated sound. The technique is sometimes called "transaural". The background is that when listening to a binaural recording over loudspeakers (in a typical symmetrical stereo configuration), the left as well as the right ear is reached by sound from both left and right speakers while for binaural replay the left signal is supposed to be sent only to the left ear and the right signal only to the right ear [Cooper-89], [Kotorynski-90].

Filter structure
The implementation of crosstalk cancellation is based on the "Shuffler" filter configuration:
L R Binaural without headphone eq

+ 1 S+A

1 S-A A A

+ R For loudspeakers

Fig. 7.6 Filter structure for crosstalk cancellation, definition of S and A. where S is the HRTF from the left speaker to the left ear as well as (because symmetry is assumed) from the right speaker to the right ear (S = Same side). is the HRTF from the left speaker to the right ear as well as (because symmetry is assumed) from the right speaker to the left ear (A = Alternate side).

With the implementation, S and A are taken from the HRTF library currently selected in Preferences and interpolation is used to find the HRTFs for the exact angles used in the specified loudspeaker setup. When dedicated crosstalk cancellation filters are created their operation are according to Fig. 7.7 where Xt was the name given in the Crosstalk cancelling dialog. To use the setup with a Lake DSP Huron, a 4-channel convolver has to be set up and the resulting sounds must be added according to the figure. With software convolution it is easiest to use the MultiVolver with a 2x2 setup.

7-44

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

Binaural recording

Xt_L_L.SIM

Xt_L_R.SIM

Xt_R_L.SIM

Xt_R_R.SIM

+ L For loudspeakers

+ R

Fig. 7.7 Crosstalk cancellation of a binaural recording

Filter processing
The processing involves inverting the two filters F1=S+A and F2=S-A. Had both filters been minimum phase except for a pure delay it would have been straightforward but that is seldom the case. While creating the filters it is possible to simulate the listening and see how flat the direct signals are (L to L) and (R to R) and how much the crosstalk (L to R and R to L) is suppressed. With the exact version of the filters (Smoothing=None for both HRTFs and filters F1 and F2) and with the DSP applied, the theoretical crosstalk cancellation is well sufficient (typically >> 40 dB) and the direct signals are perfectly flat (typically within 0.1 dB). This all assumes: 1) perfect and equal loudspeakers 2) no influence from the room 3) the listener is the one from which the S and A HRTFs have been measured 4) the listener sits exactly in the "sweetspot" Let us examine these four points in order: 1) even high quality loudspeakers are not perfectly equal in magnitude and phase response. The implementation has an option for individual loudspeaker correction. 2) wall reflections will be mixed with the created signals and degrades the crosstalk cancellation ability. Correcting the room is a much tougher task than correcting the loudspeakers. 3) this may happen but typically most users do not have their own HRTFs measured so that they can be used for the S and A filters. The implementation interpolates from the horizontal HRTFs measured at 15 degree intervals to get the HRTFs for the exact angles to the loudspeakers. 4) since a static (non-adaptive) cancellation technique is applied the head must be kept inside fractions of a wavelength (at 10kHz the wavelength is about 3 cm...). The implementation has an option for low-pass filtering at 10 kHz to give a wider sweetspot. Points 3) and 4) clearly suggest that one should not use too exact filters in the implementation. If a perfect filter is used there is a risk of audible high-frequency coloration if the head is moved out of the sweetspot. The implementation has several options for individual smoothing of both the HRTFs used and of F1 and F2 (1/12-, 1/6-, 1/3 and 1/1-

7-45

7. BINAURAL POST-PROCESSING MODULE

octave). Typically, 1/1-octave smoothing is likely to always be too coarse and should be used only for experiments. The smoothing is applied as follows: HRTFs smoothing (optional): a) a pure delay between S and A is estimated (A is always delayed in relation to S but it is typically not a pure delay) b) the S and A magnitudes are smoothed using the selected 1/n-octave filter. c) minimum phase functions are created for S and A, and A is then delayed according to a) d) the new S and A are treated as if they were the actual S and A. Filter smoothing (optional): a) F1=S+A and F2=S-A are created and their magnitudes are smoothed using the selected 1/n-octave filter. b) inversion of F1 and F2 (not all implementation details are disclosed for this step)

Listening experience, discussion

A successful application of a crosstalk cancellation system, as described above, depends on many factors. Below are some discussion points: 1) if the HRTFs used for the simulation do not give a good localization using headphones, transaural will not make it better. 2) generally, it is much easier to perceive the sounds as coming from outside the head than when using headphones. It is often easier to appreciate for someone not used to listening in headphones. 3) the problem of headphone equalization is removed, but instead a problem of loudspeaker and room correction appears. 4) the loudspeakers can be corrected for fairly well while the room is much more difficult to correct for. The loudspeaker responses (to be inverted and used as correction filters) should ideally be measured at the listening position (because of cabinet diffraction effects). When measuring loudspeakers it is best to average over a head-sized volume around the sweetspot in an anechoic room (or large enough room if MLS or similar is used) and to smooth the high frequencies. Also don't try to correct for too low frequencies or the loudspeakers may suffer. 5) basic requirements on the room are: as absorbent as possible and with a non-colored sound; symmetrical room with symmetrical loudspeaker placements relative the room either soffit-mounted loudspeakers or speakers placed not too close to the walls.

Nevertheless, good results may sometimes be achieved in normal rooms e.g. for demo purposes. Even if the crosstalk cancellation technique is associated with some problems it is very well worth exploring!

7-46

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE

This module can handle and perform a sequence of processing steps such as the complete sequence from prediction over binaural post-processing, convolution to WAV-file calibration.

The module uses only the File menu with obvious actions on SEQ-files. File|Insert Sequence will open an existing sequence and insert its contents before the currently selected step in the list. This will e.g. enable having one sequence for prediction, one for post-processing and one for convolution and then eventually make a complete prediction -> post-processing -> convolution sequence by inserting the three lists into a new list. When Save and Run from top is pressed the current sequence-file is saved and the steps are performed in sequence. If Save and Run from current is pressed the processing instead starts from the currently selected step (note that any defined variables will be known also if they are defined before the currently selected step). Before the processing starts, the Prediction and Post-processing module dialogs are automatically closed and any non-saved settings-files are prompted for to be saved. If warnings are on, they are ignored or it may halt the sequence waiting for a response. No plot-files will be shown automatically by the view-module, but have to be viewed after the sequence has completed one by one using the View module's File|Open or the complete plot-file list using List|Open and selecting the appropriate PREDPLT.TXT or POSTPLT.TXT plot-file lists. To view finished plot-files before a sequence is completed, use the stand-alone PLT-file viewer. The error-handling options (ignore, prompt, abort) are to be set according to the dependencies in the sequence. For example, if step 1 is prediction and step 2 is postprocessing of the results from step 1, an error in the prediction should abort the sequence, while an error in post-processing of one ECH-file does not effect a subsequent postprocessing or prediction. If a running step is aborted (using the Processing dialog Stop button) a prompt is displayed with an option to continue or abort the sequence.

8-1

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE When reasonable, file-names are checked for existence (e.g. prediction PRD-files, postprocessing PST-files, and anechoic WAV-files) but in many cases a file used in a later step may have been created in a previous step (e.g. ECH-files or SIM-files). In such cases only the directory is checked for existence. Add VARIABLE... Displays a dialog where string variables can be defined (variables have no use for error actions). A new entry in the list is created.
{

String variables can be used to create generic sequences that can be re-used. An example:
VARIABLE -i PATH | c:\halls\theater1 Prediction -a <PATH>\calc.PRD Post-processing -i <PATH>\E_A0_01.ECH <PATH>\catt.PST VARIABLE -i PATH | c:\halls\theater2 Prediction -a <PATH>\calc.PRD VARIABLE -i SS | A0 Post-processing -i <PATH>\E_<SS>_01.ECH <PATH>\catt.PST Post-processing -i <PATH>\E_<SS>_02.ECH <PATH>\catt.PST Post-processing -i <PATH>\E_<SS>_03.ECH <PATH>\catt.PST

From the above can be seen that when a variable is used it is added like <variable_name> and a variable can also be given a new value in a later step. The actual variable strings are not resolved until the sequence is run. Strings and variable names can have up to 256 characters and use all but the < > characters. Add REPEAT... Displays a dialog where a repeat step can be defined. A new entry in the list is created.

8-2

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE The Variable name will be expanded to two characters if the name length is 2 (e.g. RR typically for receivers ids <RR> : 01, 02, 03 etc.) but to one character if the name length is 1 (e.g. S typically used with source ids A<S> : A0, A1, A2 etc). An example:
REPEAT 8 RR 10 1 Post-processing C:\TEMP\E_A0_<RR>.ECH C:\bin.PST

Will perform the same as:

Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing Post-processing C:\TEMP\E_A0_10.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_11.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_12.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_13.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_14.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_15.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_16.ECH C:\TEMP\E_A0_17.ECH C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST C:\bin.PST

Prediction... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for a prediction PRD-file to be selected. A new entry in the list is created.

Post-processing... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for a post-processing PST-file and an echogram ECHfile to be selected. A new entry in the list is created.

8-3

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE

Mono (Convolution) (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for an anechoic mono WAV-file, left and right binaural impulse response SIM-files (created by the Postprocessing module) and a desired WAV-file to be created (if NONE) is entered instead of the right SIM-file, mono convolution is performed of the left SIM-file with the anechoic WAV-file). A new entry in the list is created. Left/Right/R+L Mix... (Convolution) (Add processing steps) Similar to the one above but instead a stereo anechoic file is entered and either the left, the right or a left+right mix is used as the input to the convolver. WAV-calibration... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for a WAV-file to be selected as a template for calibration. A new entry in the list is created.

X-talk cancel... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing crosstalk cancellation of responses based on the latest saved settings. A new entry in the list is created.

8-4

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE Headphone eq... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for a headphone filter and a left or right SIM-file to be selected (both left and right files are filtered). A new entry in the list is created.

This is a streamlined version of the more general SIM-file filtering utility. The created files will automatically be renamed by changing the first letter in the name to "P" (Phones) unless the letter is "H". If the names start with "H" it is likely that the files have come from a HeadScape file generation and HeadScape can only read files with a fixed syntax starting with H. If the original, non-filtered, files are to be kept they must be duplicated in another folder before processing. SIM-file addition... (Add processing steps) Displays a dialog allowing for SIM-file addition of a large number of SIM-files in one step. Unlike when using the Utilities dialog for addition, the sequence method does not allow for change of gain or delay but uses the original ones.

The Template SIM-file selected determines that receiver used (01 in the example above), the folder and the addition compatibility. SIM-files based on the Source ids given will be used for addition. Source ids can be space or comma separated and B* means all B sources. In the example above the following SIM-files in C:\V8DOC would be added: E_A0_01, E_A1_01 and E_B0_01, E_B1_01, E_B2_01, E_B3_01, E_B4_01, E_B5_01, E_B6_01, E_B7_01, E_B8_01, E_B9_01.

8-5

8. SEQUENCE PROCESSING MODULE Delete / Edit Deletes / Edits the selected entry. Clone... Clones the currently selected entry and loads it for editing. If OK is pressed after editing, the new entry is inserted after the current one. This is a very handy way to add e.g. several sequential post-processing steps where only the ECH-file differs with a receiver id, or several sequential convolutions where SIM-file and output WAV-file names differ only slightly. Move up / Move down Moves the selected entry one step up or down in the sequence.

8-6

9. CATT EDITOR

9. CATT EDITOR
The CATT editor CATT-Edit (CATTED32.EXE) is essentially a Notepad clone but also offers search/replace, font selection, a Templates menu to insert various geometry-file templates, a GEO-file syntax reference, and an interface to the main help-file. Being a Notepad clone the editor suffers from similar limitations in file sizes it can handle under Windows 95/98/ME. The maximum file size is then typically 64 kB but for NT/2000/XP the limit is set to 1 MB. 64 kB may seem like a severe limitation, but the way the geometryfile format is organized it is bad practice to put all the data in one file. Better to divide it in logical parts and use the INCLUDE directive. It is only when a large file has been created by the AutoCAD interface that the geometry is described in a large single block and another editor must be used. But even then it is quite easy to divide the file into parts (e.g. corners in the master-file and planes in an included file) so that CATT-Edit can be used. The geometry check debug-file DEBUG.TXT may often be > 64 kB but may be made smaller by omitting some information such as the long list of plane data and/or corners only leaving the error checks. Instances of CATT-Edit and the main program communicates so opened and edited in one instance of the editor. If a file that already editing, the editor containing the file is moved to the front instead of of the editor. The communication works both when an editor is program and if it is loaded from e.g. Explorer. that files can only be is edited is selected for loading a new instance loaded from the main

Similarly, if a file that is needed for a prediction (e.g. a GEO-file) is loaded in an instance of the editor without having been saved, the editor is moved to the front of other windows and a prompt is presented with a Yes/No/Cancel choice. Yes saves the file before proceeding, No proceeds without saving (i.e. uses the previous version on disk), and Cancel aborts the processing. Tab stops are initially set at every 5 average character widths of the selected font.

9.1 Non-standard menus

File|Convert to ANSI The editor allows for character set conversion so that files created by a DOS editor using the MS-DOS character set can be converted to the Windows ANSI set. Edit|Goto Line Number For some geometry-file errors, the prediction module gives the error line number. This menu can be used to go directly to that line. Character|Font By default the editor uses the font and font size that is selected in the main program File|Preferences. Character|Reduce/Enlarge Font Reduces or enlarges the font used.

9-1

9. CATT EDITOR

Character|Increase/Decrease TAB-width Increases or decreases the TAB-width by one average character. Template| Place the cursor where e.g. a plane definition template (Plane [..) is wanted and select the corresponding menu item. The template will be created and the cursor is placed at a logical starting-position. Only functions with complex and/or hard-to-remember syntax have templates. For other commands see Help|Syntax below. Template|ABS Exchange Inserts a record template for the CATT absorption library exchange file format. Useful if some data is entered directly in a text-file that can be imported, see Section 3.1 Template|RGB Color Inserts an RGB triple (e.g. {255 0 0} for pure red) to be used in GEO-files. Help|Help... Loads the main help-file and displays the Prediction input-files topic. Help|GEO/LOC Syntax... Displays a dialog with short syntax descriptions for GEO-, source- and receiver-file directives and tools. This dialog can stay open while editing. Help|Marker Syntax... Displays a dialog with short syntax descriptions for Markers (visual non-acoustical elements in the optional GEO-file MARKERS section see Section 2.3). This dialog can stay open while editing.

9-2

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE 10.1 Introduction

The AutoCAD interface for CATT-Acoustic consists of a set of AutoLISP procedures that create commands to be used within AutoCAD. These procedures then translates and writes a specific layer of an AutoCAD drawing to the CATT format. The manual describes v3.1 of the interface. To enable conversion in the opposite direction, the Prediction module can create an intermediate file that can be imported into AutoCAD by the interface. The conversion is carried out at the Prediction module menu selection File|Export Geometry To|AutoCAD interface CAD see Section 2.1. The interface allows for the complete geometry to be modeled inside AutoCAD including all surface planes (including correct normal definition), sources (position, aim, directivity, and Lp1m), receiver positions, plane names, and absorption names. The interface then writes a geometry-file, a source-, and a receiver-file with selected names. After that process, only some minor editing of absorption data in the GEO-file remains. It is, however, strongly recommended to create a CATT debug list-file and a PLINFO.PLT plot-file to check the model. The interface requires the full 3D version of AutoCAD (release 11 or later). This documentation naturally assumes that users have a basic understanding of the operation of AutoCAD. The initial interface was originally written by Advanced Engineering Computations (AEC), Gothenburg, Sweden. For suggested improvements and changes of the interface please contact CATT.

Direct creation of a model in AutoCAD

For users that already know AutoCAD well, this is a straightforward approach potentially speeding up the modeling process considerably. This approach will not have any adverse effects when it comes to how appropriate the model will be for acoustic prediction using geometrical acoustics. The main difference between direct modeling in the CATT GEO-file format is that the model typically will consist of more planes thus making it appear more cluttered and make predictions somewhat slower. The reason for this is that the AutoCAD "3DFACE" element can have 3 or 4 vertices only while the GEO-file format allows for an unlimited number of vertices (corners). If no alterations of the GEO-file created are made, a re-import of the files via the intermediate CAD-format should result in a model identical to the one that was exported.

Modification of an existing drawing in AutoCAD format

To use an already existing AutoCAD drawing, e.g. provided by an architect, is potentially the most time-saving approach to modeling. It is also, however, associated with the greatest risks when it comes to how appropriate the model may be for room acoustic prediction based on geometrical acoustics. In most cases the original model needs to be simplified so that too small surfaces are removed. For example, if audience chairs are individually modeled, they

10-1

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE should be removed and replaced by a walled-in audience surface with appropriate absorption and diffusion.

Import of an existing model in the CATT format

In addition to re-importing models originally created in AutoCAD as discussed above, it may be interesting to import an existing model in the GEO-file format to render the model. Another example is when the structured GEO-file format has been selected because its features and possibilities for parametrical modeling using equations etc. If a model is created in GEO-file format directly without any thoughts of how AutoCAD handles surfaces, some features cannot be completely transported to AutoCAD. Examples of such features are planes that are subdivided into parts with different absorption, concave planes with many corners (due to an apparent bug in at least AutoCAD release 12 for Windows, these may not be handled well). Planes with hard-to-translate features are marked so that they can be checked and taken care of manually inside AutoCAD, see below. To create a file that can be imported in AutoCAD, the Prediction module menu item File|Export to CAD is selected. The current settings are inspected but only a few of them are actually used for the export: Output and Input folders, the Master-file, the Receiver-file, the Source-file, sources and receivers used, and Plane use settings. The created CAD-file contains geometry, source-, and receiver data in an easy-to-parse text format. Even if features in the GEO-file format, such as e.g. equations, have been used, the CAD-file contains only numbers, the unit is always meter and decimal point is always used. The format of a CAD-file is: comments ... (more comments) %CORNERS co_id co_x co_y co_z ... (more corners) %PLANES pl_id / pl_name / pl_absname co_id1 co_id2 ... co_idN ... (more planes) %SOURCES s_id s_dirname:dirtype delay (e.g. A0 HORN12:SD1 20) s_x s_y s_z s_aim_x s_aim_y s_aim_z s_roll L125 L250 L500 L1k L2k L4k : L8k L16k ... (more sources) %RECEIVERS r_id r_x r_y r_z ... (more receivers) %EOF Example:
CATT-Acoustic v8.0a, Copyright CATT 1988-2002 CATT project to intermediate AutoCAD-format conversion (for >= v7.0) PROJECT=v8 Shoebox Note 1: plane sub-divisions are not written. Instead the full plane is written with abs #DIVIDED. Sub-divisions currently have to be handled as separate planes in AutoCAD. Note 2: Concave planes (with reentrant angles) are problematic to handle inside AutoCAD. Such planes are written with a # inserted as the first character in the aborption name. Note 3: abs/diff properties that are entered directly in a plane

10-2

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE

(Example: [1 floor / 1 2 3 4 / <8 7 6 5 4 3> ]) are assigned a dummy name starting with ## and then a number. Use names! From 1, 2 and 3: all abs names starting with # need to be fixed! They can be transferred to a layer CATT_FIX with the command MARKFIX so that they can be taken care of. This will seldom be required for models originally created in AutoCAD. All coordinate values are in meter. The directivity name is set as name:type (e.g. SINGER:SD0). The optional delay is always written (0.0 if not used). The optional source roll is always written (0.0 if not used). The optional 8k and 16k source Lp1m values are always written.

Note 4:

Note Note Note Note Note

5: 6: 7: 8: 9:

%CORNERS 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 %PLANES 1 /floor/ AUDIENCE 4 3 2 1 2 /ceiling/ WOOD 11 12 13 14 3 /stage wall/ WOOD 1 11 14 4 4 /rear wall/ WOOD 3 13 12 2 5 /left wall/ WOOD 2 12 11 1 6 /right wall/ WOOD 4 14 13 3 %SOURCES A0 OMNI:SD0 1.000 1.000 70.0 73.0 %RECEIVERS 1 2 %EOF -3.000 3.000 20.000 20.000 1.300 1.300 0.00 1.700 3.700 76.0 79.0 -5.000 -5.000 5.000 5.000 -5.000 -5.000 5.000 5.000 0.000 24.000 24.000 0.000 0.000 24.000 24.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.000 8.000 8.000 8.000

1.700 1.700 82.0

95.0

0.000 : 95.0

95.0

Absorption names for planes that could not be translated, and therefore have to be checked, are marked by a prepended # character. #DIVIDED means that the plane was divided in sub-planes and need to be manually fixed in AutoCAD. ##NNNN where NNNN is a number means that the absorption was entered with numbers directly instead of an absorption name. #ABSNAME where ABSNAME is an absorption name means that the plane has been concave and needs to be checked inside AutoCAD (the AutoCAD bug mentioned above may have created the set of 3DFACEs to represent the plane in a manner that is not correct). All planes that have absorption names prefixed with # can be marked by the provided AutoCAD command MARKFIX so that they can be taken care of.

10-3

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE

Basic interface concepts

The AutoCAD interface handles 3D elements of the types 3DFACE and 3DMESH. 3DMESH surfaces must be converted to 3DFACEs by the provided command CONV and plane and absorption names must be set. The interface works with three layers: CATT_MAIN, CATT_FIX, and CATT_TMP. When importing or exporting data the layer CATT_MAIN is used. CATT_FIX is used for planes that need to be "fixed" after import i.e. those whose absorption names start with #. CATT_TMP is for internal use. Generally, the interface does not perform extensive syntax check on e.g. valid source directivity or absorption names. This check is instead performed when the exported files are read by the Prediction module. Such errors are typically easily spotted and can be corrected with the editor. AutoCAD allows for the Space bar to act as Enter. The interface supports this except for when plane names and Lp1m values for the source are entered since they typically contain spaces.

10.2 Installation
The procedure below describes v3.1 of the interface. The interface AutoLISP files (*.LSP) and predefined symbols (*.DWG) must be placed in a single folder. At installation they are placed in the CATT-folder ACAD. Start AutoCAD and load the AutoLISP command: (LOAD "C:/CATT/ACAD/CA_LOAD") Note: AutoCAD uses "/" or "\\" internally in path names. When the interface is run for the first time, the interface folder will be prompted for (i.e. typically C:\CATT\ACAD\ ) - note that also the last \ must be given. The interface then stores the information for future sessions. When installing a new interface version it may be installed in another folder (perhaps C:\CATT\ACAD_v3). To make the interface to work in the same manner as for the currently installed version either delete the CA_PATH.TXT file in the AutoCAD folder (causes a question again when loading the new version the first time) or edit the CA_PATH.TXT file to have the new path. A perhaps more convenient alternative to the AutoLISP (LOAD ... ) command to load the interface command-set is to use the APPLOAD command giving a dialog to select the LSP-file to load. Note: Because AutoCAD interprets a space as "enter" the interface cannot be placed with a path including a space. If you have happened to install CATT-Acoustic to e.g. c:\program files\... simply move the ACAD folder to e.g. C:\ACAD and give the new path instead.

10.3 AutoLISP commands

Below is a list of the AutoLISP commands provided. Generally these commands work as any other AutoCAD commands in the sense that, for example, coordinates may be entered either

10-4

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE by clicking with the mouse or by entering numbers at the command prompt. They can also act on a group of faces selected by the mouse. SETCATTSCALE Sets or changes the unit and the scale for the drawing to be converted. This command must be used before any of the commands EXP, IMP, SRC, REC, CHDIRECT, or SHDIRECT can be used. If not, an error message will notify the user. With decimal units the scale is set so that numbers in the created GEO-file have the same magnitudes as those used inside AutoCAD. This is accomplished by the GEO-file directive SCALE. CATTSCALE DRAW Displays current CATT unit and scale. Draws 3DFACEs in normal AutoCAD manner. This is just a replicate of the normal AutoCAD 3DFACE drawing command. Puts plane and absorption names on currently selected 3DFACEs and moves them from the current layer to the CATT_MAIN layer. Gets and shows plane and absorption name on currently selected 3DFACEs. Converts a 3DMESH to 3DFACEs (i.e. explodes the mesh). Sets plane and absorption names on the created 3DFACEs and moves them from the current layer to the CATT_MAIN layer. Inserts a source in the drawing. Asks for source id, position coordinate, aim coordinate, source name (i.e. directivity), and Lp1m values. CATTSCALE must be set before SRC is used. Changes the source position. For an old DRW-file made using v2 of the interface, the source has to be removed and entered again to make this command work (an old source will export well but the position cannot be changed with this command). Changes the source aim point. For an old DRW-file made using v2 of the interface, the source has to be removed and entered again to make this command work (an old source will export well but the aim cannot be changed with this command). Inserts a receiver in the drawing. Asks for receiver id and position coordinate. CATTSCALE must be set before REC is used. Exports all 3DFACEs, sources, and receivers on the layer CATT_MAIN to selected source, receiver, and GEO-files. If the model contains many surfaces the process may take a couple of minutes. If no sources or receivers have been positioned (using SRC and REC), the corresponding files will not be created. If name and absorption names have not been set on some faces, default values are set so that, when the files are read by the prediction module, they have a valid format. The interface declares all absorption names used in the model in the directives section of the created GEO-file. Some minor editing is then required to add actual numeric values for absorption and diffusion factors. If, however, the material is in the Surface properties library the corresponding declaration can simply be deleted or commented out. If all absorption names have not been given inside AutoCAD, it has to be corrected for by substituting the default absorption for a real one. CATTSCALE must be set before EXP is used. Imports to the layer CATT_MAIN geometry from the intermediate CAD-file format created by the prediction File|Export to CAD menu selection.

PUT

GET

CONV

SRC

CHSRCPOS

CHSRCAIM

REC

EXP

IMP

10-5

10. AutoCAD INTERFACE 3DFACEs are created for all planes thereby splitting surfaces with more than 4 corners. All imported planes that need manual attention have an absorption name starting with #. These faces can be moved to the layer CATT_FIX by the command MARKFIX. CATTSCALE must be set before IMP is used. MARKFIX Marks 3DFACEs that need to be fixed. MARKFIX should be used after IMP. All 3DFACEs with an absorption name starting with # are moved to the layer CATT_FIX. If, after export, some absorption names still start with #, the prediction module will issue a syntax error pointing out the problem plane definition. Unmarks selected and fixed 3DFACEs and moves them from CATT_FIX to CATT_MAIN. To be used when faces have been corrected after import. Shows division of a surface. After import planes with many corners have been subdivided into planes with 3-4 corners. This command shows the division lines. In many cases a more logical, and visually more pleasing, division may be created manually. SHDIV is actually just a toggle on/off of the AutoCAD system variable SPLFRAME. Hide division of a surface. Shows direction of plane normals on selected faces. The normal direction is shown indirectly by the absorption name in 3D text on a hashed surface. If the text can be read normally the face is viewed from its reflecting side, if the text is mirrored the face is viewed from its back side. The text and the hash pattern is located on the CATT_TMP layer and is never exported. CATTSCALE must be set before SHDIRECT is used. A simpler version of SHDIRECT only showing the letter "R" on selected surfaces. If R can be read correctly (i.e. not mirrored) the plane is viewed from its Reflecting side. The R symbols are removed with SHDIRECT. After a surface is DRAWn, a SHR command is automatically issued made for the newly created surfaces. Removes "Show direction" of plane normals on selected faces. Change direction of plane normals on selected faces. Also performs DELSHDIRECT on not selected surfaces. CATTSCALE must be set before CHDIRECT is used.

UNMARKFIX

SHDIV

HIDEDIV SHDIRECT

SHR

DELSHDIRECT CHDIRECT

The AutoCAD command DDATTE can be used to display source data (type DDATTE and Enter and then click on the source). The AutoCAD commands MOVE and STRETCH can be used to manipulate a source pos-aim group (requires that the source is created in v3 of the interface).

10.4 Modeling tips

If only half of a symmetrical model is created in AutoCAD the MIRROR GEO-file directive can be added to the created GEO-file and maybe also a smaller number of bridging planes may be needed to be created "manually" but all corners would already be defined. When selecting planes it is often difficult to select the edge of the plane one wants (the neighbor plane gets selected instead). For this a standard AutoCAD feature can be used: Press and hold the Ctrl key while Left button clicking on the edge and the objects with the common edge will alternate.

10-6

11. TUTORIAL

11. TUTORIAL
This section describes one way to model a hall using CATT-Acoustic v8.0. Since it is a tutorial, most tools provided by the software are exemplified (except Markers since they are easy to use once the GEO-file concept is understood). The GEO-format is very flexible and several different procedures can be followed when modeling a hall. The procedure exemplified here has worked well for a number of projects. All steps from modeling to prediction, multiple source addition, binaural post-processing and convolution are exemplified. The tutorial was installed in the CATT-folder TUTORIAL. It contains three ready-made geometry-files, a source-file, a receiver-file, and a basic Prediction settings-file: MASTSTEP.GEO contains the complete geometry and each tutorial step can be selected by setting a constant STEP, at a screen prompt, to the value 1 to 6 corresponding to the tutorial steps. contains the complete geometry where each tutorial step is commented. defines the reflectors used in step 6. is the source-file. is the receiver-file. is a Prediction settings-file.

MASTFULL.GEO REFLECT.GEO SRC.LOC REC.LOC GEO.PRD

MASTFULL.GEO, SRC.LOC, and REC.LOC can also be seen in Appendix A. Note that the help-file version of the tutorial actually includes most essential plot-files created so that the whole tutorial can be initially "run" inside the help-file.

11.1 Preparation
Before one starts entering the actual data for a new hall, it is useful to draw a simple 3D outline of the hall. As the model progresses one can instead use plots generated by the software. If the hall to be modeled already exists and is going to be renovated it is extremely valuable with photos from the hall since drawings are not always accurate, up to date and/or may be difficult to interpret. Photos are also of great help when deciding on surface properties.

11.2 Modeling
The steps involved in a new project are: Create a new project, create the geometry, and finally perform the prediction. If desired, then also multiple source addition and/or binaural post-processing for auralization can be performed. Start CATT-Acoustic. The Prediction module is initially open and active. The View module is also open but no plot-file is loaded. When creating a new project from scratch (but not here in the tutorial) the following steps must be performed. First select Utilities|Create a New Project.

11-1

11. TUTORIAL

Enter a project folder and a project name for reference. If the specified folder does not exist it will be created. The Browse button also allows for creating a folder. For a new project, files such as those below are created in the project folder when OK is pressed.

MASTER.GEO (template master-file for the geometry):

;MASTER.GEO ;PROJECT:Sample project ;INCLUDE ;ABS absname = <10 10 10 10 10 10> ;L <10 10 10 10 10 10> CORNERS ;id x y z PLANES ;[id name / / absname ] ;[id name / / (a / / a_abs) (b / / b_abs) ]

SRC.LOC (template source location and data file):

;PROJECT= Sample project SOURCEDEFS ; a natural source ;id position directivity aim-position [roll] A0 0.0 3.0 1.7 OMNI 0.0 5.0 1.7 Lp1m_a = Lp_white 94 ; white spectrum, 94 dB at 1kHz ; an electro-acoustical source (syntax 1 specifying Gain_a) B0 -2.0 3.0 3.7 Catt.SD0 0.0 7.0 1.7 Lp1m_a = Lp_voice_normal Gain_a = <20 20 20 20 20 20> ; calculates Lp1m_ea Delay_e = 0 ; an electro-acoustical source (syntax 2 specifying Lp1m_ea) B1 2.0 3.0 3.7 Catt.SD0 0.0 7.0 1.7 Lp1m_a = Lp_voice_normal Lp1m_ea = <75 80 82 85 88 88> ; at 1m on source axis Delay_e = 0

REC.LOC (template receiver location file):

;REC.LOC ;PROJECT: Sample project RECEIVERS 1 0.0 10.0 3.0

PROJECT.TXT (optionally to be used for project log):

Project: Sample project Sign. : Date : Log :

A basic prediction settings-file GEO.PRD is also created prepared for geometry check. For a new project these data-files must then be filled in using the editor or exported via the AutoCAD interface. In this tutorial however, a CATT-folder TUTORIAL is already created and all project files already exist. In the rest of the tutorial the geometry data does not have to be entered. Just read the paragraphs, make changes to the settings-files as described, run the

11-2

11. TUTORIAL Prediction, enter the appropriate STEP value and view the various plot- and result-files created. Select File|Open Settings and select CATT-folder TUTORIAL\GEO.PRD. Select General settings and check so that Input folder corresponds to the tutorial folder and the Output folders correspond to a tutorial sub-folder OUT. If the software was not installed in C:\CATT the correct tutorial folder must be substituted here. Check that Master-file is set to MASTSTEP.GEO. This master GEO-file contains the complete tutorial geometry and later when Save and Run is pressed, STEP = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 can be selected at the pop-up dialog corresponding to the steps described in this tutorial. Browse through the rest of the settings but leave them as they are for now. Press OK and leave General settings and then select Geometry view/check and toggle all Plot-files on except SRCINFO and REFLINFO. Select (Primary 3D view) Natural and View distance to 65 m (the 3D view can be changed interactively when the plot-file is shown, this defines only the initial setting). Press OK and leave Geometry view/check. Below are shown six steps towards a complete model. For each step only the additional GEO data for the step is shown. For the final complete GEO-, source-, and receiver-files refer to Appendix A. Remember - you do not need to enter the geometry data yourself. Just read the paragraphs, press Save and Run, enter STEP and view the various plot-files (some are shown here and some more are included in the help-file).

Step 1, the audience and floor surfaces

First the floor and audience coordinates planes are entered (the complete GEO-file can be viewed by selecting (Edit) Geo-file on the main dialog and opening MASTSTEP.GEO or MASTFULL.GEO or by checking Appendix A). The tutorial input-files uses decimal point but both decimal comma and point are allowed. A "walled in" audience is created where audience or seat absorption is applied also to the sides, see Fig. 2.8. "Help corners" are created to enable precise locking of receiver locations at a fixed height above the audience (step 5). Note that the audience has been assigned specific scattering coefficients. For this simple project remaining surfaces all get default scattering coefficients introduced later.
;MASTFULL.GEO ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial for v8.0 ;general materials defined here or from library ABS wood = <12 10 8 7 5 4> {213 220 160} ABS carpet = < 10 8 6 4 3 2 > {98 209 44} ABS audience = <35 50 55 70 85 80> L <30 40 50 60 70 80> {128 128 0} ABS floorabs = carpet GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL ah rh aww fsd fsw sw pw w = = = = = = = = 1.0 0.3 1.0 1 6 fsw 2 16 ; ; ; ; ; + ; ; audience height receiver height above audience plane audience sidewalk widths front-stage depth front-stage width 2 ; stage width prosc. width max hall width

11-3

11. TUTORIAL
GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL ew fld flt wl1 wl2 hd = = = = = = 1.4 3 1 6 7 fld ; ; ; ; ; + entrance width flank depth floor tilt first side wall length second side wall length wl1 + wl2 ; hall depth from prosc

MIRROR 100 200 CORNERS

; corner and plane offsets for mirrored part

;floor corners 1 -fsw/2 fsd 0 2 -sw/2 0 0 3 x(2)-pw 0 0 4 -w/2 fld 0 7 -w/2+ew hd flt 8 0 y(4) 0 ; help corner for lock 5 x(4) fld+wl1 lock(4 7 8) 6 x(7) y(5) lock(4 7 8) ;audience surface ;20-21 help corners to lock audience corners at ah above floor 20 x(8) y(8) z(8)+ah 21 x(4) y(4) z(4)+ah 22 x(7) y(7) z(7)+ah ;23-25 help corners to lock receiver positions at rh above audience ;surface (in REC.LOC) 23 x(20) y(20) z(20)+rh 24 x(21) y(21) z(21)+rh 25 x(22) y(22) z(22)+rh ;audience upper corners 30 x(4)+aww y(4) lock(20 31 x(4)+aww y(5)-aww lock(20 32 x(7)+aww y(5)-aww lock(20 33 x(7)+aww y(7)-aww lock(20 ;audience lower corners 40 x(30) y(30) lock(4 7 41 x(31) y(31) lock(4 7 42 x(32) y(32) lock(4 7 43 x(33) y(33) lock(4 7 PLANES ;audience surfaces [1 audience surface / 33 32 31 30 130 131 132 133 / audience ] [2 audience front / 140 130 30 40 / audience ] [3 audience rear / 143 43 33 133 / audience ] [4 audience front side / 30 31 41 40 / audience ] [5 audience middle side / 42 41 31 32 / audience ] [6 audience rear side / 43 42 32 33s / audience ] ;floor surfaces [7 front floor / 101 102 103 104 140 40 4 3 2 1 / floorabs ] [8 sloped side floor / 40 41 42 43 7 6 5 4 / floorabs ] [9 sloped rear floor / 107 7 43 143 / floorabs ]

21 21 21 21

22) 22) 22) 22)

8) 8) 8) 8)

The coordinate system must have the y-axis towards the audience and the z-axis upwards (gives the x-axis left to right as seen from the stage looking towards the audience) see Section 1.5. To utilize mirroring x = 0 should be placed at the symmetry line. The plane corners must be entered in clockwise order as seen from behind each surface (in fact, the direction is selectable but must be consistent in each file and flipping "/" to "\" reverses the direction). Note the MIRROR directive that creates mirror copies of all corners with 100 added to their ids (no planes are mirrored in this step since the floor plane coordinates contain both

11-4

11. TUTORIAL negative and positive x-values). The lock() function is used to lock hard-to-measure coordinates into a plane defined by three corners. Planes can then be made perfectly flat. Note: if expressions are used for coordinate values, they must either be entered without blanks or enclosed in round brackets. An example from above: the y-value of corner 8 fld+wl1 could also have been entered as (fld + wl1). The first part of the geometry is now created. Source and receivers are of little concern at this stage. Press Save and Run. Enter 1 for STEP when the dialog appears. The geometry-file is read and requested plot-files are created in the output folder. The View module automatically shows all created plot-files (COLORED.PLT, SHADED.PLT, SHADED.OGL for the CATT 3D-viewer, COINFO.PLT see Fig. 11.1, PLINFO.PLT, VIEW4.PLT).

33 7 43 30 4 40 3 2 1 132 131 142 106 141 105 130 140 104 A0 31 532 41 6 42 01 133 143 107

101 102 103

Fig 11.1 COINFO.PLT after Step 1 The plot-files names are saved in PREDPLT.TXT. On the Plot-file control dialog or toolbar select next/prev File to view the files ("<<" and ">>" buttons or press PgUp/PgDn). PLINFO.PLT contains plot "sub-frames" that are selected by the Frame buttons ("<" and ">"). A plane should always have its reflecting side colored and the back black or the corner entering order must be reversed. This is very very important!

Step 2, walls and ceiling

In this step all ceiling coordinates are entered and main walls and the ceiling are defined. Note: below are shown only the new lines associated with step 2. Again, for the full file refer to Appendix A.
ABS ceilabs = wood ABS wallabs = wood GLOBAL h CORNERS ;ceiling 52 x(2) y(2) 53 x(3) y(3) 54 x(4) y(4) 55 x(5) y(5) = 8 ; hall height

h h h h

11-5

11. TUTORIAL
56 x(6) y(6) h 57 x(7) y(7) h PLANES [20 [21 [22 [23 [24 ceiling / 52 53 54 55 56 57 157 156 155 154 153 152 / ceilabs ] back wall / 107 157 57 7 / wallabs ] side wall front / 5 55 54 4 / wallabs ] side wall back / 56 6 7 57 / wallabs ] front flank wall / 54 53 3 4 / wallabs ]

Note the use of x() and y() functions to copy x, and y-coordinates from the floor to the ceiling. If a floor coordinate is changed, the ceiling will automatically follow. The second part of the geometry is now created. Press Save and Run. Enter 2 for STEP when the dialog appears.

57 55 54 157 53 52 31 5 6 4132 152 42 30 4 40 3 2 1 A0 132 106 142131 141 105 101 102 103 130 140 104 33 7 43 01 154 156 155 56

153

133 143 107

Fig 11.2 COINFO.PLT after Step 2

Step 3, entrance wall and door

The entrance door is created as a plane sub-division where the door is the first division and the complete entrance wall is the second. To use plane sub-divisions instead of defining separate planes is more logical and more efficient. For details about plane sub-divisions see Section 2.3.
ABS doorabs = wood GLOBAL e GLOBAL dh CORNERS ;entrance 60 x(5)+e 61 x(5)+e 62 x(6)-e 63 x(6)-e door y(5) y(5) y(5) y(5) = 0.2 ; edge width entrance door = 2 ; entrance door height

z(5) z(5)+dh z(5)+dh z(5)

11-6

11. TUTORIAL
PLANES [30 entrance wall / 5 6 56 55 / (door / 63 62 61 60 / doorabs) (wall / 5 6 56 55 / wallabs) ]

As seen from the above, plane-definitions can spread over several lines if required. Once again press Save and Run and enter for 3 for STEP in the dialog.
door ( 30)
8 7 5 4 : 3 2> L <10 10 10 10 10 10 : 10 10>
50% 100%

DOORABS <12 10

0%

125

500

2k

8k

61 62 60 63 A0

01

Fig 11.3 PLINFO.PLT after Step 3

Step 4, the stage

The stage and the proscenium can now be connected.
ABS sfloorab = wood ABS swallabs = wood GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL sh sd sbw sfh sbh = = = = = 1 ; 5 ; 4 ; h-2 ; sfh-1 stage height stage depth stage back width stage front height ; stage back height

CORNERS ;prosc. and stage 74 x(2) y(2) sh 75 x(1) y(1) sh 76 -sbw/2 -sd sh 77 x(76) y(76) sh+sbh 78 x(2) y(2) sh+sfh PLANES [40 [41 [42 [43 [44 prosc. walls stage side edge stage front edge stage floor stage ceiling / / / / / 2 3 53 52 78 74 / wallabs ] 2 74 75 1 / swallabs ] 1 75 175 101 / swallabs ] 176 174 175 75 74 76 / sfloorab ] 77 78 178 177 / swallabs ]

11-7

11. TUTORIAL
[45 stage back wall [46 stage side wall [47 prosc. top / 76 77 177 176 / swallabs ] / 76 74 78 77 / swallabs ] / 78 52 152 178 / swallabs ]

Again press Save and Run and enter for 4 for STEP in the dialog.

01

A0

Fig 11.4 COLORED.PLT after Step 4

Step 5, source/receiver locations

Source-file (SRC.LOC): "Omni" natural directivity selected. A second source is added since we will later add the results of the two sources together.
;SRC.LOC ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial v8.0 SOURCEDEFS IF step < 5 THEN A0 0.0 3.0 2.0 OMNI 0.0 10.0 3.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> B0 1.0 2.0 2.0 OMNI 0.0 10.0 3.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> ENDIF IF step >= 5 THEN A0 -2.5 fsd-0.5 sh+1.7 OMNI -2.0 fsd+2 sh+1.7 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> B0 1.0 fsd-2.0 sh+1.7 OMNI Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> ENDIF 1.0 fsd+2 sh+1.7

11-8

11. TUTORIAL

Receiver-file (REC.LOC):
;REC.LOC ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial v8.0 IF step >= 5 THEN LOCAL dx = 2.2 LOCAL dy = 3 LOCAL y0 = fld+1 ENDIF RECEIVERS IF step < 5 THEN 1 0.0 10.0 3.0 ENDIF IF step >= 5 THEN 1 -2*dx y0 2 -1*dx y0 3 0*dx y0 4 1*dx y0 5 2*dx y0 11 -2*dx y0+dy 12 -1*dx y0+dy 13 0*dx y0+dy 14 1*dx y0+dy 15 2*dx y0+dy 21 -2*dx y0+2*dy 22 -1*dx y0+2*dy 23 0*dx y0+2*dy 24 1*dx y0+2*dy 25 2*dx y0+2*dy 31 -2*dx y0+3*dy 32 -1*dx y0+3*dy 33 0*dx y0+3*dy 34 1*dx y0+3*dy 35 2*dx y0+3*dy ENDIF

lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25)

Select General settings/Receivers and toggle 1-5, 11-15, 21-25, and 31-35 on. Select (Sources)Which to use and toggle both source A0 and B0 on. Set head-direction to Stage. Run again and enter 5 at the screen prompt.

31 21 11 01 A0 B0 02 03 04 05 12 13 14 15 22 23 24 25 32 33 34 35

Fig 11.5 SHADED.PLT after Step 5

11-9

11. TUTORIAL

Step 6, side wall reflectors

Reflectors separate from the main geometry are best defined in separate files. Such files are declared as OBJECTs and can thereby be translated/rotated. The defined geometry is used as a template and COPY creates further identical copies with various translation/rotation values. In the top "directives" section in the master-file the reflector-file is included:
;STEP 6 - side wall reflectors INCLUDE reflect.geo

In a new GEO-file REFLECT.GEO:

;REFLECT.GEO ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial for v8.0 ; STEP 6 side-wall reflectors ABS backabs = <20 30 40 50 60 60> {64 128 128} ABS frontabs = <12 10 8 7 6 5> {0 0 128} LOCAL r_w LOCAL r_h = wl1/5 = h-3

LOCAL tx = w/2 - 0.5 LOCAL ty = r_w LOCAL tz = 2.75 LOCAL ry = -10 LOCAL rz = 15 OBJECT ROTATE TRANSLATE OFFSETPL OFFSETCO

0 tx 100 80

ry fld+ty

rz tz

MIRROR 100 200 COPY 5 2 COPY 10 4 COPY 15 6 CORNERS 0 1 2 3 0 -r_w/2 0 0 -r_w/2 r_h 0 r_w/2 r_h 0 r_w/2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tx fld+2*ty tz tx fld+3*ty tz tx fld+4*ty tz 0 ry rz 0 ry rz 0 ry rz

PLANES ;* = auto edge [0 refl front ;the back MUST [1 refl back diffusion + enable in General settings / 0 1 2 3 / frontabs* ] be defined too \ 0 1 2 3 \ backabs* ]

Note the use of OFFSETPL and OFFSETCO to make the OBJECT GEO-file somewhat independent. To re-use it in another project, only the offsets and the absorption need to be changed. Run again and enter 6 for STEP at the screen prompt, see Fig. 11.6 for the final design. For some idea of how the reflectors work, go to General settings and select the Refl. Info plot-file (REFLINFO.PLT) and specify the plane ids 100, 102, 104 and 106 (front sides of the right side reflectors). Run again and look at the reflector coverage.

11-10

11. TUTORIAL

5m Audience:149m
01 A0 B0 04 05 14 15 24 25 34 35 02 03 11 12 13 21 22 23 31 32 33

Volume:1769m

Fig 11.6 VIEW4.PLT after Step 6

11.3 Prediction
The following steps may be taken in different order depending on the type of project. The Prediction module can create any combination of detailed early specular reflections, audience area mapping, full detailed calculation, and geometry check. For some projects the shape may be most natural to check first (mapping) but for others the reverberation time may be more natural to check first (full detailed calculation). The tutorial will first do audience area mapping.

Audience area mapping

First select General settings and select Master-file to MASTFULL.GEO so you do not need to select the STEP anymore. It is now also time to check/select (Diffuse reflection) on or off and if Diffuse defaults will be used. If Diffuse defaults is used then all materials without diffusion properties defined will get the selected default scattering coefficients. Diffuse reflections on/off can have a strong impact on the estimation of reverberation time, see Section 2.5. For this tutorial set default scattering coefficients to 30% for all bands. Leave General settings by pressing OK and select Audience area mapping. Select No of rays/oct to 10000 (or Auto number for a more thorough calculation), Auto time, a Map step of 0.5 m and a Map height of 0.25. For Audience planes select no. 1 (to enter only one plane in the dialog enter 1 in both range edit boxes and click Add). Spherical receivers (slightly overlapping) will be automatically placed at the Map height (0.25 m over the audience plane). Audience planes will be marked grey in the VIEW4.PLT file. Browse through the rest of the settings since there are many mapping options (up to 12 2D or 3D parameter mapping plots plus RASTI, STI and early sound coverage). Leave Audience area mapping by pressing OK. Click Save and Run. The resulting plot-files will be for 1 kHz and for sound pressure level (SPL_1K.PLT) and lateral fraction (LF_1K.PLT) and parameters selected (PAR1_1K.PLT). Note that the results now are for source A0 and B0 added together.

11-11

11. TUTORIAL

D-50

[%] 1 kHz 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20

C-80 [dB] 1 kHz 4 3

A0 B0

A0 B0

2 1 0 -1 -2

LF

[%] 1 kHz 40 35
A0 B0

Ts

[ms] 1 kHz 110 100 90 80 70 60

30 25 20 15 10

Fig. 11.7 PAR1_1K.PLT from Audience area mapping

Early part detailed ISM

Select Early part detailed ISM on and Audience area mapping off. Edit Early part detailed ISM and set specular refl. orders to 3. Select Truncation time to 150 ms (the truncation time would typically range from 150 ms for small halls to 300 ms for large halls). Toggle Refl. history plot-file on, the rest off. Browse through the rest of the settings.
dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 23 50 100 73 123 Source angles 150 ms 173 Ver S-24-20-21-R Hor H_A0_05_1K 45 Receiver angles

31 21 32 11 22 33 A0 01 12 23 34 02 13 24 35 B0 03 14 25 04 15 05 Ver Hor

Fig. 11.8 H_A0_05_1K.PLT from Early part detailed ISM

11-12

11. TUTORIAL Click Save and Run. The main part of the prediction time is spent saving detailed plot-files for reflection histories for each of the 20 receivers. The resulting plot-files will be for 1 kHz (H_A0_rr_1K.PLT, see Fig.11.8, and H_B0_rr_1K.PLT) where rr are the receiver ids.

Full detailed calculation

Full detailed calculation, using the RTC, is the main prediction tool. Toggle Full detailed calculation on and Early part detailed ISM off. Edit Full detailed calculation and select No of rays/oct 1000 (or for a very thorough prediction to Auto). The Ray truncation time should be set to correspond roughly to the RT, say 1500 ms, or to Auto. Toggle on RT overview, Echograms, Sound roses, Vectorgrams, Decays, Parameter map and Parameter trend. Select both Save data for items for later use with multiple source addition and binaural post-processing. Browse through the rest of the settings. Leave the dialog by pressing OK. Click Save and Run. Note that if e.g. 1000 rays were selected 8000 rays are actually traced (1000 per octave). The resulting plot-files will be: RT_A0.PLT E_A0_rr_INT E_A0_rr _1K R_A0_rr_1K V_A0_rr_1K PARAM1_A0.PLT TREND1_A0.PLT
dB 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 EDT T-15 T-30 D-50 C-80 LFC LF Ts SPL G

RT_B0.PLT E_B0_rr_INT.PLT E_B0_rr_1K.PLT R_B0_rr_1K V_B0_rr_1K PARAM1_B0.PLT TREND1_B0.PLT

Complete echogram

global reverberation time and other statistics decay curves all octaves detailed echograms and results, se Fig. 11.9 sound roses vectorgrams parameter overview parameter trend.
dB 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Early echogram

1.23s (-1.00) 1.25s (-1.00)

4ms Filter

500 1.14 s 1.23 s 1.25 s 50.0 2.7 43.3 29.0 79.2 % dB % % ms

1000

1500 ms

05 A0 OMNI DI = 0 dB 79.0 dB at 1 m 1kHz 5m

71.4 dB 12.4 dB

0 23 dB 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 23

ms 50 100 150 200 73 123 173 223 Early directional echograms

Up Lt Dn Rt

50 73

100 123

150 173

200 223

ms

Fig. 11.9 E_A0_05_1K.PLT from Full detailed calculation Since now also numerical results are interesting text-files are created. Select PARAM_A0.TXT or PARAM_B0.TXT from the Prediction:Latest Results list-box (double-click or select and press Enter) and it will load the file into CATT-Edit (in view-only mode). This text-file summarizes all results for room acoustic measures as well as how the prediction has been performed (no of rays etc.). Also files suitable for spreadsheet import (e.g. MS Excel)

11-13

11. TUTORIAL were created (PARAM_A0x.TXT and PARAM_B0x.TXT) where tables are semi-colon delimited and non-tabular data and text is quoted. The prediction is now complete. Go to multiple source addition (Section 11.4) or binaural post-processing (Section 11.5).

11.4 Multiple source addition

To add the detailed results of multiple sources together an option in the Full detailed calculation dialog (or for special cases Early part detailed ISM) must be set. The Prediction module then creates special echogram files with the name syntax E_ss_rr.ADD and a file called Name.CMB (where Name.LOC is the name of the current prediction sourcefile, typically SRC.CMB) containing source combination data (directivity type, optional delay, aim coordinate, Lp1m values, and a geometry checksum). Note that the audience area mapping adds sources together automatically but only graphically presented numerical results are created while the multiple source addition module enables individual point receiver echogram studies. Open or select the Multiple sources module from the Windows menu. When the module opens select CATT-folder TUTORIAL\OUT\SRC.CMB that was created at prediction. When the CMB-file loads, all E_ss_rr.ADD files in the same folder as the CMB-file (typically a prediction output folder) are compared so that they all have the same geometry checksum. This is required since ADD-files may have been created at different times - one source at a time. All compatible sources found appear enabled in the (Sources) group. Similarly, if the Receivers button is pressed all compatible receivers appear enabled. Note that only the common set of source and receives are enabled (e.g. if A0 and 01, 02 have been predicted at one time, and B0 and 01, 02, 03 at another time, only A0, B0, 01, and 02 will be enabled). In the (Sources) group enabled sources can be switched on/off and edited by clicking on their respective check boxes and edit buttons. Keep the initial settings. Click the Receivers button and select only receiver 05 (note that also several receivers in the groups 10-19, 20,-29 and 30-39 are enabled) and click OK. Click Save and run and the addition of the echograms for source A0 and B0 to receiver 5 will be calculated. This process only takes a couple of seconds and displays a plot-file E_01_05_1K.PLT, see Fig. 11-10, where both the individual A0->05 and B0->05 echograms (solid lines) and the total A0+B0->05 (dotted lines) are shown (the 01 number just tells that this is the first file in a possible sequence since with 260 sources there will be 33 files numbered from E_01_rr_oct.PLT to E_33_rr_oct.PLT). The direct sound from each source is marked by a circle. A multiple source decay plot-file E_05_INT.PLT and a result text-file is also created with the most essential parameters, E_05.TXT.
dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 A0 0.0ms OMNI.SD0

100

ms 200 B0 0.0ms OMNI.SD0

100

200

ms

Fig. 11.10

E_01_05_1K.PLT from Source addition.

11-14

11. TUTORIAL Now it is time for experimenting with the two sources. Click an edit button for source B and select another source directivity (CATT.SD0) and set a delay of 20 ms. Click Save and run again and watch how the B0->05 echogram is shifted by 20 ms and details have changed because of the new directivity is applied, see Fig. 11.11.
dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 A0 0.0ms OMNI.SD0

100

ms 200 B0 20.0ms CATT.SD0

100

200

ms

Fig. 11.11 E_01_05_1K.PLT from Source add., B0 delayed 20 ms and with a new directivity. Note that these source changes did not require a full recalculation in the Prediction module. Click the Receivers button and select all the receivers, then click OK. Click Save and run and the addition of the echograms for source A0 and B0 to all receivers will be calculated. When also multiple receivers are calculated for, the results are a bit different and have the name syntax PARAM.TXT and TREND1.PLT and TREND2.PLT similar to the PARAM_ss.TXT and TREND_ss.PLT files created by the Prediction module.

11.5 Binaural post-processing - Auralization

To create an auralization of the results from a prediction, an option in the Full detailed calculation dialog (or for special cases Early part detailed ISM) must be set. The Prediction module then creates special echogram files with the name syntax E_ss_rr.ECH. Optionally, ECH-files can be created by the Multiple source addition module after source changes. Open or select the Binaural post-processing module from the Windows menu. To examine the basic contents of an ECH-file select Utilities|Information|CATT ECH-file. In addition to what is displayed, all early reflections are in the file with incidence angle and octave-band information. The late part is recreated in the module (statistically created based on a simplified room shape and actual incidence angle distributions). Select General settings and 44100 Hz sample-rate and binaural receiver. Select an impulse response length corresponding to the predicted reverberation time (say 1300 ms giving an IR size of 1.3 x 44100 = 57330 samples). The headphone and HRTFs used must be selected from File|Preferences or from the Prefs button. With limited versions only the "Generic" eq. (GENERIC_V8_PLAIN_44.DAT) can be chosen and only HRTFs based on a solid sphere (SPHERE_PLAIN_44.DAT). Check the settings for Output files (see to that Lake SIM-file format is selected since they will be used by the convolver in the last step). Select File|Save Settings and enter e.g. TUTORIAL.PST in CATT-folder TUTORIAL. Click Save and run and select CATT-folder TUTORIAL\OUT\E_A0_05.ECH. The module then starts to process the early part, builds the late part reverb and then finally it creates the late part. The plot-file E_A0_05_I.PLT, see Fig. 11.12, shows the early part of

11-15

11. TUTORIAL the created binaural impulse response, and E_A0_05_D.PLT shows the full decay for each octave-band. The detailed look of the impulse response depends on the headphone eq filter selected. Note that since head-direction stage was selected at prediction, receiver 05 is looking straight ahead and not towards the source and will thus have a stronger response for the right ear. Next step is to convolve anechoically recorded material with the synthesized binaural impulse response. Click Convolution and select the anechoic 44100 Hz mono WAV-file of your choice (e.g. MTB_44_AN.WAV with a male talker or DEMO_22_AN.WAV for limited versions since IRs were downsampled to 22050 Hz) and the just created left/right SIM-files: CATT-folder TUTORIAL\OUT\E_A0_05_L.SIM and E_A0_05_R.SIM. Finally enter a desired name for the resulting stereo WAV-file that will hold the binaural simulation e.g. CATT-folder TUTORIAL\OUT\MTB_A0_05.WAV. Play the resulting WAV-file using the CATT WAV-file player, attach it to a list plot-file in the Plot-file viewer module, use the Windows MediaPlayer, load the file into a WAV editor (included with most soundcards), or use any other of the many programs that can play WAVfiles.
% 100 50 0 -50 -100 0 23 % 100 50 0 -50 -100 0 23 50 73 100 123 150 173 200 223 250 273 ms 50 73 100 123 150 173 200 223 250 273 ms RIGHT EAR LEFT EAR

Fig. 11.12

E_A0_05_I.PLT from Binaural post-processing

Of course, being a hall design out of the blue, the acoustics is perhaps not very good. Note that the reverberation time is nearly constant over the octaves not dropping much at 4 kHz, giving a bright sound. Also note that the directivity used is OMNI, while a talker has a higher directivity at high frequencies and thereby in reality sends out less total power than when OMNI is used. Also this contributes to a bright sound, especially from 4k and up. Going back setting the directivity to that of a small loudspeaker makes it sound much more natural. If experiments with e.g. the directivity sounds interesting, the whole process can be repeated automatically using the sequence processing module, see next section.

11-16

11. TUTORIAL

11.6 Sequence processing

To repeat the prediction and binaural post-processing/convolution steps in section 11.3 and 11.5 after e.g. a raised ceiling or a directivity change, the Sequence processing module can be used together with previously created settings-files. First edit the geometry or create a new source directivity (using the Directivity module) and change the source in SRC.LOC. If desired, other parameters can of course also be changed. Then open or select the Sequence processing module from the Windows menu. All file-names below are in the CATT-folder TUTORIAL folder but must be entered with full actual path included. Click Prediction and select the settings-file CALC.PRD assuming it has Full detailed calculation selected. Press OK. Click Post-processing and select the settings-file TUTORIAL.PST and the echogram-file ECH-file E_A0_05.ECH. Press OK. Select Convolution and select the anechoic WAV-file of your choice (e.g. MTB_44_AN.WAV), binaural impulse response SIM-files E_A0_05_L.SIM and E_A0_05_R.SIM in CATT-folder TUTORIAL and the desired name for the resulting stereo WAV-file containing the binaural simulation (e.g. CATT-folder TUTORIAL\OUT\MTB_A0_05.WAV). Press OK. The sequence list-box now displays the three steps to be performed. Select File|Save Sequence As and enter TUTORIAL.SEQ. If you have MTB_A0_05.WAV loaded in the MediaPlayer, it must be closed since the convolver can't save to an opened and locked file. Click Save and Run and take a short coffee break. After the break there should be a new WAV-file to listen to. You have now gone through all major parts of CATT-Acoustic. Additional important parts are e.g. multiple source auralizations and calibration enabled by the Post-processing module Utilities|SIM-file Addition and |WAV-file Addition (full version) and |Calibration menus.

11-17

11. TUTORIAL

11-18

12. REFERENCES

12. REFERENCES
[Ambisonic] [Beranek] see [B-format] Acoustics, L L Beranek American Institute of Physics, Inc. 1986 M Barron, A H Marshall, Spatial Impression Due to Early Lateral Reflections in Concert Halls: the Derivation of a Physical Measure J. of Sound and Vibration, 72, 211- 232, 1981 M Barron, L-J Lee, Energy relations in concert auditoriums. I J. of the Acoustical Society of America, 84(2), 618-628, 1988 Sound Recording Practice John Borwick (ed.) (Ch. 6 "Microphones" by John Borwick)1987 Oxford University Press, Oxford, New York, USA J S Bradley, An international comparison of room acoustics measurement systems Internal Report IRC-IR-714, National Research Council Canada M A Gerzon, Ambisonics in multichannel broadcasting and video J. Audio Eng. Soc. 33(11), 859-71, 1985 Chalmers Room Acoustics Group Department of Applied Acoustics, Chalmers University of Technology SE-412 96 Gothenburg, Sweden D H Cooper, J L Bauck, Prospects for Transaural Recording J. Audio Eng. Soc. 37(1/2), 3-19, 1989 Principles and Application of Room Acoustics, Volume 1 L Cremer, H A Mller, T Schultz Applied Science Publishing. In many cases a reference to [Cremer] is actually a reference to other authors. It is however much easier to refer to this excellent book than to each separate paper. Those of you who want more details can then dig into the references of [Cremer]. [Cremer-89] L Cremer, Early Lateral Reflections in Some Modern Concert Halls J. of the Acoustical Society of America, 85(3), 1989 B-I Dalenbck, Room Acoustic Prediction and Auralization Based on an Extended Image Source Model Licentiate thesis, Report F92-03, [Chalmers]

[Barron-81]

[Barron-88]

[Borwick]

[Bradley-96]

[B-format]

[Chalmers]

[Cooper-89]

[Cremer]

[Dalenbck-92]

[Dalenbck-95a] B-I Dalenbck, The Importance of Diffuse Reflection in Computerized Room Acoustic Prediction and Auralization Proc. Inst. of Acoust. 17, 27-34, 1995 [Dalenbck-95b] B-I Dalenbck, A New Model for Room Acoustic Prediction and Auralization Ph. D. thesis, Report F95-05, [Chalmers]

12-1

12. REFERENCES [Hodgson-91] M Hodgson, Evidence of diffuse reflections in rooms J. of The Acoustical Society of America, 89(2), 765-71, 1991 T Houtgast, H J M Steeneken, R Plomp, Predicting Speech Intelligibility in Rooms from the Modulation Transfer Function. I. General Room Acoustics Acustica 46, 60-72,1980 IS0 3382, Building Acoustics T Jacobsen, The RASTI method for objective rating of speech intelligibility 12th ICA, paper E10-1, 1986 K Kotorynski, Digital Binaural/Stereo Conversion and Crosstalk Cancelling 89th Conv. AES, Los Angeles 1990, preprint 2949 Room Acoustics, H Kuttruff Applied Science Publishers Ltd., London, UK H Kuttruff, Zur Abhngigkeit des Raumnachhalls von der Wanddiffusitt und der Raumform Acustica 45, 246-55, 1980 Lake Technology Ltd. Visiting address GPO Box 736 Suite 502, Level 5 Broadway Post Office 51-55 Mountain Street NSW 2007, AUSTRALIA Sydney, NSW, 2007, AUSTRALIA phone: +61 2 233 8655 fax: +61 2 233 8656 URL: http://www.laketechnology.com DRA Laboratories USA URL: http://www.mlssa.com The MathWorks Inc. 21 Eliot Street, South Natick MA 01760, USA URL: http://www.mathworks.com Digital Signal Processing , Alan V. Oppenheimer, Ronald W Schafer Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, USA Chaos, Pattern and Beauty , C. A. Pickover St. Martin's Press NY 1990 ISBN 0-312-04123-3

[Houtgast-80]

[ISO] [Jacobsen-86]

[Kotorynski-90]

[Kuttruff]

[Kuttruff-80]

[Lake]

[MLSSA]

[MATLAB]

[Oppenheimer]

[Pickover]

[Steeneken-67] H. J. M.Steeneken, T. Houtgast, A physical method for measuring speech transmission quality JASA 67(1), pp.318-326

12-2

APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A - TUTORIAL FILES

Complete and final GEO-, source-, and receiver-files for Section 11. Tutorial. Master geo-file MASTFULL.GEO.
;MASTFULL.GEO ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial for v8.0 GLOBAL step = 6 ;STEP 6 - side wall reflectors INCLUDE reflect ;general materials defined here or from library ABS wood = <12 10 8 7 5 4> {213 220 160} ABS carpet = < 10 8 6 4 3 2 > {98 209 44} ;STEP 1: audience and floor surfaces ABS audience = <35 50 55 70 85 80> L <30 40 50 60 70 80> {128 128 0} ABS floorabs = carpet ;STEP 2: ceiling, backwall, sidewalls ABS ceilabs = wood ABS wallabs = wood ;STEP 3: entrance door ABS doorabs = wood ;STEP 4: prosc. and stage ABS sfloorab = wood ABS swallabs = wood ;STEP 1: floor, audience GLOBAL ah = 1.0 ; audience height GLOBAL rh = 0.3 ; receiver height above audience plane GLOBAL aww = 1.0 ; audience sidewalk widths GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL fsd fsw sw pw w ew fld flt wl1 wl2 hd = = = = = = = = = = = 1 6 fsw 2 16 1.4 3 1 6 7 fld ; ; + ; ; ; ; ; ; ; + front-stage depth front-stage width 2 ; stage width prosc. width max hall width entrance width flank depth floor tilt first side wall length second side wall length wl1 + wl2 ; hall depth from prosc

;STEP 2: ceiling, backwall, sidewalls GLOBAL h = 8 ; hall height ;STEP 3: entrance door GLOBAL e = 0.2 ; edge width entrance door GLOBAL dh = 2 ; entrance door height ;STEP 4: prosc. and stage GLOBAL sh = 1 ; stage height GLOBAL sd = 5 ; stage depth GLOBAL sbw = 4 ; stage back width GLOBAL sfh = h-2 ; stage front height GLOBAL sbh = sfh-1 ; stage back height MIRROR 100 200 ; corner (100) and plane (200) offsets for mirrored part

A-1

APPENDIX A
CORNERS ;-- STEP 1 -----------------------------------------------;floor corners 1 -fsw/2 fsd 0 2 -sw/2 0 0 3 x(2)-pw 0 0 4 -w/2 fld 0 7 -w/2+ew hd flt 8 0 y(4) 0 ; help corner for lock 5 x(4) fld+wl1 lock(4 7 8) 6 x(7) y(5) lock(4 7 8) ;audience surface ;20-21 help corners to lock audience corners at ah above floor 20 x(8) y(8) z(8)+ah 21 x(4) y(4) z(4)+ah 22 x(7) y(7) z(7)+ah ;23-25 help corners to lock receiver positions at rh above audience ;surface (in REC.LOC) 23 x(20) y(20) z(20)+rh 24 x(21) y(21) z(21)+rh 25 x(22) y(22) z(22)+rh ;audience upper corners 30 x(4)+aww y(4) lock(20 31 x(4)+aww y(5)-aww lock(20 32 x(7)+aww y(5)-aww lock(20 33 x(7)+aww y(7)-aww lock(20 ;audience lower corners 40 x(30) y(30) lock(4 7 41 x(31) y(31) lock(4 7 42 x(32) y(32) lock(4 7 43 x(33) y(33) lock(4 7

21 21 21 21

22) 22) 22) 22)

8) 8) 8) 8)

;-- STEP 2 -----------------------------------------------;ceiling 52 x(2) y(2) 53 x(3) y(3) 54 x(4) y(4) 55 x(5) y(5) 56 x(6) y(6) 57 x(7) y(7)

h h h h h h

;-- STEP 3 -----------------------------------------------;entrance 60 x(5)+e 61 x(5)+e 62 x(6)-e 63 x(6)-e door y(5) y(5) y(5) y(5)

z(5) z(5)+dh z(5)+dh z(5)

;-- STEP 4 -----------------------------------------------;prosc. and stage 74 x(2) y(2) sh 75 x(1) y(1) sh 76 -sbw/2 -sd sh 77 x(76) y(76) sh+sbh 78 x(2) y(2) sh+sfh

A-2

APPENDIX A
PLANES ;STEP 1: audience and floor planes -----------------------;audience surfaces [1 audience surface / 33 32 31 30 130 131 132 133 / audience ] [2 audience front / 140 130 30 40 / audience ] [3 audience rear / 143 43 33 133 / audience ] [4 audience front side / 30 31 41 40 / audience ] [5 audience middle side / 42 41 31 32 / audience ] [6 audience rear side / 43 42 32 33s / audience ] ;floor surfaces [7 front floor / 101 102 103 104 140 40 4 3 2 1 / floorabs ] [8 sloped side floor / 40 41 42 43 7 6 5 4 / floorabs ] [9 sloped rear floor / 107 7 43 143 / floorabs ] ;STEP 2: ceiling, backwall, sidewalls --------------------[20 [21 [22 [23 [24 ceiling / 52 53 54 55 56 57 157 156 155 154 153 152 / ceilabs ] back wall / 107 157 57 7 / wallabs ] side wall front / 5 55 54 4 / wallabs ] side wall back / 56 6 7 57 / wallabs ] front flank wall / 54 53 3 4 / wallabs ]

;STEP 3: entrance door -----------------------------------[30 entrance wall / 5 6 56 55 / (door / 63 62 61 60 / doorabs) (wall / 5 6 56 55 / wallabs) ] ;STEP 4: prosc. and stage --------------------------------[40 [41 [42 [43 [44 [45 [46 [47 prosc. walls stage side edge stage front edge stage floor stage ceiling stage back wall stage side wall prosc. top / / / / / / / / 2 3 53 52 78 74 / wallabs ] 2 74 75 1 / swallabs ] 1 75 175 101 / swallabs ] 176 174 175 75 74 76 / sfloorab ] 77 78 178 177 / swallabs ] 76 77 177 176 / swallabs ] 76 74 78 77 / swallabs ] 78 52 152 178 / swallabs ]

A-3

APPENDIX A
Geo-file REFLECT.GEO. ;REFLECT.GEO ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial for v8.0 ; STEP 6 side-wall reflectors ABS backabs = <20 30 40 50 60 60> {64 128 128} ABS frontabs = <12 10 8 7 6 5> {0 0 128} LOCAL r_w LOCAL r_h = wl1/5 = h-3

LOCAL tx = w/2 - 0.5 LOCAL ty = r_w LOCAL tz = 2.75 LOCAL ry = -10 LOCAL rz = 15 OBJECT ROTATE TRANSLATE

0 tx

ry fld+ty

rz tz

OFFSETPL 100 OFFSETCO 80 MIRROR 100 200 COPY 5 2 0 0 0 COPY 10 4 0 0 0 COPY 15 6 0 0 0 CORNERS 0 1 2 3 0 -r_w/2 0 0 -r_w/2 r_h 0 r_w/2 r_h 0 r_w/2 0

tx fld+2*ty tz tx fld+3*ty tz tx fld+4*ty tz

0 ry rz 0 ry rz 0 ry rz

PLANES ;* = auto edge [0 refl front ;the back MUST [1 refl back diffusion + enable in General settings / 0 1 2 3 / wood* ] be defined too \ 0 1 2 3 \ backabs* ]

A-4

APPENDIX A
Source-file SRC.LOC. ;SRC.LOC ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial v8.0 SOURCEDEFS IF step < 5 THEN A0 0.0 3.0 2.0 OMNI 0.0 10.0 3.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> B0 1.0 2.0 2.0 OMNI 0.0 10.0 3.0 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> ENDIF IF step >= 5 THEN A0 -2.0 fsd-0.5 sh+1.7 OMNI -2.0 fsd+2 sh+1.7 Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> B0 1.0 fsd-2.0 sh+1.7 OMNI Lp1m_a = <70 73 76 79 82 85> ENDIF 1.0 fsd+2 sh+1.7

A-5

APPENDIX A
Receiver-file REC.LOC. ;REC.LOC ;PROJECT:CATT-Acoustic tutorial v8.0 IF step >= 5 THEN LOCAL dx = 2.2 LOCAL dy = 3 LOCAL y0 = fld+1 ENDIF RECEIVERS IF step < 5 THEN 1 0.0 10.0 3.0 ENDIF IF step >= 5 THEN 1 -2*dx y0 2 -1*dx y0 3 0*dx y0 4 1*dx y0 5 2*dx y0 11 -2*dx y0+dy 12 -1*dx y0+dy 13 0*dx y0+dy 14 1*dx y0+dy 15 2*dx y0+dy 21 -2*dx y0+2*dy 22 -1*dx y0+2*dy 23 0*dx y0+2*dy 24 1*dx y0+2*dy 25 2*dx y0+2*dy 31 -2*dx y0+3*dy 32 -1*dx y0+3*dy 33 0*dx y0+3*dy 34 1*dx y0+3*dy 35 2*dx y0+3*dy ENDIF

lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23 lock(23

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25) 25)

A-6

INDEX mapping, 2-17 full detailed calculation, 2-24 auto time mapping, 2-18 full detailed calculation, 2-24 AutoCAD interface, 1-4, 1-20, 1-25, 3-5, 10-1 AutoCAD, 2-2, 2-42, 2-47 AutoLISP, 1-4, 10-1, 10-4 automatic edge diffusion, 2-73 automatic play, 5-5 aux delay, 7-7 A-weight, 1-25, 2-19 AWI-file, 2-56, 7-3, 7-16

A
ABS, 2-36 ABS_ss.PLT, 2-26, 2-67 AbsC, 2-74, 2-75 AbsCg, 2-74, 2-75 ABSLIBS, 1-2, 1-20, 3-1 absolute corner id:s, 2-39 absorption coefficient , 2-36, 3-1 changes, 2-82 histograms, 2-26 absorption/diffusion library, 3-1 ACAD, 1-4, 10-4 accurate definition of plane corners, 2-30 acoustic environment, 2-11 ADD-file, 6-1, 6-2, 11-14 aim(H,V), 2-55 aiming, 2-15 air absorption, 2-11, 2-70 air density, 2-11 humidity, 2-11 temperature, 2-11 Ambisonic, 7-27, 12-1 AND, 2-29 anechoic WAV info file, 7-16 anechoic WAV-files, 1-10 ANECHOIC, 1-3, 1-10, 1-22, 7-2, 7-33, 7-35 angle arguments, 2-35 animation, 5-8 AniScape, 7-27, 7-32 APPLOAD, 10-4 array elements, 4-11 ARRAY0, 4-11 arrays, 2-80, 4-11 asterisk "*", 2-42 audience, 2-18, 2-83, 11-3 area, 2-12 area mapping, 1-8, 2-17, 2-69, 2-70, 281, 11-11 area mapping results, 2-63 edges, 2-48 modeling, 2-47 surfaces, 2-71 auralization, 2-73, 7-1, 11-15, 12-1 auto number

B
background calculation, 1-17 background noise, 2-11, 2-77, 6-5, 6-7 backup, 2-5 backward integrated, 2-25, 2-79 balconies, 2-71 Barron M, 12-1 batch processing, 8-1 Bauck J L, 12-1 beam-steering, 4-10 Beranek L, 12-1 B-format, 7-27, 7-29, 7-42, 12-1 binaural, 7-26, 7-29, 7-41 down-mix, 7-24 post-processing module, 1-21, 7-1, 11-15 bitmap-files, 1-22 blank lines, 2-28 Blumlein, 7-26 Borwick J, 12-1 BPP, 7-1 Bradley J, 12-1 BREAK, 2-30

C
Pickover C A, 12-2 C-50, 1-12 C-80, 2-76, 6-7 CAD-file format, 10-2 CAD-files, 1-17 calculation recommendations, 2-81 calibration count, 7-4 I-1

INDEX calibration, 7-39 camera, 2-14, 5-8 position, 1-16 category, 3-2, 3-3, 3-5 CATT 3D-viewer, 1-2, 1-7, 1-20, 2-14, 2-62 CATT folder, 1-1 CATT play-list, 7-5 CATT, 1-28 CATT_FIX, 10-4 CATT_MAIN, 10-4 CATT_TMP, 10-4 CATT32.EXE, 1-2, 1-23 CATT32.HLP, 1-2 CATTED32.EXE, 1-2 CATTED32.EXE, 9-1 CATT-Edit font, 9-1 CATT-Edit, 9-1 CATTOGL32.EXE, 1-2 CATTOGL32.HLP, 1-2 CATTOGL32.HLP, 2-15 CATTPLT32.EXE, 1-2 CATTPLT32.HLP, 1-2 CATT-registered files, 1-18 CATTSCALE, 10-5 CATT-SD0, 1-19, 4-4 CATT-SD1, 1-19, 4-6 CATT-SD2, 4-3 CATT-VRoom, 1-28 Chalmers, 1-28, 12-1 character case, 2-28 character set, 1-17, 9-1 characters in names, 2-28, 3-5 CHDIRECT, 10-6 CHSRCAIM, 10-5 CHSRCPOS, 10-5 CIRC, 2-45 Clarity, 2-76 closed model, 2-16 closest, 2-20 CMB-file CMB-file, 2-16, 2-23, 2-27, 2-62, 2-66, 2-69, 6-1, 6-2, 11-14 COINFO.PLT, 2-13, 2-50, 2-62, 11-5 collections, 1-19, 1-2, 4-1 COLORED.PLT, 2-13, 2-61 command-line option, 1-1 command-line, 1-9 comments, 2-28 connecting to adjacent planes, 2-47 constants, 2-82 contours, 2-13, 2-15, 2-19, 2-20, 2-62, 4-17, 4-19 control rooms, 1-25 CONV, 10-4, 10-5 convert to ANSI, 9-1 convolution, 7-1, 7-29, 7-32, 8-4 Cooper D H, 12-1 coordinate system, 1-24 copy a GEO-file, 2-4 copy bitmap, 5-3 copy Meta-file, 5-3 COPY, 2-34, 2-82, 2-83, 11-10 copyright, 1-3, 1-15, 7-20 corners used, 2-16 corners, 1-23 CORNERS, 2-31, 2-37 cos(), 2-35 cos-squared weighted, 2-66 create a GEO-file, 2-4 create Project, 1-4, 2-4, 11-1 Cremer L, 12-1 crosstalk cancellation, 7-15, 7-13, 7-44, 8-4 cut(), 2-39

D
D-50, 2-76, 6-7 Dalenbck B-I, 12-1 DASH, 2-44 data flow, 1-19, 7-1 data output, 1-26 DATA32.DLL, 1-2 DDATTE, 10-6 DDI, 1-2, 1-25, 2-80, 4-1, 4-14 debug, 2-15 DEBUG.TXT, 2-15, 2-62, 2-85 decimal character, 1-17, 2-28, 11-3 default diffusion, 1-11, 2-12, 2-37 default user, 1-9 delay, 2-20, 2-57 DELSHDIRECT, 10-6 Deutlichkeit, 2-76 diffraction, 2-73 diffuse reflection order, 2-21, 2-64

I-2

INDEX diffuse reflection, 1-11, 2-11, 2-75, 2-81, 11-11, 12-1, 12-2, 2-36 direct sound only, 2-19, 2-21 direct sound, 1-10, 2-24, 2-71, 2-73 directives, 2-30, 2-31 directivity, 4-1 collections, 4-1 directivity factor, 4-19 directivity index, 4-10, 4-19 DISC, 2-45 disproportionate rooms, 2-72 DLL Directivity Interface, 1-2, 1-25, 4-1, 4-14 Dolby Surround, 7-23 doppler, 7-35 double-sided plane, 2-62 DRAW, 10-5 duplicate corner ids, 2-16 corners, 2-16 plane ids, 2-16 planes, 2-16 DXF-files, 10-1 Dynamic Link Libraries, 1-2 edge diffusion, 2-12, 2-74 edges penetrating, 2-16 EDT, 2-77 electro-acoustical source, 4-16 e-mail, 1-29 energy relations, 12-1 eq/gain, 7-25, 7-26 Err_nn_oct.PLT, 6-6 ERRORS32.DLL, 1-2 example model, 2-50 EXAMPLE, 1-3 EXCLUDE, 2-33 exp(), 2-35 EXP, 10-5 exponential filter, 2-25 export absorption, 3-2 AutoCAD, 2-2, 10-2 bitmap, 5-1 marker-file, 2-4 Meta, 5-1 PostScript, 5-2 spreadsheet, 5-2 VRML, 2-2 expressions, 2-35, 2-37 Eyring RT, 2-6 Eyring, 2-74 EyrT, 2-74 EyrTg, 2-74

E
E_rr.TXT, 6-7 E_rr_INT.PLT, 6-7 E_rrX.TXT, 6-8 E_ss_rr.ADD, 2-23, 2-27, 2-65, 2-69 E_ss_rr.ECH, 2-23, 2-27, 2-65, 2-69, 6-5, 6-6, 7-1 E_ss_rr.TXT, 2-24, 2-68 E_ss_rr_INT.PLT, 2-25, 2-66 E_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-24, 2-66 ear integration, 2-79 Early Decay-Time, 2-77 Early part detailed ISM, 1-8, 11-12, 2-21, 2-70, 2-71, 2-81 results, 2-64 Early part response, 7-32 early part, 2-72 ECH-file, 6-1, 7-2, 7-24 echoes, 2-84 echogram ISM, 2-22 echogram smoothing, 1-13 echograms, 2-24, 2-78 edge contours, 2-13, 2-62

F
F1, 1-16, 1-18 FALSE, 2-29, 2-35 field of view, 2-14 file calibration, 7-6 conversion, 7-10 scaling, 7-5 file-name syntax, 2-1 filter, 2-24 first-order surface ids, 2-22 floating point values, 2-28 font-size, 1-10 forward integrated echogram, 2-79 free path histograms, 2-26 frequency dependent diffuse reflection, 2-72

I-3

INDEX frequency range, 1-25 FROMBACK, 2-33, 2-41 FROMFRONT, 2-33, 2-41 frontal normalization, 7-18 Full detailed calculation, 1-8, 2-23, 2-70, 2-71, 2-81, 11-13 results, 2-66 functions, 1-24 history plot, 1-12 history, 2-22 HITS_ss.PLT, 2-26, 2-67 Hodgson M, 12-2 holes, 2-41 Houtgast T, 12-2 HRTF interpolation, 7-41 HRTF library, 1-10 HRTF normalization, 7-19, 7-20 HRTFS, 1-3, 1-10, 1-22 HRTFs, 1-3, 7-2, 7-4, 7-18, 7-41 HTML, 2-3 HTR-file, 7-31 HURON1, 7-31

G
G (strength), 2-76 gain, 7-7 Gain_a, 6-4 GEO-file sections, 2-31 GEO-file tree, 1-21, 2-5, 2-31 geometrical acoustics, 1-25 geometrical errors, 2-85, 2-86 Geometry view and check results, 2-61 GEOPLT.TXT, 1-20, 2-61 Gerzon M A, 12-1 GET, 10-5 GETGLOBAL, 2-30, 2-36, 2-59 GETLOCAL, 1-7, 2-30, 2-36, 2-54 GLOBAL, 1-5, 2-30, 2-35, 2-59 graph color, 1-13

I
I_ss_rr.TXT, 2-65 I_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-22, 2-64 IACC, 7-13, 7-26, 7-43 IF-THEN statements, 2-29 Image Source Model, 2-71 image source space, 2-22 IMP, 10-5 imperial units, 1-25 import AutoCAD, 10-1 directivity, 4-4, 4-6 absorption, 3-1, 3-2 impulse response, 7-38 inaccurate corners, 2-16 incidence angle distribution, 7-43 INCLUDE, 2-9, 2-30, 2-31, 2-83 input folder, 2-9, 11-3 input/output files overview, 1-19 installation, 1-1 AutoCAD interface, 10-4 Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Coefficient, 7-13, 7-43 Inter-Aural Cross Correlation Function, 7-43 interference, 2-18, 6-3 interpolated, 4-10 INTERPOLATED0, 4-10 IR, 7-1 IS0, 12-2 ISM, 2-21, 2-71

H
H_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-22, 2-64 hardware locks, 1-1 hardware requirements, 1-23 head direction, 2-10, 2-58, 2-59, 2-76, 7-42 headphone equalization, 1-2, 1-10, 8-5 headphone, 7-12, 7-21, 7-39 HEADPHONES, 1-2, 1-10, 1-22, 7-2, 7-20 headphones, 7-4, 7-42 Head-Related Transfer Functions, 1-3 HeadScape, 1-12, 7-30 head-tracking, 1-21 help button, 1-16 help, 1-18, 9-2 help-file, 1-2 hidden options, 1-16, 2-65 HIDDENOPTIONS.TXT, 1-16 HIDEDIV, 10-6 Hilbert transform, 7-40 history file, 1-17 I-4

INDEX

J
Jacobsen T, 12-2

Lp_white Lpea1k, 2-57 Lp_voice_loud, 2-56 Lp_voice_normal, 2-56 Lp_voice_raised, 2-56 Lp1m_a, 1-6, 2-55, 6-4 Lp1m_ea, 6-4

K
Kotorynski K, 12-2 Kuttruff H, 12-2

M
mapping height, 2-18, 2-63 scale, 1-12, 2-20, 5-6 step, 2-18 time intervals, 2-20, 2-21 margins, 5-3 marker elements, 1-24 marker file, 1-20, 2-4, 2-43, 2-46, 4-3, 416 MARKERS, 2-31 markers, 2-43, 9-2 MARKFIX, 10-3, 10-6 Marshall A H, 12-1 MASTER.GEO, 1-4 master-file, 2-9, 2-30, 11-3 MASTFULL.GEO, 11-1, A-1 MASTSTEP.GEO, 11-1 MATLAB, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12, 7-29, 7-30, 12-2 max SPL, 4-16 maximum file size, 9-1 MDI, 1-23 mean absorption coefficient, 2-75 mean free path, 2-75 menus, 1-9 Meta-file, 5-1, 1-22 METER32.DLL, 1-2 microphone, 7-26, 7-42 microphones, 12-1 mini tutorial, 1-4 minimum phase, 7-40 MIRROR, 2-33, 2-83, 10-6, 11-4 mirror, 1-24, 2-30 mixing shape, 2-75 MLSSA, 7-11, 7-12, 7-29, 12-2 MLTVLV32.EXE, 1-4 MLTVLV32.HLP, 1-4 modeling notes, 2-47 modeling tips, 10-6

L
Lake SIM-file, 7-3, 7-29 Lake Technology, 12-2 Lambert, 2-36 Lambert's law, 2-71 late part response, 7-32 late part reverberation, 7-43 lateral energy faraction, 2-76 lateral reflections, 12-1 latest results list, 2-4, 6-2 law of the first wavefront, 6-2 leaks, 2-67 LEAKS_ss.PLT, 2-67 Lee L-J, 12-1 LF, 2-21, 2-76, 6-7 LFC, 2-76, 6-7 LF_oct.PLT, 2-21, 2-63 lens angle, 2-14 license, 1-15 LINE, 2-44 list-files, 5-3 LMB, 5-6 LOAD, 10-4 LOCAL, 1-5, 2-30, 2-36, 2-54, 2-59 lock(), 2-38, 11-5 locking corners, 2-38 log(), 2-35 long filenames, 1-17 loop(), 2-39 lost rays, 2-86 loud voice, 2-58 loudspeaker correction, 7-14 loudspeaker listening, 7-13, 7-44 Lp_max, 2-56, 2-57 Lp_nominal, 2-56 Lp_pink Lpa1k, 2-56 Lp_pink Lpea1k, 2-57 Lp_white Lpa1k, 2-56

I-5

INDEX modeling, 11-1 mono, 7-29, 7-42 morphing, 7-35 MOVE, 10-6 moving around, 7-35 MRK, 2-37 multiple directives, 2-29 multiple source addition module, 1-21 multiple source addition, 6-1, 7-1, 11-14, multiple source auralization, 6-1, 7-1, 7-6, 7-8 MultiVolver, 1-4, 1-12, 7-10, 7-24, 7-34, 7-42, 7-44 MULTPLT.TXT, 6-6 Mller H A, 12-1

P
page setup, 5-3 page size, 5-3 palette for color mapping, 5-6 shaded 3D plots, 5-6 PARAM.TXT, 6-8 PARAM_ss.TXT, 2-69 PARAM_ssX.TXT, 2-69 parameter map, 2-26 parameter trend, 2-27 parametrical modeling, 10-2 PARAMn_ss.PLT, 2-26, 2-67 PARn_oct.PLT, 2-19, 2-63 PATH_ss.PLT, 2-26, 2-67 phase, 2-18, 2-63, 6-3 phone/fax, 1-29 plane corner entering order, 2-13, 2-41 definitions, 2-41 ids used, 2-16 sub-divisions, 2-42, 11-6 plane use, 2-10 plane-line intersection, 2-39 planes, 1-23 PLANES, 1-5, 2-31, 2-41 play WAV-file, 5-4 PLINFO.PLT, 2-13, 2-62 Plomp R, 12-2 plot-file control, 1-11,1-16, 5-5, 5-6 plot-file frame, 5-5, 5-7 plot-file lists, 5-4 Plot-file view module, 1-22 plot-files, 5-1 polar charts, 4-17 POLY, 2-43 POSTPLT.TXT, 1-22, 7-30 post-processing data flow, 7-1 post-processing, 2-23, 2-27, 6-5, 8-3 PostScript, 1-13 PostScript-file, 1-22 PPW-file, 1-18, 7-33 Prediction module, 1-20, 2-1 Prediction output-files, 2-61 Prediction, 8-3 PREDPLT.TXT, 1-7, 1-20, 2-61

N
natural source, 4-15 negative numbers, 2-28 normal vocal effort, 2-58 normalization, 7-20 normalized parameters, 2-24, 2-27, 2-77 NOROOM, 1-4, 2-4, 2-37 NOT, 2-29 NTREND_ss.PLT, 2-27, 2-67 number of rays mapping, 2-17, 2-63 full detailed,2-24, 2-66, 2-73

O
OBJECT, 2-30, 2-32, 11-10 octave-band, 2-1 offset, 2-43 OFFSETCO, 2-33, 2-37, 11-10 OFFSETPL, 2-33, 11-10 OGLSWITCH32.DLL, 1-2 OMNI, 2-55, 2-58, 6-4 omni-directional source, 4-1 Open Recent, 1-9 open rooms, 2-72 Oppenheimer A V, 12-2 OR, 2-29 origin, 1-25 ORIGIN, 2-32 output folder, 2-9, 11-3 overlapping surfaces, 2-16, 2-47

I-6

INDEX Preferences, 1-9 previously defined corners, 2-39 printer, 5-3 project name, 2-9 PROJECT.TXT, 1-4 protect directivity data, 4-10 PST-files, 7-1 PureVerb, 1-4, 7-28 PUREVERB32.EXE, 1-4 PUT, 10-5 REFLINFO.PLT, 2-13, 2-62, 11-10 Registry, 1-9 REPEAT, 8-2 reserved characters, 2-28 RETURN, 2-29, 2-85 reverberation time, 2-74 reversed planes, 2-16, 2-47 RGB-color, 1-5, 2-43, 9-2 Rise time, 2-66, 2-79 RMB, 5-6 roll angle, 2-55 room acoustic parameters, 1-27 room acoustic measurement systems, 12-1 Room Acoustics, 12-1 ROTATE, 2-32 RT overview, 2-26 RT', 2-20, 2-75 RT, 2-74 RT_ss.PLT, 2-26, 2-67 RTC, 2-24, 2-70, 2-71 RULE, 2-44

R
R_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-25 Raised vocal effort, 2-58 Randomized Tail-corrected Cone-tracing, 2-24, 2-71 RApid Speech Transition Index, 2-77 RASTI, 2-11, 2-19, 2-27, 2-63, 2-67, 2-77, 6-5, 6-7, 12-2 RASTI.PLT, 2-19, 2-63 RASTI_ss.PLT, 2-27, 2-67 Ray truncation time mapping 2-18, 2-63 full detailed, 2-24, 2-66 ray-tracing, 2-17, 2-70 REC, 10-5 REC.LOC, 1-4, 2-10 receiver id, 2-1 location, 2-59 model, 7-26, 7-40 positions, 2-83 file, 2-10, 2-58, 11-9 receivers, 1-26 RECEIVERS, 1-5, 2-58, 2-59 rectangular filter, 2-25 REFLECT.GEO, 11-1, A-4 reflection analysis, 2-21 reflection density, 7-43 density growth, 2-71 reflection path (RP) transfer function, 7-39 magnitude, 7-39 phase, 7-40 reflection transform-size, 7-25 reflectors, 2-83, 11-10

S
S_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-22, 2-65 Sabine RT, 2-5, 2-48 Sabine, 1-21, 2-74 SabT, 2-74 sample-rate conversion, 7-12 sample-rate, 7-25 SAY, 2-29 scale factor, 7-3, 7-38 SCALE, 2-31, 2-54, 2-58, 2-59, 2-85 scattering coefficient, 2-70, 2-71 Schafer R W, 12-2 Schultz T, 12-1 SCL-file, 7-3, 7-6, 7-33 screensaver, 1-12 SD, 1-2, 1-20, 4-1 SD0, 4-1, 4-12, 4-18 SD1, 4-1, 4-13, 4-18 SD2, 2-80, 4-1, 4-14, 4-18 SD2DATA, 1-2, 4-2, 4-3, 4-14 sector processing, 7-42 sensitivity, 4-5, 4-8, 4-16 Sequence processing module, 1-22 sequence processing, 8-1, 11-17

I-7

INDEX SETCATTSCALE, 10-5 SHADED.OGL, 1-7, 2-14, 2-62, 11-5 SHADED.PLT, 2-13, 2-61 SHDIRECT, 10-6 SHDIV, 10-6 SHIFT, 2-32 SHOEBOX, 1-3 SHR, 10-6 shuffler, 7-44 SI units, 1-25 SIM-file addition, 7-6, 8-5 SIM-file filtering, 7-12 SIM-file, 7-2, 7-3, 7-5, 7-6 sin(), 2-35 single-connected corners, 2-16, 2-47 slanted ceilings, 2-82 slanted floors, 2-82 smoothed echogram, 2-66 smoothed responses, 2-24 smoothing, 2-22 soffit-mounted source, 2-84 software overview, 1-23 Sone scale, 1-13, 2-22, 2-79 sort order, 3-5 sound soses, 2-25, 2-67 soundcard, 1-23, 7-2 source addition, 1-20, 2-23, 2-27, 6-1 source aim, 2-13 source combination data, 1-20 source combination, 6-1, 6-2 Source directivity module, 1-19 source directivity, 1-2, 1-19, 1-25, 4-1 source id, 2-1 source roll angle, 2-13 SOURCEDEFS, 1-6, 2-54 source-file, 2-9, 2-54, 11-8 sources, 1-26 space bar, 10-4 specular reflection order, 2-21, 2-64 specular reflections, 2-24 speech Intelligibility, 12-2 speech levels, 2-77 speech spectrum, 2-58 Speech Transition Index, 1-13, 2-77 speed of sound, 2-70 sphere HRTFs, 7-18 SPL, 2-21, 6-7 SPL_oct.PLT, 2-21, 2-63 SPLcont, 2-19, 2-20 SPLdir, 2-20 spline interpolation, 7-40 spreadsheet export, 1-27 spreadsheet programs, 2-69 sqrt(), 2-35 SRC, 10-5 SRC.LOC, 1-4, 2-9, 2-54 SRC.PLT, 6-5, 6-6 SRCINFO.PLT, 2-13, 2-61, 6-1, 6-5 SRCINFO3D.PLT, 2-13, 2-62 statistical properties of the room, 2-71 statistics, 2-6, 2-26, 2-63 statusbar, 1-17 Steeneken H J M, 12-2 stereo, 7-29 STI, 1-13, 2-77 STIuser, 1-13, 2-11, 2-19, 2-27, 2-67, 2-77, 6-5 STIUSER.PLT, 2-19 STIUSER_ss.PLT, 2-27, 2-67 stopband suppression, 7-26 Strength (G), 2-76 STRETCH, 10-6 string constants, 1-24, 2-35 STRNGS32.DLL, 1-2 studios, 1-25 sub-division, 1-24, 2-42 suppr. below 88 Hz, 7-26 surface graph, 5-2 Surface properties module, 3-1 surface properties, 1-2, 1-10, 1-24 sweetspot, 7-45 SWITCH32.DLL, 1-2 symbolic constants, 1-24 symmetrical halls, 2-30 syntax, 9-2

T
T-15, 2-75 T-30, 2-75 TAB, 2-28 tail sectors, 7-42 tan(), 2-35 TEXT, 2-46 The FIReverb Suite, 1-4, 1-28 time-constant of the ear, 1-13, 2-24, 2-79

I-8

INDEX TIM-file, 7-11 Tips and Tricks, 2-82 toolbar, 1-16, 5-8 tools, 1-24, 2-30 tooltips, 1-16, 5-8 TOTABS, 2-36, 2-83, 2-86 trademarks, 1-1 TRANSAURAL, 7-14 TRANSLATE, 2-32 tree-structure, 2-30 TREND.PLT, 6-8 TRENDn_ss.PLT, 2-27, 2-67 triangular filter, 2-25 trouble-shooting, 2-85 TRUE, 2-29, 2-35 truncation time ISM, 2-22 Ts, 6-7 Tutorial, 11-1 TUTORIAL, , 1-3, 1-4, 11-1 white space, 2-28 white spectrum, 2-84 view angles, 2-14 view distance, 2-14 VIEW4.PLT, 2-12, 2-61 wire-frame, 5-6 virtual reality, 7-2 visuals, 4-16, 4-17 volume calculation, 2-16, 2-47 volume, 2-7, 2-12, 2-61, 2-69 WRL-file, 1-17, 2-3 VRML, 1-21, 1-27, 2-2 www, 1-29 WXYZ, 7-27, 7-42

XYZ
x(), 2-39 XOR, 2-29 XTRA32.DLL, 1-2 XY stereo, 7-26, 7-42 y(), 2-39 z(), 2-39

U
UNCTT.EXE, 1-2 under-balcony positions, 2-73 unit, 2-28 UNMARKFIX, 10-6 user interface, 1-9 users, 1-14 user-supplied information, 1-4

Misc
#C, 2-34 #DIVIDED, 10-3 #G, 2-35, 2-59 #I, 2-31 #L, 2-36 *, 2-42 %, 2-35 ..., 2-28 ;, 2-28 ( ), 2-42 [ ], 2-41 / \, 2-41 |, 2-28 24-bit, 1-12 32-bit, 1-12 3D balloons, 4-17 3D extents, 4-16 3D text, 2-46 3D view, 2-14, 5-3 3DFACE, 10-1, 10-3, 10-4 3DMESH, 10-4

VW
V_ss_rr_oct.PLT, 2-25, 2-67 walkthrough convolution, 1-29, 7-35 Walkthrough Convolver Script-file, 7-35 walkthrough convolver, 1-13, 7-30 wall hit statistics, 2-26 variables, 8-2 warnings, 1-10 warped planes, 2-68 WAV-calibration, 8-4 WAV-file addition, 7-8 WAV-file info, 2-56 WAV-file player, 7-4, 7-34 WAV-file, 5-1, 5-4, 5-7, 7-2, 7-3, 7-6, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11 WCS-file, 7-35 vectorgram, 2-25, 2-67

I-9

INDEX 5-channel, 7-27, 7-29, 7-42 binaural setup, 7-22 simulation, 7-10

I-10